Series PSE560 Pressure Sensor For General Fluids... 90

Transcription

1 Table of Contents Pressure Switch Selection Guide... Electronic Pressure Switch... Mechanical Pressure... Pressure Switch Application Example... Series SE/ISE High Precision, 2-color Display Digital Pressure Switch... Features... Series SE/ISE High Precision, 2-color Display Digital Pressure Switch... How to Order... Specifications... Setting... Dimensions... Precautions... Series SE4/ISE4 High Precision, Digital Pressure Switch... Features... How to Order... Specifications... Operation... Dimensions... Precautions... Series SE5F,6F/ISE5,6 High Precision, Digital Pressure Switch For General Fluids... Features... Series SE5F/ISE5 High Precision, Digital Pressure Switch For General Fluids... How to Order... Specifications... Dimensions... Series SE6F/ISE6 High Precision, Digital Pressure Switch for General Fluids. How to Order... Specifications... Dimensions... Precautions... Series ISE7/75/75H 2-color Display Digital Pressure Switch... Features... Series ISE7 2-color Display Digital Pressure Switch/For Air... How to Order... Specifications... Series ISE75/75H 2-color Display Digital Pressure Switch/For General Fluids... How to Order... Specifications... Functions... Dimensions... Precautions... Series PSE5/2 High Precision, Remote Type Digital Pressure Sensor... Features... Series PSE5 Pressure Sensor... How to Order... Specifications... Dimensions... Series PSE2 Multi-channel Controller... How to Order... Specifications... Dimensions... Operation : Initial Setting... Operation 2: Pressure Setting... Operation : Special Setting... Function Details... Operation 4: Other Functions... Precautions... Series PSE54/56 High Precision, Remote Type, 2-color Display Digital Pressure Sensor... Features... Series Variations... Series PSE54 Compact Pressure Sensor For General Air

2 How to Order Specifications Dimensions Series PSE56 Pressure Sensor For General Fluids... 9 How to Order... 9 Specifications... 9 Dimensions... 9 Precautions Series PSE55/ Low Differential Pressure Sensor Features Series PSE55 Low Differential Pressure Sensor How to Order Specifications Dimensions Series PSE Controller How to Order Specifications Dimensions... Functions... Precautions... 5 Series SE/ISE LCD Readout Digital Pressure Switch... 8 Features... 8 How to Order... 9 Specifications... Operation... Dimensions... 4 Series PS/PS Air Checker: Electronic Pressure Switch... 6 Features... 6 How to Order... 7 Specifications... 7 Series SE/ISE Compact Pressure Switch... 8 Features... 8 How to Order... 9 Specifications... 2 Dimensions Series SE2/ISE2 Compact Pressure Switch... 2 Features... 2 How to Order Specifications Dimensions Series SP Adsorption Confirmation Switch... How to Order... Precautions... Specifications... Dimensions... Series ISA2 Air Catch Sensor... 4 Features... 5 Series ISA2 Air Catch Sensor... 7 How to Order... 7 How to Order... 8 Specifications... 9 Wiring... 4 Setting Procedure Dimensions Precautions Series IS Mechanical Style Pressure Switch Specifications Construction Series IS Pneumatic Pressure Switch Specifications Construction General Purpose Pressure SwitchSeries ISG Series ISG General Purpose Pressure Switch... 59

3 Specifications How to Order... 6 Related Products:Pressure Switch with Neon Light Specifications Series SM-5/2 Vacuum Switch Diaphragm Style... 6 Specifications... 6 Dimensions Precautions Series PF2A/PF2W Digital Flow Switch Features Series PF2A Digital Flow Switch For Air Integrateddisplay type How to Order Specifications Remote typedisplay unit How to Order Specifications Remote typedisplay unit... 7 How to Order... 7 Specifications... 7 Sensor Unit Construction... 7 Dimensions Series PF2A Digital Flow Switch, Large Flow Type For Air Integrateddisplay type How to Order Specifications Construction Dimensions Series PF2W Digital Flow Switch For Water Integrateddisplay type How to Order Specifications Remote typesensor unit How to Order Specifications Remote typedisplay unit... 8 How to Order... 8 Specifications... 8 Sensor Unit Construction... 8 Dimensions Series PF2W Digital Flow Switch, High Temperature Fluid Type For Water Integrateddisplay type How to Order Specifications Remote typedisplay unit How to Order Specifications Sensor Unit Construction Dimensions... 9 Functions Precautions... 9 Series PF2D Digital Flow Switch For Deionized Water and Chemicals Features Series PF2D Digital Flow Switch For Deionized Water and Chemicals Remote typesensor unit How to Order Specifications Remote typedisplay unit How to Order Specifications Construction... 2 Dimensions... 2 Functions... 2

4 Applicable Fluid Precautions Series IFW5 Diaphragm Style Flow Switch Specifications Construction Dimensions... 2 Precautions Series IF Paddle Style Flow Switch... 2 Specifications... 2 Construction Precautions Dimensions Glossary of Terms Technical Information Notes... 2 Safety Instructions... 2 Warning... 2 Common Precautions Pressure Switches Digital Pressure Switches... 2 Flow Switches... 25

5 Electronic Pressure Switch Series (Separate Type) Model Selection Table Sensor PSE5 PSE54 PSE56 PSE55 Model Fluid General pneumatic General fluids General pneumatic Calibration method Set pressure range Voltage Temperature characteristics Repeatability Hysteresis Output Display (Resolution) Enclosure Note Page to MPa to kpa to kpa to kpa ±% F.S. or less ±2% F.S. or less (25 C) IP4 to kpa to kpa 2 to 24 VDC (Ripple p-p % or less) ±.2% F.S. or less to MPa to kpa to kpa to 5 kpa ±2% F.S. or less ( to 5 C: based on 25 C) ±% F.S. or less ( to 6 C: based on 25 C) IP65 ±% F.S. or less (25 C) ±.% F.S. or less IP

6 2 Electronic Pressure Switch Series (Separate Type) Model Selection Table Controller PSE PSE2 Model Sensor input amount input 4 inputs Calibration method Set pressure range Voltage Temperature characteristics Repeatability Hysteresis Output Display (Resolution) Enclosure Note Page. to MPa to kpa to kpa to kpa 5 to 5 kpa.2 to 2 kpa Hysteresis mode: Variable Window comparator mode: Variable NPN/PNP open collector 2 outputs Analog output Push-button calibration ±.5% F.S. or less ( to 5 C) ±.% F.S. or less. to MPa to kpa to kpa to kpa 2 to 24 VDC (Ripple p-p % or less) NPN/PNP open collector CH: 2 outputs 2 to 4 CH: output Transparency (negative) LCD + Backlight IP4 Panel mounting possible Selectable pressure unit Auto shift function Auto preset function Hysteresis mode: Variable Window comparator mode: Fixed ( digits) Front only IP65 The rest IP4 Display calibration function Anti-chattering function Peak hold Bottom hold

7 Electronic Pressure Switch Series (Self-contained Type) Model Selection Table Self-contained Type SE ISE SE2 ISE2 PS PS SP ISA2 SE ISE SE ISE SE4 ISE4 ISE7 ISE75 ISE75H SE5F ISE5 SE6F ISE6 Model Fluid General pneumatic General fluids Calibration method Trimmer calibration Push-button calibration Set pressure range Voltage Temperature characteristics Repeatability Hysteresis Output Display (Resolution) Enclosure Note Page to kpa to MPa to kpa ±% F.S. or less ( to 6 C) Variable to % Fixed % F.S. or less NPN/PNP open collector Analog output For use with M ejector ±% F.S. or less (5 to 4 C) ±5% F.S. or less ( to 6 C) Fixed % F.S. or less NPN/PNP open collector For use with X or R ejector. to.45 MPa. to.4 MPa ±% F.S. or less ( to 6 C) ±% F.S. or less Fixed 4% F.S. 2-wire type 2 to kpa Fixed.5 kpa NPN open collector Small diameter nozzles Adsorption confirmation For use with X ejector to 2 kpa (Detection distance. to.25 mm) 5 to 2 kpa (Detection distance. to.5 mm) 2 to 24 VDC (Ripple ±% or less). mm or less ( to 6 C). mm or less NPN/PNP open collector LED level meter IP66 Seating confirmation 6-station manifold available to 98 kpa to.98 MPa to kpa ±% F.S. or less ( to 6 C) NPN open collector Analog output LCD (%) For use with X ejector Self-diagnostic function Failure diagnostic output function Peak hold Bottom hold to kpa. to MPa SE: ±.2 F.S. ±2 digits or less ISE: ±.2 F.S. ± digit or less Hysteresis mode: Variable Window comparator mode: Variable NPN/PNP open collector -5 V, 4-2 ma Analog output Green LED IP4 Panel mounting possible Selectable pressure unit to kpa to. kpa. to MPa ±2% F.S. or less ( to 5 C: based on 25 C) ±.2% F.S. ± digit or less Hysteresis mode: Variable Window comparator mode: Fixed ( digits) Digit is min. calibration unit. NPN/PNP open collector Analog output Green LED Red LED IP65 Panel mounting possible Selectable pressure unit Auto shift function Compound pressure to MPa ±.5% F.S. Green LED IP67.4 to MPa.5 to 5 MPa Hysteresis mode: Variable Window comparator mode: Variable setup NPN/PNP open collector PNP open collector Selectable pressure unit to kpa. to MPa ±% F.S. or less ( to 5 C: based on 25 C) ±.2% F.S. ± digit or less Hysteresis mode: Variable Window comparator mode: Fixed ( digits) Digit is min. calibration unit. R thread Panel mounting possible Selectable pressure unit Auto shift function NPN/PNP open collector Analog output Green LED Red LED URJ TSJ Panel mounting possible Selectable pressure unit Auto shift function

8 4 Mechanical Pressure Switch Series Model Selection Table Positive Pressure Negative Pressure IS IS ISG /ISG2 ISG2 /ISG22 ISG /ISG2 ISG9 /ISG29 SM Model Fluid General pneumatic General fluids General pneumatic Calibration method Set pressure range Voltage Repeatability Hysteresis (Calibration range of ISG) Contacts Enclosure Note Page. to.4 MPa. to.7 MPa to VDC to VAC ±.5 MPa ±.5 MPa.8 MPa or less a Set pressure range. to.6 MPa (-X22) 24 to 25 VDC to 25 VAC.5 MPa or less ab Micro-load type available Available indicator light to. MPa ±% F.S.. to.2 MPa Pressure adjusting screw.5 to.7 MPa. to. MPa 7 to kpa 27 to 8 kpa 24 to 22 VDC to 55 VAC 4.5 to 28 VDC (SM-5) VAC/DC or less (SM-2) ±% F.S. ±% F.S. ±% F.S. ±% F.S..2 to.5 MPa (Without pointer scale).2 to.45 MPa (With pointer scale) ab. to.4 MPa (Without pointer scale). to.6 MPa (With pointer scale) Possible with ISG2 (Equivalent to IP44) 2ab contact type (Option) With light (Refer to Series IS276.) 7 to 5 kpa 5 kpa or less (SM-5) 2 kpa or less (SM-2) NPN open collector (SM-5) a (SM-2) Compliant with M ejector

9 Pressure Switch Application Example When selecting a model, please thoroughly review and confirm beforehand, that the model will meet the necessary specification. 5 Adsorption Confirmation Sensor installed close to the pad 2 Sensor installed close to the pad (No. ) Series PSE54 + PSE2 (No. 2) Series PS Due to its small size, the sensor can be installed close to a pad. Calibration is easy with auto-preset function. Adsorption confirmation of a workpiece absorbed with water/oil Series SE Adoption of a stainless diaphram enables to detect, even though water or oil is adhered to a workpiece and then made ingress to the sensing part. 5 Inspection of a radiator Series PSE52 + PSE Low pressure sensor (PSE52- ) is used to detect minute differentiations. Auto shift function reduces influence of fluctuations in the supply pressure. Leak Test Pad adsorption can be confirmed easily. Response delays, caused by piping, will not be a factor due to the close proximity of the sensor to the pad. 4 Installation of a group of sensors as a manifold style at the same site Series PSE

10 6 Pressure Switch Application Example Confirmation of Supply Pressure 6 Confirmation of supply pressure in air line Series ISE Confirmation of supply pressure in washing line Series PSE PSE Supply pressure of water, oil, etc. can be confirmed by sensor for general purpose fluids. Line pressure can be adjusted by monitoring the digital readout. Visual verification of the operating pressure. Output can be programmed to respond to supply pressure drops, etc. 8 9 Confirmation of atmospheric pressure for load lock chamber Series SE6 Verification of pressure in the load lockchamber (vacuum spare chamber of mainchamber) Confirmation of Placement Verifies peening of hydraulic cylinders Series ISE5 Confirmation of correct workpiece Confirmation of a workpiece placement Series ISA2 presence simply Series SE4F Able to confirm the position easily even in a place, where the temperature is high for detecting parts like die-casting, and an environment, where a proximate sensor cannot be used Presence of a workpiece is confirmed by detecting the back pressure at the nozzle. kpa OUT OUT2 z 6--9

11 7 Pressure Switch Application Example Low Differential Pressure Detection 2 Flow control Series PSE55 Filter clogging monitoring 6-- Series PSE Can control air flow by monitoring the flow rate inside the duct. Can control filtration and replacement periods by monitoring the clogging of the filter. 4 Liquid level detection Series PSE Can detect the liquid level through changes in the purge pressure. 6--

12 High Precision, 2-color Display Digital Pressure Switch Series SE/ISE SE ISE PSE I SE PS With One-touch fittings are newly introduced. I SE 2 SP ISA2 IS SM PF2 IF Data Straight type Elbow type 6-2-

13 2-color digital display allows you to choose the setting according to your application requirements. 4 different display settings are available. 2 Abnormal conditions can be detected at a glance! OUT PRESSURE kpa OUT PRESSURE kpa OUT PRESSURE kpa OUT PRESSURE With One-touch fitting (ø4, ø6, ø5/2", ø/4") Reduced dimensions in piping direction 7.8 mm reduction Straight type mm This photo shows 2 display colors simultaneously for product presentation purposes. In actual application, only one color is displayed at a time. kpa OUT 2.4 mm reduction Elbow type PRESSURE kpa 2.4 mm KQ2H6-M5 KQ2L6-M Comparison when One-touch fittings (KQ2H6-M5 / KQ2L6-M5) are connected to the piping ports (M5 x.8)

14 Space-saving improvement Economical use of space Old Model SE4E ISE4E Each display required its own panel opening. Display calibration Old Model 4 SE ISE PSE I SE 26 New Model PS New Model SE ISE 4.5 Compact profile.5 Applicable panel thickness is up to 6 mm. (Panel mounting) With analog output Just one panel opening is required for stackable displays, which can be mounted either horizontally or vertically. In addition to the conventional voltage output type ( to 5 V) Current output type (4 to 2 ma) is now available. Convenient when longer wiring is required Excellent noise resistance Switches for vacuum and positive pressure can be easily distinguished. The different display panel frame colors easily tell them apart. Vacuum/Low pressure (SE) Blue Positive pressure (ISE) Gray Variations Rated pressure range This function allows uniformity in the numbers displayed. More user-friendly controls High-precision resolution: / Raised rubber button controls are clearly set apart, simple to operate, soft to the touch. Plug-type connectors take the burden out of wiring work and maintenance. Setting/Display resolution.2 kpa. MPa Output Switch output Analog output Current consumption Option Vacuum/Low pressure SE kpa kpa Positive pressure ISE MPa NPN/PNP open collector ( output) Voltage output: to 5 V; Current output: 4 to 2 ma 45 ma or less (7 ma or less for current output) Panel mount/bracket I SE 2 SP ISA2 IS SM PF2 IF Data 6-2-

15 4 High Precision, 2-color Display Digital Pressure Switch Series SE/ISE How to Order Option Without lead wire Nil For positive pressure For vacuum/low pressure T C4H C6H N7H C4L C6L N7L R /8 (With M5 female thread) NPT /8 (With M5 female thread) ø4 One-touch fitting ø5/2" One-touch fiting ø6 One-touch fitting ø/4" One-touch fitting ø4 One-touch fitting ø5/2" One-touch fitting ø6 One-touch fitting ø/4" One-touch fitting Option Part No. When optional parts are required separately, use the following part numbers to place an order. Option Lead wire with connector Bracket Panel mount adapter Panel mount adater + Front protective cover Part no. S-27-A S-27-B S-27-C S-27-D ISE SE Piping specifications Straight type Elbow type Output specifications Note Lead wire length: 2 m With mounting screws (M x 5L: 2 pcs.) With M x 8L (2 pcs.) With M x 8L (2 pcs.) NPN output PNP output to 5 V output 4 to 2 ma output 25 M 25 M L Option 2 Nil Bracket A B D Lead wire with connector (Lead wire length: 2 m) Panel mount None Panel mount adapter + Front protective cover Unit specifications Nil With unit switching function M Fixed SI unit (International System of Units) Note) Note) Fixed unit: For vacuum/low pressure: kpa For positive pressure: MPa 6-2-4

16 High Precision, 2-color Display Digital Pressure Switch Series SE/ISE 5 Specifications Piping Specifications Part Port size Wetted part material Weight One-touch fitting Straight type One-touch fitting Elbow type With lead wire with connector (2 m) Without lead wire with connector R /8 M5 x.8 Rated pressure range Regulating pressure range Proof pressure Min. regulating unit Fluid Power supply voltage Current consumption Switch output Note ) Short circuit protection Repeatability Analog output Hysteresis Display Display accuracy Standard Max. load current Max. applied voltage Residual voltage Response time Note 2) Voltage output Note ) Current output Hysteresis mode Window comparator mode Indicator light Temperature characteristics Enclosure Operating temperature range Operating humidity range Withstand voltage Insulation resistance Vibration resistance Impact resistance Environmental resistance 8 g 4 g T NPT /8 M5 x.8 C4H ø4 mm ø5/2 inch SE (Vacuum/Low pressure). to. kpa. to. kpa 5 kpa.2 kpa ±.2% F.S. ±2 digit or less ISE (Positive pressure). to. MPa. to. MPa.5 MPa. MPa Air, Inert gas, Non-flammable gas 2 to 24 VDC, Ripple (p-p) % or less (With power supply polarity protection) 45 ma or less (at no load) NPN or PNP open collector output: output 8 ma V (With NPN output) V or less (With load current of 8 ma) 2.5 ms or less (Response time selections with anti-chattering function: 2, 6, 64, 28 ms) Yes ±.2% F.S. ± digit or less Output voltage: to 5 V ±2.5% F.S. or less (With rated pressure range) Linearity: ±% F.S. or less, Output impedance: Approx. kω Output current: 4 to 2 ma ±2.5% F.S. or less (With rated pressure range) Linearity: ±% F.S. or less Maximum load impedance: Ω with power supply voltage of 2 V; 6 Ω with power supply voltage of 24 V Minimum load impedance: 5 Ω Adjustable (can be set from ) /2 digit, 7-segment indicator, 2-color display (Red and green) Sampling cycle: 5 times/s ±2% F.S. ±2 digit ±2% F.S. ± digit (at 25 C ambient temperature) (at 25 C ambient temperature) Light up when output is ON (Green) ±2% F.S. or less (based on 25 C) IP4 Operating: to 5 C, Stored: to 6 C (No freezing or condensation) Operating and stored: 5 to 85% RH (No condensation) VAC for min. between live parts and enclosure 5 MΩ or more between live parts and enclosure (at 5 VDC) to 5 Hz,.5 mm or 2 m/s 2 amplitude in X, Y, directions for 2 hours each m/s 2 in X, Y, directions times each Compliant with CE Marking and UL (CSA) standards Note ) When switch output is selected, analog output is not available. Note 2) When voltage output is selected, a simultaneous selection of switch output and current output is not available. Note ) When current output is selected, a simultaneous selection of switch output and voltage output is not available. C6H ø6 mm Sensor pressure receiving area: Silicon, Piping port: C62 (Electroless nickel plated), O-ring: HNBR O-ring: NBR O-ring: NBR, fitting: PBT 76 g 8 g N7H ø/4 inch C4L ø4 mm ø5/2 inch C6L ø6 mm 78 g 4 g N7L ø/4 inch SE ISE PSE I SE PS I SE 2 SP ISA2 IS SM PF2 IF Data 6-2-5

17 Series SE/ISE 6 Setting Measuring mode Pressure setting Enter the set value of the pressure to perform switch output. Initial setting Set the output type, response time, and display color switching. Initial Setting Initial setting mode Press and hold the button for 2 seconds or longer. Display monitor will be per Figure A below, and the switch will now be in the display color setting mode. OUT PRESSURE Figure A If the unit specification indicated at the time of ordering is M, the fixed SI unit will be used. If it is Nil, refer to Unit Switching Function on page Select the color for LCD display. Press the UP or DOWN button to choose a display color. OUT OUT PRESSURE ON: Red PRESSURE PRESSURE ON/OFF: Red ON/OFF: Green Press the button to set the color and proceed to the operating mode setting. If the analog output is set, press the UP or DOWN button and select the desired display color from (Green) or (Red). Press the button to exit this mode and return to the measuring mode. 2. Operating mode setting This mode will let you select the switch operating mode. While the current operating mode is displayed, press the UP or DOWN button to select a newly desired operating OUT PRESSURE Hysteresis mode Press the. Display color setting ON OFF Hysteresis (H) ON OFF button. Press the button and hold for 2 sec. or longer. Hysteresis (H) ON OFF P n P P2 n n2 (Standard: Factory setting) (Reversed) (Standard: Factory setting) (Reversed) OUT OUT OUT ON: Green PRESSURE PRESSURE Window comparator mode Hysteresis Hysteresis (H) (H) ON OFF Hysteresis (H) Hysteresis (H) Press the button to set the mode and proceed to the output type setting Press the Press the Measuring mode Detects and displays the pressure and performs switch operations. Other functions such as the value clear function can be set according to the application purpose. The type of switch output can be set arbitrarily. While the current output type is displayed, press the DOWN button to switch between normally open and normally closed. OUT PRESSURE Normally open PRESSURE Normally closed The switch output response time can be set arbitrarily. Chattering can be prevented with a response time setting. While the current response time is displayed, press the UP or DOWN button to select a new response time. OUT PRESSURE OUT OUT PRESSURE PRESSURE Press the button to set the response time and proceed to the auto preset setting. If the operating mode is the window comparator mode, press the button to return to the measuring mode. This function stores the measuring pressure that is set during the auto preset mode as a basic value. While the current setting is displayed, press the UP or DOWN button to select it as an auto preset setting. OUT OUT OUT PRESSURE 2.5 ms 2 ms 6 ms OUT button. button.. Output type setting Press the button to set the output type and proceed to the response time setting. 4. Response time setting 5. Auto preset setting PRESSURE Manual PRESSURE 64 ms 28 ms OUT PRESSURE Auto Press the button to set the auto preset and return to the measuring mode.

18 High Precision, 2-color Display Digital Pressure Switch Series SE/ISE 7 Pressure setting Manual setting Press the button in the measuring mode to display the set value. and the current set value blink alternately. OUT PRESSURE Normally Open PRESSURE Alternately displayed OUT PRESSURE Auto preset setting. Auto preset preparation mode While in the measuring mode, press the button to activate the auto preset preparation mode, and will be displayed. Proceed to prepare the devices to perform the pressure setting. While is still displayed, press both the UP and DOWN buttons simultaneously to return to the measuring mode. OUT PRESSURE SE ISE PSE I SE PS OUT Normally Closed Press the button to display the next set value. Press the UP or DOWN button to change the value. (Refer to How to Set Value on the lower right hand corner of this page.) Hysteresis mode In this mode, hysteresis (H) and the set value for hysteresis are displayed alternately after setting P. Press the button to return to the normal measuring mode. Press the UP or DOWN button to change the value. (Refer to How to Set Value below right.) Window comparator mode In this mode, P2 and the current set value are displayed alternately after setting P. Press the button to display the next set value ( : hysteresis). Press the UP or DOWN button to change the value. (Refer to How to Set Value at right.) Next, and the set value for hysteresis will be displayed alternately. Press the button to return to the normal measuring mode. Press the UP or DOWN button to change the value. (Refer to How to Set Value at right.) Pressure set value can be verified without holding or stopping the switch output operation. 2. Auto preset setting Press the button to activate the mode to execute auto preset functions. When is displayed, start the system operation and change the pressure. The set value will be automatically detected and stored. While is still displayed, press the button to complete the setting and return to the normal measuring mode. OUT PRESSURE How to Set Value To enter a value such as the one for pressure setting:. Press the UP or DOWN button to change the set value. The first digit blinks. st digit 2. Press the UP or DOWN button to set the value arbitrarily. (If there is no button operation for more than seconds, the current value will be automatically set and the function will return to the set value display mode.). With every push of the button, the next (higher) digit blinks. 2nd digit rd digit When the left-most digit is zero, or will blink. If the button is pressed while the left-most digit is blinking, the right-most digit will now blink. 4. Press and hold the button for second or longer to return to the set value display mode. I SE 2 SP ISA2 IS SM PF2 IF Data 6-2-7

19 Series SE/ISE 8 Setting Function setting Display calibration During measuring mode, press the and DOWN buttons simultaneously and hold for 2 seconds or longer. and current measured value will be displayed. Press the UP or DOWN button to change the set value. If there is no button operation for more than 2 seconds after changing the set value, the display mode returns to displaying and the current measured value. Press the button to display the adjusted value (percent). The adjusted value and will be alternately displayed. Press the button to return to the normal measuring mode. Displayed pressure value OUT OUT PRESSURE PRESSURE ±5% R.D. (±2.5% R.D.) Alternately displayed Alternately displayed OUT + Applied pressure PRESSURE PRESSURE : Factory setting display value set prior to shipment : Display calibration range Peak/Bottom hold function This function constantly detects and updates the maximum and minimum pressure values and allows to hold the display value. To use a peak hold function, press and hold the UP button for second or longer. The maximum pressure value is held and blinks repeatedly. Press and hold the UP button again for second or longer to release this function and return to the measuring mode. To use a bottom hold function, press the DOWN button for second or longer. The minimum pressure value is held and blinks repeatedly. Press and hold DOWN button again for second or longer to release this function and return to the measuring mode. OUT Current measured value OUT PRESSURE Adjusted value (Percent) This function eliminates slight differences in the output values and allows uniformity in the numbers displayed. Displayed values of the pressure sensor can be calibrated to within ±5% for Series ISE and ±2.5% for Series SE. Note) When the display calibration function is used, the regulating pressure value may change ± digit. Key lock function This function prevents incorrect operations such as changing the set value accidentally. Press the button and hold for 4 seconds or longer to display the current or setting. Press the UP or DOWN button to select the setting and set this function with the button. Use the mode to avoid accidental button operation. To release a key lock function, press the button and hold for 4 seconds or longer to display the current setting, and select the mode. Measuring mode Press the button and hold for 4 sec. or longer Lock ero out (ero ADJ) function This function clears and resets the displayed value as long as the measuring pressure is within ±7 digits of the atmospheric pressure. (Due to individual product differences, the setting range varies ±% F.S.) This function is effective in detecting pressure fluctuations that exceed a certain amount without being affected by the supply pressure. Press and hold the UP and DOWN buttons simultaneously to reset the display. Release the buttons to return to the measuring mode. Measuring mode + Press and hold for second or longer. Selection of lock and unlock Unlock Unit Conversion Function When not selecting M for unit specification Desired display unit can be selected. Press the UP or DOWN button to switch the unit, and the set value is automatically converted. The conversion order is: PA GF bar PSi inh mmh Press the button to set the unit and proceed to the display color setting. For vacuum/low pressure Pa kgf/cm 2 bar psi inchhg mmhg For positive pressure MPa kgf/cm 2 bar psi Indication of Units Displayed unit Pa kgf/cm 2 bar psi mmhg inchhg ISE. MPa...2 SE.2 kpa Measuring mode 6-2-8

20 High Precision, 2-color Display Digital Pressure Switch Series SE/ISE 9 Description Error Correction Take the following corrective solutions when errors occur. Error description overcurrent error Residual pressure error Applied pressure error System error LCD display Indication light (Green) Displays the switch operation status. UP button Use this button to change the mode or increase the ON/OFF set value. It also allows you to switch to the peak value display mode. button Use this button to switch the mode and set the set value. Condition Load current of switch output is more than 8 ma. Pressure is applied during the zero out operation as follows: When the switch for positive pressure is used: ±.7 MPa or more. When the switch positive pressure is used: ±7. kpa or more. After displaying for seconds, it will return to the measuring mode. Due to the individual product difference, the setting range varies ±% F.S. Supply pressure exceeds the maximum regulating pressure. Supply pressure is below the minimum regulating pressure. Internal data error Internal data error Internal data error Internal data error Solution OUT Shut off the power supply. After eliminating the output factor that caused the excess current, turn the power supply back on. Bring the pressure back to atmospheric pressure and try using the zero out function. Reduce/Increase supply pressure to within the regulating pressure range. Shut off the power supply. Turn the power supply back on. If the power should not come back on, please contact SMC for an inspection. PRESSURE MPa LCD display Displays the current pressure condition, setting mode conditions, selected display unit, and error codes. A display color type can be selected from either a single color display with red or green, or 2-color display in which green and red are switched according to the output. DOWN button Example of Internal Circuit and Wiring -25 NPN open collector output Maximum V, 8 ma Residual voltage: V or less -26 Analog output type to 5 V (±2.5% F.S.) Output impedance: kω -28 Analog output type 4 to 2 ma (±2.5% F.S.) Maximum load impedance: Power supply voltage 2 V: Ω Power supply voltage 24 V: 6 Ω Minimum load impedance: 5 Ω -65 PNP open collector Maximum 8 ma Use this button to change the mode or decrease the ON/OFF set value. It also allows you to switch to the bottom value display mode. Main circuit Main circuit Main circuit Main circuit Brown DC(+) Load Black OUT Blue DC( ) Brown DC(+) Black OUT (Analog output) Load Blue DC( ) Brown DC(+) Black OUT (Analog output) Load Blue DC( ) Brown DC(+) Black OUT Load Blue DC( ) + 2 to 24 VDC + 2 to 24 VDC + 2 to 24 VDC + 2 to 24 VDC SE ISE PSE I SE PS I SE 2 SP ISA2 IS SM PF2 IF Data 6-2-9

21 Series SE/ISE Dimensions Lead wire with connector 2 ±. 2-M x.5 Thread depth 4 PRESSURE MPa M5 x.8 OUT SMC 2 ±. Width across flats 2.5 : R /8 T: NPT /8 With bracket A A øb C øb Straight Elbow With One-touch fitting SMC One-touch fitting size ø4, ø5/2" ø6 ø/4" Straight A B A (mm) Elbow B C

22 High Precision, 2-color Display Digital Pressure Switch Series SE/ISE Dimensions Panel mount SE ISE PSE I SE PS OUT PRESSURE MPa 8.75 Panel mount adapter + Front protective cover Panel thickness.5 to Panel thickness.5 to 6 R4.5 MADE IN JAPAN R4.5 2 I SE 2 SP ISA2 IS SM PF2 IF Data 6-2-

23 Series SE/ISE 2 Dimensions Panel fitting dimension -pc. mounting Multiple (2 pcs. or more) horizontal mounting PRESSURE MPa PRESSURE MPa PRESSURE MPa OUT OUT OUT.4 x n pcs. +.5 x (n pcs. ) OUT OUT OUT PRESSURE MPa PRESSURE MPa PRESSURE MPa x n pcs. +.5 x (n pcs. ).4 24 and up MADE IN JAPAN MADE IN JAPAN Multiple (2 pcs. or more) vertical mounting.4 24 and up MADE IN JAPAN MADE IN JAPAN MADE IN JAPAN MADE IN JAPAN 6-2-2

24 Series SE/ISE Specific Product Precautions Be sure to read before handling. Handling Warning. Do not drop, bump, or apply excessive impacts (98 m/s2) while handling. Although the body of the sensor may not be damaged, the internal parts of the sensor could be damaged and lead to a malfunction. 2. The tensile strength of the cord is 5 N. Applying a greater pulling force on it can cause a malfunction. When handling, hold the body of the sensor do not dangle it from the cord.. Do not exceed the screw-in torque of 7 to 9 N m when installing piping. Exceeding this value may cause malfunctioning of the sensor. 4. Do not use pressure sensors with corrosive and/or flammable gases or liquids. 5. Allow a sufficient margin of tube length in piping in order to prevent application of torsional, tensile or moment load to the tubes and fittings. 6. When a brand of tubing other than SMC is used, make sure that the tolerance of the tube s O.D. satisfies the following specifications. ) Nylon tubing: ±. mm or less 2) Soft nylon tubing: ±. mm or less ) Polyurethane tubing: +.5 mm or less,.2 mm or less 7. The applicable fluid is air. Please consult with SMC if the switch is to be used with other types of fluids. Warning Connection. Incorrect wiring can damage the switch and cause a malfunction or erroneous switch output. Connections should be done while the power is turned off. 2. Do not attempt to insert or pull the pressure sensor or its connector when the power is on. A switch output malfunction may occur.. Wire separately from power lines and high voltage lines, avoiding wiring in the same conduit with these lines. Malfunctions may occur due to noise from these other lines. 4. If a commercial switching regulator is used, make sure that the F.G. terminal is grounded. Warning Operating Environment. Our pressure switches are CE marked; however, they are not equipped with surge protection against lightning. Lightning surge countermeasures should be applied directly to system components as necessary. 2. Our pressure switches do not have an explosion proof rating. Never use in the presence of an explosive gas as this may cause a serious explosion.. Do not use in an environment where static electricity can cause problems, otherwise system failure or malfunction may result. Caution 2. Mounting with bracket Mount a bracket to the body using two M x 5L mounting screws and install on piping with hexagon socket head cap screws. The switch can be installed horizontally depending on the installation location. Mounting. Mounting with panel mount adapter Panel mount adapter To release push the clips outward as shown on the picture, and pull back towards you. Panel Mounting screw M x 5L Bracket Panel mount adapter Claw Tightening torque for bracket mounting screw should be.5 to.7 N m. SE ISE PSE I SE PS I SE 2 SP ISA2 IS SM PF2 IF Data 6-2-

25 Series SE/ISE Specific Product Precautions 2 Be sure to read before handling. 4 Connection/Removal of Connector To connect the connector, insert it straight while pinching the lever, and then push the lever into the jack of the housing and lock it. To remove the connector, pull it straight out while applying pressure with your thumb to the lever and unhooking it from the jack. Lever DC polarity indicator Lead wire (Brown) Piping Cut the tube perpendicularly. Hold the tube and insert it into the One-touch fitting carefully and securely all the way to the bottom. One-touch fitting Tube Lead wire (Black) Lead wire (Blue) Do not attempt to insert or pull the pressure sensor or its connector when the power is on. A switch output malfunction may occur. Caution Regulating Pressure Range and Rated Pressure Range Set the pressure within the rated pressure range. The regulating pressure range is the range of pressure that is possible in setting. The rated pressure range is the range of pressure that satisfies the specifications (accuracy, linearity, etc.) on the sensor. Although it is possible to set a value outside the rated pressure range, the specifications will not be guaranteed even if the value stays within the regulating pressure range. Switch For vacuum/ low pressure For positive pressure SE ISE kpa kpa kpa (. MPa) Pressure range kpa kpa 5 kpa MPa kpa kpa MPa MPa Rated pressure range of switch Regulating pressure range of switch 6-2-4

26 High Precision, Digital Pressure Switch Series SE4/ISE4 SE ISE PSE I SE PS I SE 2 SP ISA2 IS SM PF2 IF Data 6-2-5

27 2 High speed response: 2.5 ms or less With anti-chattering function Stable switch output is possible even with sudden Pressure Set value P P2 Momentary change Anti-chattering function Devices such as large bore cylinders and high-flow vacuum ejectors consume a large volume of air when they operate, and this may cause a momentary drop in the primary pressure. This function prevents such momentary pressure drops from being detected as abnormal pressures by allowing the response time selection to be changed. [Selectable response times: t] 2.5 ms (normal), 24 ms, 92 ms or 768 ms The normal setting is selected when shipped from the factory. (Operating principle) The pressure values measured within the user-selected response time are averaged, and switch output (ON/OFF) is determined by comparing this averaged pressure value with the set pressure. With auto shift function Allows switch output unaffected by variations in primary pressure. Auto shift function Erroneous operation may occur if there is fluctuation in the primary pressure. The auto shift function compensates for pressure changes to ensure proper ON/OFF switch response during such fluctuations. (Operating principle) At the point when the primary pressure fluctuates, the set pressure value is compensated by setting the auto shift input (external input) to low (no-voltage) input, using the pressure measured at that point as a standard. Compound pressure (SE4F) Able to detect suction pressure (vacuum pressure) and release pressure (positive pressure) with a single pressure switch. types of piping Different piping methods are possible to accommodate the installation location. Switch output operation when normal ON OFF Switch output operation when ON anti-chattering OFF function is used t (ms) (Averaging) Repeatability ±.2% F.S. ± digit or less t (ms) (Averaging) Time Time Time Without using auto shift When the primary pressure fluctuates, a correct determination becomes impossible. Pressure Set value P P2 Switch output, 2 When using auto shift Pressure Set value P P2 Switch output, 2 Auto shift input ON OFF ON OFF Hi Lo Primary pressure normal Primary pressure normal Primary pressure drop Does not turn ON Set value compensation Set value compensation Primary pressure drop 5 ms or more ms or less Primary pressure increase Time Does not turn OFF Primary pressure increase Time Time Time Switch output response time when auto shift is input. [ ] Time IP65 compatible Dusttight/Splash proof type 6-2-6

28 High Precision, Digital Pressure Switch How to Order Series SE4/ISE4 Nil Set pressure range. to. MPa For positive pressure For positive pressure For vacuum/compound pressure ISE4 SE SE ISE PSE I SE Nil F. to. kpa. to. kpa : R /8 (With M5 female threads) T: NPT /8 (With M5 female threads) R /8, NPT /8 M5 x.8 female threads C4: With ø4 One-touch fitting C6: With ø6 One-touch fitting Wall mount Option ø4, ø6 One-touch fitting Set pressure range For vacuum pressure For compound pressure W: Rc /8 Reverse pressure two directions Input/Output specifications 22 NPN open collector 2 outputs + analog output NPN open collector 2 outputs + auto shift input 62 PNP open collector 2 outputs + analog output 7 PNP open collector 2 outputs + auto shift input Option Set pressure range. to. kpa. to. kpa. to. MPa Piping specifications M5: M5 x.8 (Female threads) Wall mount Rc /8 Rc /8 M5 x.8 Note When equipped with auto shift function, the following ranges can be set. Setting range. to. kpa. to. kpa. to. MPa When optional parts only are required, order with the part numbers inside ( ). Unit specifications Nil With unit switching function Note) M SI unit only Note 2) Note ) This will no longer be sold for use in Japan after the new Weight and Measure Act is implemented (October,999). Note 2) Fixed unit For vacuum/compound pressure: kpa For positive pressure: MPa Lead wire length Nil L.6 m m Option Nil None Bracket A A B E F Bracket B Panel mount (S-24-A) (S-24-B) (S-22-A) Panel mount (S-24-C) + Front protective cover PS I SE 2 SP ISA2 IS SM PF2 IF Data 6-2-7

29 Series SE4/ISE4 4 Specifications Rated pressure range Operating pressure range/set pressure range Withstand pressure Set pressure resolution Note ) Applicable fluid Power supply voltage Current consumption Switch output Repeatability Hysteresis mode Hysteresis Window comparator mode Response time (With anti-chattering function) Output short circuit protection Display Display accuracy Indicator light Note 2) Analog output Auto shift input Note ) Environmental resistance Insulation resistance Vibration resistance Impact resistance Temperature characteristics Port size Lead wire Weight kpa MPa kgf/cm 2 bar psi mmhg InHg Enclosure Ambient temperature range Ambient humidity range Withstand voltage Example of Internal Circuit and Wiring SE4F (Compound pressure) SE4 (Vacuum pressure). to. kpa. to. kpa. to. kpa. to. kpa 5 kpa Air, Non-corrosive/Non-flammable gas 2 to 24 VDC ±%, Ripple (p-p) % or less 55 ma or less NPN or PNP 2 outputs Max. load current : 8 ma Max. applied voltage: VDC (With NPN output) Residual voltage : V or less (With 8 ma load current) ±.2% F.S. ±digit or less Variable Fixed ( digits) Note4) 2.5 ms or less (With anti-chattering function: 24 ms, 92 ms and 768 ms selections) Yes /2 digit LED display (Sampling cycle: 5 times/sec.) ±2% F.S. ± digit or less (at ambient temperature of 25 ± C) Green LED (OUT: Lights when ON), Red LED (OUT2: Lights when ON) Output voltage: to 5 V ±5% F.S. or less (in rated pressure range) Linearity: ±% F.S. or less Output impedance: Approx. kω No-voltage input (Reed or solid state), input 5 ms or more IP65 ISE4 (Positive pressure). to. MPa. to. MPa.5 MPa.... Output voltage: to 5 V ±2.5% F.S. or less (in rated pressure range) Linearity: ±% F.S. or less Output impedance: Approx. kω Operating: to 5 C, Stored: to 6 C (No condensation or freezing) Operating/Stored: 5 to 85% RH (No condensation) VAC for min. between lead wires and body 5 MΩ or more (at 5 VDC) between lead wires and body to 5 Hz at the smaller of amplitude.5 mm or acceleration 98 m/s 2 ( G) in X, Y, directions for 2 hrs. each (De-energized) 98 m/s 2 ( G) in X, Y, directions times each (De-energized) In a temperature range of to 5 C, ±2% F.S. or less of pressure measured at 25 C : R /8, M5 x.8, T: NPT/8, M5 x.8, W: Rc /8 C4: With ø4 One-touch fitting, C6: With ø6 One-touch fitting, M5: M5 female threads 5-wire oil resistant heavy-duty cord (.5 mm 2 ) /T types approx. 6 g, W type approx. 8 g, C4/C6/M5 types approx. 92 g (Each including.6 m lead wires) Note ) Equipped with unit switching function (Types without the unit switching function use SI units (kpa or MPa) only.) Note 2) For SE4 (F)/ISE Note ) For SE4 (F)/ISE Note 4) For SE4F (compound pressure) with psi indication, this is. to.4 psi. Note 5) For SE4F (compound pressure) with psi indication, zero clear is in the range of ±. psi. SE4(F) ISE4- -22(L)-(M) With analog output SE4(F) ISE4- -(L)-(M) With auto shift input Main circuit Main circuit kω.2 kω 6.8 kω DC (+) (Brown) Analog output (Gray) OUT (Black) OUT2 (White) DC ( ) (Blue) DC (+) (Brown) Auto shift input (Gray) OUT (Black) OUT2 (White) DC ( ) (Blue) Load Load Load Load 2 to 24 VDC 2 to 24 VDC Note) When equipped with auto shift function, the following ranges can be set. Set pressure range. to. kpa. to. kpa. to. MPa SE4(F) ISE4- -62(L)-(M) With analog output SE4(F) ISE4- -7(L)-(M) With auto shift input Main circuit Main circuit kω Setting range. to. kpa. to. kpa. to. MPa.2 kω 6.8 kω DC (+) (Brown) Analog output (Gray) OUT (Black) OUT2 (White) DC ( ) (Blue) Load DC (+) (Brown) Auto shift input (Gray) OUT (Black) OUT2 (White) DC ( ) (Blue) Load Load Load 2 to 24 VDC 2 to 24 VDC 6-2-8

30 High Precision, Digital Pressure Switch Series SE4/ISE4 5 Description /2-digit LED Displays present pressure. Displays each mode. Displays error mode. LED (Green) Displays OUT output condition When it is ON, the LED is illuminated. UP button Switching of the mode and set value OUT kpa OUT2 LED (Red) Displays OUT2 output condition. When it is ON, the LED is illuminated. DOWN button Switches the mode and set value. button Switches to each mode and fixes the set value. SE ISE PSE I SE PS Calibration Procedures Setting procedure Initial setting Set Output mode, Response time and Auto or Manual mode. Manual pressure setting Enter the set value of the pressure to perform switch output. Auto preset Automatically sets the pressure for the adsorption confirmation or supply pressure confirmation. ero clear Adjusts the zero point of the atmospheric pressure. Manual pressure setting Allows fine-tuning of the data set automatically by auto preset. Key lock mode Mode is not switched, even if the button is pressed during operation. Normal operation Measured pressure is displayed and the switch operation begins. I SE 2 SP ISA2 IS SM PF2 IF Data 6-2-9

31 Series SE4/ISE4 6 Calibration Procedures Initial Setting. Initial condition mode 2. Selection of output mode OUT. Selection of output mode OUT2 Press the button. Manual Pressure Setting Press the button for more than 2 seconds until is displayed. Release it when the display turns to. Unit mode: When using a product with a unit switching function, refer to the next page for unit-setting (for overseas). Output mode differs by the pressure set value. Select the manual set mode in the initial condition mode and press the button until or is displayed. Press the button. Select the output mode for OUT by pressing either button or button. Normally open mode Normally closed mode 4. Selection of response time 5. Setting Auto/Manual Select the response time by pressing either button or button. ( : 2.5 ms, : 24 ms, : 92 ms, : 768 ms Select among them.) button: Increases set value button: Decreases set value Displays the set values or alternately. Press the button. Press the button. Select the output mode for OUT2 by pressing either button or button. Normally open mode Normally closed mode Select Auto preset mode or Manual set mode by pressing either button or button. Auto preset mode Manual set mode. Manual set mode 2. Input set point value for OUT (). Input set point value for OUT (2) 4. Input set point value for OUT2 () 5. Input set point value for OUT2 (2) Press the button. Press the button. Press the button. button: Increases set value button: Decreases set value Displays the set values or alternately. button: Increases set value button: Decreases set value Displays the set values or alternately. button: Increases set value button: Decreases set value Displays the set values or alternately. 6. Display of setting auto shift Only for SE4(F)/ISE4- -/7(L)-M, displays the input mode and the compensation value alternately. If auto shift input is not complete, zero is displayed. Press the button to complete the setting. Press the button to complete the setting

32 High Precision, Digital Pressure Switch Series SE4/ISE4 7 Unit Set It's only subject to SE4(F)/ISE4- - (L). Output Type ON Auto Preset (For adsorption confirmation) High Vacuum Max. A ON OFF Min. B Unit selection Set the unit by either button or button. : kpa or MPa, : kgf/cm 2, : bar, : psi, : inhg, : mmhg Press button. OUT: Selection of the output mode Suction Workpiece Workpiece 2 Released Workpiece Workpiece 2 Workpiece n Atmosphere Max. A: Max. pressure value when a workpiece is adsorbed. ON = A Min. B: Min. pressure value when a workpiece is not adsorbed. OFF = B +. Auto preset mode 2. Preparation for auto preset. Auto preset of OUT Select the Auto preset mode in the initial setting mode and press the button until is displayed. Workpiece n A B 4 A B 4 OUT OUT2: Same as OUT. [P] Output mode [N] Press the button. YES NO YES NO Prepare the equipment for use under operating conditions. When setting OUT is not required, press both the button and button simultaneously in this state to skip to. 4. Preparation for auto preset Press the button. Press the button. Repeat adsorption and nonadsorption release several times in this state. The optimal set value is determined automatically. 5. Auto preset of OUT2 Supplies vacuum pressure, changing the condition of a workpiece by adsorption nozzle, etc. When setting OUT2 is not required, press both the button and button simultaneously in this state to skip to the measurement mode. ON OFF H P-2 P- High pressure (for positive pressure/compound pressure) High vacuum (for vacuum pressure) OFF P- P-2 High pressure (for positive pressure/compound pressure) High vacuum (for vacuum pressure) ON OFF H n-2 n- High pressure (for positive pressure/compound pressure) High vacuum (for vacuum pressure) ON OFF n- n-2 High pressure (for positive pressure/compound pressure) High vacuum (for vacuum pressure) H H Hysteresis mode H (Fixed hysteresis) = digits Window comparator mode Hysteresis mode H (Fixed hysteresis) = digits Window comparator mode Repeat adsorption and nonadsorption several times in this state. The optimum set value is determined automatically. Press the button to complete the setting. SE ISE PSE I SE PS I SE 2 SP ISA2 IS SM PF2 IF Data 6-2-2

33 Series SE4/ISE4 8 Calibration Procedures Auto Preset (In the case of confirming the supply pressure). Auto preset mode 2. Preparation for auto preset. Auto preset of OUT Press the button. ON point (C, C) OFF Other Functions Key lock mode Initiate key lock Press the button for 4 seconds or longer. Release it when the display turns to. Peak mode ero clear ON point = C, C OFF point = C- digits, C- digits ( digit is the minimum setting unit.) Select the Auto preset mode in the initial setting mode and press the button until is displayed. Hysteresis ( digits) Display by pressing button or button. Press the button. Prepare the equipment for use under operating conditions. When setting OUT is not required, press both the button and button simultaneously in this state to skip to. 4. Preparation for auto preset Press the button. 5. Auto preset of OUT2 Prepare the equipment for use under operating conditions of OUT2. When setting OUT2 is not required, press both the button and button simultaneously in this state to skip to the measurement mode. Used to avoid a malfunction when buttons on the front part of the switch are pressed. Press the button to complete the setting. Allows holding of the maximum pressure value on display under measurement. While displayed, pressing the button for second or longer causes the peak mode to display and blink. Pressing the button once again for second or longer reinstates it. Note) Displaying the peak and the bottom display is not distinguished. Allows an adjust to zero on the display if the pressure to be measured is within a range of ±7 digits from the atmospheric pressure. Pressing the + buttons simultaneously with the supply pressure released to the atmosphere, causes it to reset to zero on the display and completes the zero clear operation. The function then returns to the measurement mode. Release key lock Press the button for 4 seconds or longer. Release it when the display turns to. Bottom mode The pressure is read and the optimal set value is determind automatically. The pressure is read and the optimal set value is determind automatically. Display by pressing button or button. Press the button to complete the setting. Press the button to complete the setting. Allows holding of the minimum pressure value on display under measurement. While displayed, pressing the button for second or longer causes the bottom mode to display and blink. Pressing the button once again for second or longer reinstates it. Note) Displaying the peak and the bottom display is not distinguished

34 High Precision, Digital Pressure Switch Series SE4/ISE4 9 Dimensions SE4(F)/ISE4- T MPa M5 x.8 thread depth () Lead wire length : R /8 T: NPT /8 OUT 7.8 OUT2 Atmospheric release port SE4(F)/ISE4-W () Lead wire length OUT MPa OUT Atmospheric release port Rc / ø.5 ø M x.5 thread depth 4 For splash proof use (IP65), insert an air tube into the atmospheric release port. (Refer to Precautions on page for details.) M4 x.7 thread depth 4 R 6.5 For splash proof use (IP65), insert an air tube into the atmospheric release port. (Refer to Precautions on page for details.) 2 Rc /8 2 Width across flats 2 SE ISE PSE I SE PS I SE 2 SP ISA2 IS SM PF2 IF Data 6-2-2

35 Series SE4/ISE4 Dimensions SE4(F)/ISE4 C4 C6 M () Lead wire length OUT OUT2 MPa Atmospheric release port For M5 Precautions Caution. Immediately after supplying power, there is drift of about ±.5% F.S. When used with very low pressure, allow the unit to warm up for about 2 to minutes. 2. Do not use in locations where there is splashing or spraying of oils and solvents.. When using a commercially available switching regulator, be sure to ground the FG terminal. 4. In locations where the switch is exposed to water and dust, etc., these may enter the switch from the atmospheric release port. Insert ø4 tubing (inside diameter ø2.5) into the atmospheric release port, and extend the other end to a safe area where water, etc., is not splashed or sprayed. Be sure that tubing is not bent and holes are not blocked, etc., or it will become impossible to make correct pressure measurements One-touch fitting ø4, ø ø.5 For splash proof use (IP65), insert an air tube into the atmospheric release port. (Refer to Precautions for details.) M5 x.8 thread depth 5 OUT MPa OUT2 Atmospheric release port Air tube Recommended tubing (SMC) TU425 (Polyurethane)

36 High Precision, Digital Pressure Switch For General Fluids Series SE F/ISE High precision/high resolution pressure switch. Applicable for pressure detection with a wide range of fluids, by using a stainless steel diaphragm. SE ISE PSE I SE PS I SE 2 SP ISA2 IS SM PF2 IF Data

37 2 Pressure detection for a wide range of fluids. Hydraulic fluid (JIS-K22) Silicon oil ( JIS-K22) Lubricating oil (JIS-K6) Fluoro carbon To confirm absorption of workpiece with water on the surface, e.g. wet LCD glass plate To measure hydraulic pressure Using of stainless steel diaphragm The stainless steel diaphragm prevents direct contact between sensor and measured fluid. Liquid and gas contact areas Stainless steel 6 Fittings Stainless steel 4 Extremely low leakage Sensor and fittings are electron-beam welded. Leakage is kept at the lowest level by using VCR and Swedgelok fittings. SE5F / ISE5 x -5 Pa m /s SE6F / ISE6 x - Pa m /s Enclosure Option Application examples IP65 Panel mount Panel mount + Front side protection cover To confirm adsorption of workpieces containing water With bracket To confirm primary pressure of cleaning line Argon Air containing drain Ammonia Freon Carbon dioxide Nitrogen To measure low-quality air, containing drain Leakage test with nitrogen Pressure sensor Fitting Stainless steel diaphragm To confirm working pressure of hydraulic cylinder

38 High precision and high resolution Compound pressure Positive pressure Repeatability.2% F.S. digit or less Variety of functions Variations Anti-chattering function Prevents erroneous operation due to sudden fluctuations in primary pressure, by allowing the response time to be changed. Selectable response times: 2.5 ms (default), 24 ms, 92 ms, 768 ms or less Auto shift function Special fitting types are used in semiconductor production equipment (Metal gasket seal fittings) Leak rate: x Pa. m /s SE/ISE6(F)-A2 Pressure detection is not affected by fluctuations in primary pressure. Series SE6F/ISE6 SE/ISE6(F)-B2 URJ / 4 TSJ / 4 Model Port size Rated pressure range Output /2 (. kpa) / (. MPa) Standard thread type Leak rate x 5 Pa. m /s Switch output Analog output kpa kpa Auto preset function Automatic pressure setting is possible. Saves time for setting operation. Key lock function Peak and bottom display function ero out function Confirmation of atmospheric pressure of load lock SE5F ISE5 SE6F ISE6 MPa 2 outputs NPN or PNP Special fittings for the semiconductor industry (Metal gasket seal fittings) R / 4, NPT /4, G / 4 (With M5 male thread) URJ /4, TSJ / 4 kpa kpa Output voltage to 5 V x Pa m /s MPa SE ISE PSE I SE PS I SE 2 SP ISA2 IS SM PF2 IF Data

39 4 High Precision, Digital Pressure Switch For General Fluids Series SE5F/ISE5 How to Order For positive pressure ISE L M For compound pressure SE5 F 2 22 L M 2 T2 G2 Option Analog Output Suitable model: SE5F/ISE5- -22/62(L)-(M) Analog output value (V) Series ISE5 5 Option Piping specifications R /4 (M5 with female screw), Piping in backward direction NPT /4 (M5 with female screw), Piping in backward direction G /4 (M5 with female screw), Piping in backward direction Pressure. MPa Analog output value (V) Series SE5F kpa Pressure 5 kpa When option parts are required separately, use the following part numbers to place an order. Option Part no. Qty. Note Bracket A S-24-A With 2 pcs. of mounting screws Bracket D S-24-D With 2 pcs. of mounting screws Panel mount S-24-E Panel mount + Front protection cover S-24-F Input/Output specifications 22 NPN open collector 2 output + Analog output NPN open collector 2 output + Auto shift input 62 PNP open collector 2 output + Analog output 7 PNP open collector 2 output + Auto shift input Option Note) Auto shift input is used for the auto shift function. For more information, please refer to Auto Shift Function on page Lead wire length L m Option Nil A D E F None Bracket A Panel mount Unit specification Bracket D Refer to the dimensions for the difference between brackets A and D. Panel mount + Front protection cover Note ) Nil With unit switching function Note 2) M Fixed SI unit Note ) Under the New Measurement Law, which has been in effect since October, 999, sales of switches with the unit conversion function have not been allowed for use in Japan. Note 2) Fixed units: For compound pressure : KPa For positive pressure: MPa

40 High Precision, Digital Pressure Switch for General Fluids Series SE5F/ISE5 5 Specifications Rated pressure range Operating pressure range and regulating pressure range Proof pressure kpa MPa Setting/Display resolution kgf/cm 2 bar psi mmhg inhg Hysteresis mode Hysteresis Window comparator mode Response time Output short circuit protection Display Display accuracy Indicator light Analog output Note 2) Note ) Auto shift input Enclosure Ambient temperature range Ambient humidity range Withstand voltage Insulation resistance Vibration resistance Shock resistance Note ) In case of types with unit conversion function. (Types without unit conversion function are fixed to the SI units (KPa or MPa).) Note 2) When a type with analog output is selected. Note ) When a type with auto shift is selected. Note 4). to.4 psi in psi display. Note 5) Value clear. psi in psi display. Function Note ) Fluid Power supply voltage Current consumption Switch output Repeatability Environmental resistance Temperature characteristics Wetted material Port size Lead wire Weight SE5F (Compound pressure) to kpa to kpa 5 kpa Fluid that will not corrode stainless steel 6 and 4 2 to 24 VDC, Ripple (p-p) % or less 55 ma or less (With no load) NPN or PNP 2 output (Max. applied voltage V (NPN), Max. load current 8 ma).2% F.S. digit or less.% F.S. digit or less Variable ( or above) Fix ( digits) Note 4) 2.5 ms or less (With anti-chattering function: 24 ms, 92 ms, 768 ms or less) Yes /2 digit LED display (Sampling frequency: 5 times/sec) 2% F.S. digit or less (With ambient temperature of 25 C) Green LED (OUT: Light up when ON), Red LED (OUT2: Lights up when ON) Output voltage: to 5 V 5% F.S. or less Output voltage: to 5 V 2.5% F.S. or less No-voltage input (Solid state switch or reed switch), input 5 ms or more IP65 Operating: to 5 C, Stored: to 6 C (No condensation or freezing) Operating and stored: 5 to 85% RH (No condensation) 25 VAC for min, between all lead wires and enclosure 2 MΩ or more (at 5 VDC) between all lead wires and enclosure to 5 Hz with.5 mm amplitude or 98 m/s 2, whichever is smaller 98 m/s 2 in X, Y, directions times each (Not energized) % F.S. or less of measured pressure at 25 C in temperature range of to 5 C Pressure receiving area: Stainless steel 6, Fittings: Stainless steel 4 2: R /4, M5 x.8 T2: NPT /4, M5 x.8 5-wire oil proof heavy-duty cable (.5 mm 2 ) Approx. 2 g (Each including m lead wire) Note) The possible set ranges for types with auto shift function are as follows: Regulating pressure range. to. kpa. to. MPa ISE5 (Positive pressure). to. MPa. to. MPa.5 MPa.... Possible set range. to. kpa. to. MPa Various additional functions are available for easy measurement, switch operation and check of measured values suitable for the conditions of the measured fluid. Note ) Auto shift function Anti-chattering function Key lock function Peak hold function Bottom hold function ero out function Note ) Unit conversion (for overseas use) Note ) Select and order by specifying the types and models. Can correct the pressure set point value of switch output according to fluctuations in the primary pressure Prevents malfunction due to sudden fluctuations in the primary pressure by adjusting the response time. The key board operation can be locked to prevent incorrect operation on the operation switch. Can retain the maximum pressure value displayed during measurement. Can retain the minimum pressure value displayed during measurement The pressure display can be set at zero when the pressure is open to the atmosphere. Can convert the display value (for overseas use only). SE ISE PSE I SE PS I SE 2 SP ISA2 IS SM PF2 IF Data

41 Series SE5F/ISE5 6 Output Method [P] YES ON OFF P_2 P_ Large pressure and vacuum pressure H H Hysteresis mode H (Fix hysteresis) = digits OUT Same with OUT2. Output mode [n] NO YES NO ON OFF P_ ON OFF H ON OFF n_ n_2 n_ P_2 Large pressure and vacuum pressure Large pressure and vacuum pressure H n_2 Large pressure and vacuum pressure Window comparator mode Hysteresis mode H (Fix hysteresis) = digits Window comparator mode 6-2-

42 High Precision, Digital Pressure Switch for General Fluids Series SE5F/ISE5 7 Example of Internal Circuit and Wiring 5 5 SE 6 F/ISE (L)-(M) 5 5 SE 6 F/ISE 6 - -(L)-(M) With analog output With auto shift input Main circuit kω DC (+) (Brown) Analog output (Gray) OUT (Black) OUT 2 (White) DC ( ) (Blue) 2 VDC to 24 VDC 5 5 SE 6 F/ISE (L)-(M) 5 5 SE 6 F/ISE (L)-(M) With analog output With auto shift input Main circuit kω DC (+) (Brown) Analog output (Gray) OUT (Black) OUT 2 (White) DC ( ) (Blue) Load Load Load Load 2 VDC to 24 VDC Main circuit Main circuit.2 kω 6.8 kω.2 kω 6.8 kω DC (+) (Brown) Auto shift input (Gray) OUT (Black) OUT 2 (White) DC ( ) (Blue) Load DC (+) (Brown) Auto shift input (Gray) OUT (Black) OUT 2 (White) DC ( ) (Blue) Load Load Load 2 VDC to 24 VDC 2VDC to 24VDC SE ISE PSE I SE PS I SE 2 SP ISA2 IS SM PF2 IF Data 6-2-

43 Series SE5F/ISE5 8 Auto Shift Function This function uses the measured pressure at the time of auto shift input as the reference pressure value and corrects the set point values P_ and P_2 of switch output and P_ and P_4 of switch output 2. P_ to P_4 correspond to n_ to n_4 in case of normally closed circuit. When auto shift is not used: Fluctuations in the primary pressure interrupt correct judgement. Normal Drop of Increase of primary pressure primary pressure primary pressure Pressure When auto shift is used: When the primary pressure changes, set the auto shift function to Lo. The pressure value at this point will be saved as the reference value to correct the pressure set point values in order to make correct judgments. Normal Drop of Increase of primary pressure primary pressure primary pressure P P2 ON Switch output, 2 OFF Auto shift input P P2 Switch output, 2 ON OFF Pressure Hi Lo Anti-chattering Function 5 ms or more ms or less Time Time [ ] Switch output response time when auto shift inputs. A large bore cylinder or ejector consumes a large amount of air in operation and may experience a temporary drop in the primary pressure. This function prevents detection of such temporary drops in primary pressure as abnormal pressure. <Principle> This function averages pressure values measured during the response time set by the user and then compares the average pressure value with the pressure set point value to output the result on the switch. Auto shift function conditions and explanation Keep the pressure constant at least for 5 ms after the last transition signal of auto shift input. At the time of auto shift input, the display unit displays ooo for about second. The pressure value at this time is saved as the correction value C_5. The set point values P_ to P_4 or n_ to n_4 are corrected based on the saved correction values. The time between the auto shift input and start of switch output is ms or less. If the set point value corrected by auto shift input falls out of the possible set range, the correction value is not saved. The display will show UUU if the set point value is above the upper limit and LLL if it is below the lower limit. The correction value C_5 set by auto shift input disappears when the power is turned off. The correction value C_5 for the auto shift function is reset to zero (the initial value) when the power is turned on again. The correction value is not stored on the EEPROM. The possible set range for types with auto shift function is as follows: Regulating pressure range The possible set range for types with auto shift function. to. kpa. to. kpa. to. MPa. to. MPa Pressure P Set point value P2 Switch output ON operation in OFF normal conditions Switch output operation when ON chattering prevention function is on OFF Temporary fluctuation t (ms) t (ms) Time <Averaging process> <Averaging process> Time Time 6-2-2

44 High Precision, Digital Pressure Switch for General Fluids Series SE5F/ISE5 9 Description Take the following measures when an error occurs. Error description Over current error OUT OUT 2 LCD display Condition Solution Load current of switch output is more than 8 ma. Shut off the power supply. After eliminating the output factor that caused the excess current, turn the power supply back on. Residual pressure error Pressure is applied during the zero out operation as follows:.7 MPa or more with ISE5/6 7. kpa or more with SE5F/6F After displaying for seconds, it will return to the measuring mode. Bring the pressure back to atmospheric pressure and try using the zero out function. SE ISE PSE Applied pressure error Auto shift error System error The upper limits and lower limits are shown in the table below. Regulating pressure range Compound pressure. to. kpa Positive pressure. to. MPa Lower limit. kpa. MPa With auto shift function Compound pressure Positive pressure Regulating pressure range. to. kpa. to. MPa Lower limit. kpa. MPa Supply pressure exceeds the maximum regulating pressure. Supply pressure is below the minimum regulating pressure. The value is above the upper limit of the set pressure After displaying this message for about seconds, the switch returns to the measurement mode. The value is below the upper limit of the set pressure After displaying this message for about seconds, the switch returns to the measurement mode. Internal data error Internal data error Internal data error Internal data error Upper limit. kpa. MPa Upper limit. kpa. MPa Reduce/Increase supply pressure to within the regulating pressure range. Set the pressure again so that the sum of the applied pressure and pressure set point value at the time of auto shift input will not fall out of the set pressure range. Shut off the power supply. Turn the power supply back on. If the power should not come back on, please contact SMC for an inspection. I SE PS I SE 2 SP ISA2 IS SM PF2 IF Data 6-2-

45 Series SE5F/ISE5 Dimensions SE5F/ISE5-2 T2 G2 2.4 (In case of NPT 2.9) M x.5 depth Piping port R, NPT /4 Piping port M5 x.8 depth ø ø4.5 ø22 Piping port G /4 Piping port G 6-2-4

46 High Precision, Digital Pressure Switch for General Fluids Series SE5F/ISE5 Dimensions Bracket A A 2 SE ISE PSE I SE PS Bracket D Panel mount Bracket A S-24-A A Bracket D S-24-D Front protection cover Cutting dimensions for panel mounting 7 or more ø View A 4 or more View A 4.5 I SE 2 SP ISA2 IS SM PF2 IF Data The thickness of the panel is to.2 mm

47 2 High Precision, Digital Pressure Switch for General Fluids Series SE6F/ISE6 How to Order For positive pressure ISE6 A2 22 L M For compound pressure SE6 F A2 22 L M Analog Output Suitable mode: SE6F/ISE6- -22/62(L)-(M) Analog output value (V) Series ISE6 5 Pressure A2 B2. MPa Analog output value (V) Piping specifications URJ /4, Piping in the backward direction TSJ /4, Piping in the backward direction Input/Output specifications NPN open collector 2 output + Analog output NPN open collector 2 output + Auto shift input PNP open collector 2 output + Analog output PNP open collector 2 output + Auto shift input Series SE6F kpa Pressure 5 kpa Option When option parts are required separately, use the following part numbers to place an order. Option Part no. Qty. Note Bracket A S-24-A With 2 pcs. of mounting screws Bracket D S-24-D With 2 pcs. of mounting screws Panel mount S-24-E Panel mount + Front protection cover S-24-F URJ /4 and TSJ /4 are special fittings for semiconductor manufacturing equipment. Option Note) Auto shift input is used for the auto shift function. For more information, please refer to Auto Shift Function on page Lead wire length L m Option Nil A D E F None Bracket A Bracket D Refer to the dimensions for the difference between brackets A and D. Panel mount Unit specifications Nil M Panel mount + Front protection cover With unit switching function Note 2) Fixed SI unit Note ) Note ) Under the New Measurement Law, which has been in effect since October, 999, sales of switches with the unit conversion function have not been allowed for use in Japan. Note 2) Fixed unit: For compound pressure: KPa For positive pressure: MPa

48 High Precision, Digital Pressure Switch for General Fluids Series SE6F/ISE6 Specifications Rated pressure range Operating pressure range and regulating pressure range Proof pressure Setting/Display resolution kpa MPa kgf/cm 2 bar psi mmhg inhg Fluid Power supply voltage Current consumption Switch output Repeatability Hysteresis mode Hysteresis Window comparator mode Response time Output short circuit protection Display Display accuracy Indicator light Analog output Note 2) Note ) Auto shift input Environment resistance Temperature characteristics Wetted material Port size Lead wire Weight Function Note ) Enclosure Ambient temperature range Ambient humidity range With stand voltage Insulation resistance Vibration resistance Shock resistance SE6F (Compound pressure) to kpa to kpa 5 kpa. Note ) In case of types with unit conversion function. (Types without unit conversion function are fixed to the SI units (KPa or MPa).) Note 2) When a type with analog output is selected. Note ) When a type with auto shift is selected. Note 4). to.4 psi in psi display. Note 5) Value clear. psi in psi display. ISE6 (Positive pressure). to. MPa. to. MPa.5 MPa s Fluid that will not corrode stainless steel 6 and 4 2 to 24 VDC, Ripple (p-p) %or less 55 ma or less (With no load) NPN or PNP 2 output (Max. applied voltage V (NPN), Max. load current 8 ma).2% F.S. digit or less.% F.S. digit or less Variable ( or above) Fix ( digits) Note 4) 2.5 ms or less (With chattering prevention function: 24 ms, 92 ms, 768 ms or less) Yes /2 digit LED display (Sampling frequency: 5 times/sec) 2% F.S. digit or less (Ambient temperature of 25 C) Green LED (OUT: Light up when ON), Red LED (OUT2: Light up when ON) Output voltage: to 5 V 5% F.S. or less Output voltage: to 5 V 2.5% F.S. or less No-voltage input (Solid state switch or reed switch), 5 ms or longer input IP65 Operating: to 5 C, Stored: to 6 C (No condensation or freezing) Operating and stored: 5 to 85% RH (No condensation) 25 VAC for min, between all lead wires and enclosure 2 MΩ or more (at 5VDC) between all lead wires and enclosure to 5 Hz with.5 mm amplitude or 98 m/s 2, whichever is smaller 98 m/s 2 in X, Y, directions times each (Not energized) % F.S. or less of measured pressure at 25 C in temperature range of to 5 C Pressure receiving area: Stainless steel 6, Fittings: Stainless steel 4 A2: URJ /4 B2: TSJ /4 5-wire oil proof heavy-duty cord (.5 mm 2 ) Approx. 2 g (Each including m lead wire) Note) The possible set ranges for types with auto shift function are as follows: Regulating pressure range Possible set range. to. kpa. to. kpa. to. MPa. to. MPa Various additional functions are available for easy measurement, switch operation and check of measured values suitable for the conditions of the measured fluid. Note ) Auto shift function Anti-chattering function Key lock function Peak hold function Bottom hold function ero out function Note ) Unit conversion function (For overseas use) Note ) Select and order by specifying the types and models. Can correct the pressure set point value of switch output according to fluctuation in the primary pressure. Prevents malfunction due to sudden fluctuations in the primary pressure by adjusting the response time. The key board operation can be locked to prevent incorrect operation on the operation switch. Can retain the maximum pressure value displayed during measurement. Can retain the minimum pressure value displayed during measurement. The pressure display can be set at zero when the pressure is open to the atmosphere. Can convert the display value (For overseas use only) SE ISE PSE I SE PS I SE 2 SP ISA2 IS SM PF2 IF Data 6-2-7

49 Series SE6F/ISE6 4 Dimensions SE6F/ISE6- A2 B M x.5 depth Piping port URJ / ø.5 The following items are identical with those of Series SE5F/ISE5. Item Output type Example of internal circuit and wiring Auto shift function, Anti-chattering function Measures to be taken when error occurs Reference page Piping port TSJ /4 Piping port TSJ 6-2-8

50 High Precision, Digital Pressure Switch for General Fluids Series SE6F/ISE6 5 Dimensions Bracket A A 2 SE ISE PSE I SE PS Bracket D Panel mount Bracket A S-24-A A 2 4 Bracket D S-24-D Front protection cover Cutting dimensions for panel mounting Piping port URJ / or more ø View A 4 or more View A I SE 2 SP ISA2 IS SM PF2 IF Data The thickness of the panel is to.2 mm

51 Series SE6F/ISE Description (Common to SE5F/ISE5 and SE6F/ISE6) / 2 digit LED Displays current pressure Displays current mode Displays error mode LED (Green) Displays OUT switch output status Lights up when ON UP button Use this button to change the mode or set value. OUT kpa OUT2 LED (Red) Displays OUT 2 switch output status Light up when ON Down button Use this button to change the mode or set value. Set button Use this button to change the mode or set value. Setting (Common to SE5F/ISE5 and SE6F/ISE6) Calibration procedure Initial setting Set Output mode, Response time and Auto/ Manual mode. Unit conversion Display unit can be changed (for overseas use only). Manual calibration Enter the set value on the pressure to perform switch output Value clear Auto preset The pressure set point is calibrated automatically at the time of adsorption or primary pressure confirmation Manual fine adjustment The data set by auto preset function is fine turned. Adjust the zero point of atmospheric pressure. Key lock Prevents incorrect operation such as overwriting set point value by mistake. Normal operation Detects and displays pressure and operates switch. Peak hold Can retain the maximum pressur displayed during measurement. Bottom hold Can retain the minimum pressure displayed during measurement

52 High Precision, Digital Pressure Switch for General Fluids Series SE6F/ISE Setting (Common to SE5F/ISE5 and SE6F/ISE6) Initial setting. Initial setting mode 2. OUT output mode selection. OUT2 output mode selection Manual pressure setting Press the button at least 2 seconds. Release it when the display turns to no Select the output mode of OUT with or button. no : Normally open mode, nc : Normally closed mode Set the response time with or button. (Select from 2.5: 2.5 ms, 24: 2.4 ms, 92: 92 ms, and 768: 768 ms. ) The output method is determined by the pressure set point value. Press the button. Select the output mode of OUT2 with or button. 2no : Normally open mode, 2nC : Normally closed mode 4. Response time selection 5. Auto/Manual setting Press the button. Select the auto preset mode or manual calibration mode with the or F button. RU _ : Auto preset mode, nrn : Manual calibration mode.. Manual setting mode 2. OUT () output set point value input. OUT (2) output set point value input Select the manual setting mode as the initial setting mode. Press the button and hold it unit P_ or n_ appears on the display. Press the button. Press the button. Press the button to complete calibration. 4. OUT2 () output set point value input 5. OUT2 (2) output set point value input Press the button. Unit In case of types with specifications: unit conversion function, refer to Unit setting (for overseas use) on page button: Increases the set point value. button: Decrease the set point value. P_ or n_ and the set point value light up alternately. Press the button. Please refer to Chattering prevention function on page button: Increases the set point value. button: Decrease the set point value. P_ or n_ and the set point value light up alternately. button: Increases the set point value. button: Decrease the set point value. P_4 or n_4 and the set point value light up alternately. Press the button. button: Increases the set point value. button: Decrease the set point value. P_2 or n_2 and the set point value light up alternately. 6. Auto shift input display Press the button to complete calibration. C_5 and the correction value light up alternately. In case there has been no auto shift input, zero is displayed. Auto shift input is displayed only if auto shift is supported by the I/O specifications (-/-7). It is not displayed in case of types with analog output (-22/-62). SE ISE PSE I SE PS I SE 2 SP ISA2 IS SM PF2 IF Data 6-2-4

53 Series SE6F/ISE Setting (Common to SE5F/ISE5 and SE6F/ISE6) Auto preset (Example: Adsorption Confirmation). Auto preset mode 2. Preparation of auto preset. OUT auto preset Press the button. Select auto preset mode as the initial setting mode. Press the button and hold it until RP appears on the display. Prepare the equipment to be set while RP is displayed. If OUT setting is not required, press the and buttons simultaneously to skip to RP2. Repeat vacuum and break several times while AIL is displayed. The optimum set point value is determined automatically. Vacuum Max.A ON point OFF point Min.B Atmosphere High Work 4. Preparation of auto preset 5. OUT2 auto preset Press the button. Press the button. Press the button to complete calibration. Change the vacuum nozzle or other conditions of the workpiece and supply vacuum pressure. If OUT2 setting is not required, press the and buttons simultaneously to skip to the measurement mode. Work Not adsorption Suction Work 2 Work 2 Work n Work n Max.A: Maximum pressure value when workpiece is vacuumed. ON point = A Min.B: Maximum pressure value when workpiece is not vacuumed. OFF point = B + Repeat vacuum and break several times while AIL is displayed. The optimum set point value is determined automatically. A B 4 A B

54 High Precision, Digital Pressure Switch for General Fluids Series SE6F/ISE Setting (Common to SE5F/ISE5 and SE6F/ISE6) Key lock function Can prevent incorrect operation of operation buttons on the switch front. Key lock start Key lock cancel SE ISE Press the button at least 2 seconds. Release it when the display turns to UnL. Press the button to complete calibration. Change the display to LoC with the or button. Press the button at least 4 seconds. Release it when the display turns to LoC. Change the display to "UnL with the or button. Press the button to complete calibration. PSE I SE PS Peak/Bottom hold function Can retain the maximum pressure value displayed (peak value) and minimum pressure value displayed (bottom value) during measurement. Peak hold ero out Press the button at least for second during pressure display to enter the bottom display mode. The displayed value will blink. To return, press the button again at least for second. Note) There is no apparent difference between peak display and bottom display. The displayed value can be calibrated at zero if the measured pressure is in the range of 7 increments of atmospheric pressure. Let the supply pressure open to the atmosphere. Hold both and buttons simultaneously to reset the display value to zero. After resetting, the operation returns to the measurement mode. Bottom hold Unit conversion (for overseas use) 5 5 Only for SE F/ISE - - (L) Unit selection 6 Press the button at least for second during pressure display to enter the bottom display mode. The displayed value will blink. To return, press the button again at least for second. Note) There is no apparent difference between peak display and bottom display. 6 Press the button. OUT output mode selection Goes to 2. OUT output mode selection in Initial Setting on page Set the unit with the or button. : kpa or MPa : kgf/cm 2 : bar : psi : inhg Note ) : mmhg Note ) Note ) Calibration is available with series SE5 and SE6. I SE 2 SP ISA2 IS SM PF2 IF Data 6-2-4

55 5 Series SE 6F/ISE 5 6 Pressure Switch Precautions Be sure to read before handling. 2 Warning. Do not drop, or apply excessive impact (98 m/s 2 ) while handing. Although the body of the sensor may not be damaged, the internal parts of the sensor could be damaged and lead to a malfunction. 2. The tensile strength of the cord is 49 N. Applying a greater pulling force on it can cause a malfunction. When handling, hold the body of the sensor do not dangle it from the cord.. Do not exceed the screw-in torque of.6 N m when installing piping. Exceeding this value may cause malfunctioning of the sensor. 4. Do not use pressure sensors with corrosive and/or flammable gases or liquids. Warning Caution Handling Connection. Incorrect wiring can damage the switch and cause a malfunction or erroneous switch output. 2. Turn off the power before connecting the wires.. Wire separately from power lines and high voltage lines, avoiding wiring in the same conduit with these lines. Malfunctions may occur due to noise from these lines. 4. If a commercial switching regulator is used, make sure that the F.G. terminal is grounded. Warning Operating Environment. Our pressure switches are CE marked; however, they are not equipped with surge protection against lightning. Lightning surge countermeasures should be applied directly to system components as necessary. 2. Our pressure switches do not have an explosion proof rating. Never use it in the presence of an explosive gas as this may cause a serious explosion.. Do not use in an environment with spattering liquid of oil or solvent. 2. In an environment where the body of the switch is exposed to water or dust, there is possibility of water or dust invasion of the switch through the atmospheric release port. Insert a ø4 tube (with inside diameter of ø2.5) into the atmospheric release port and pipe the other end to a place with no spattering water or other liquid. Do not fold or clog the tube or the pressure cannot be measured properly. To a safe place with no water or dust Air tube Atmospheric release port Confirm that the air tube is inserted to the bottom of the atmospheric release port. Use SMC TU425 (Material: Polyurethane, O.D.: ø4, I.D: ø2.5) as the air tube. Warning Pressure Source. Use of toxic, corrosive or flammable gas. The materials of the pressure sensor and fittings on the switch are stainless steel 6 and stainless steel 4. Do not use toxic or corrosive gas. The switch is not protected against explosion. Do not use it with flammable gas, either. 2. Fluid compatibility The fluid contact areas are stainless steel 6 (pressure sensor) or stainless steel 4 (fittings). Use fluid that will not corrode the materials. (For corrosiveness of fluid, consult with the manufacturer of the fluid.) <SE6F/ISE6> Helium leakage test Helium leakage test is conducted on the welding parts. Use a ferrule a ferrule by (Swagelok fittings) as the TSJ fittings and packing, ground, etc. by Cajon (VCR fittings) as the URJ fittings. If a ferrule, packing or ground by other manufacturers are to be used, conduct helium leakage test before using those products. Mounting Method Caution. Mounting with panel mount adapter Panel mounting adapter A 2. Mounting with brackets Mount a bracket to the using two M x 5L mounting screws and install on piping with a hexagon socket cap screws. The switch can be installed horizontally depending on the installation location. Mounting screw M x 5L Bracket A or D Front protection cover (Option) Panel mounting adapter B Panel The tightening torque for bracket mounting screw should be.98 N m or less

56 2-color Display Digital Pressure Switch Series ISE7/75/75H For General Fluids For Air 2-color Display (green and red) Selectable from four patterns () (2) () (4) ON red green red green OFF Easily identifiable abnormal readings mm character height M2 Connector Lead wire with M2 connector (5m) Straight and right-angled connectors With Bracket User-selectable mounting orientation MPa 5 MPa (ISE75) MPa (ISE7) green red red green Withstand pressure: Rated pressure x Model with initial display settings of PSI is also available as standard. Port size Rc/4, NPT/4, G/4(ISO79) (ISE75H) 2-color digital Function Anti-chattering Display calibration ero out Key lock Unit display switching For Air ISE7 (MPa) OUT U P MPa DOWN PRESSURE SWITCH IP67 For General Fluids ISE75(MPa) OUT U P MPa DOWN PRESSURE SWITCH Metal Body Type (Die-cast aluminum) ISE75H(5MPa) Plain Gray Orange OUT U P MPa DOWN PRESSURE SWITCH SE ISE PSE I SE PS I SE 2 SP ISA2 IS SM PF2 IF Data

57 2 2-color Display Digital Pressure Switch/For Air Series ISE7 How to Order MPa ISE7 2 4 M Optional Part No. When option parts are required separately, use the following part numbers to place an order. Bracket 2 Connector Pin Assignments Output -4 Brown 2 White Blue 4 Black Output -65 Brown 2 White Blue 4 Black Option Lead wire with M2 connector, straight 4 DC (+) OUT (PNP) DC ( ) OUT (NPN) DC (+) NC DC ( ) OUT (PNP) Piping 2 Rc/4 N2 NPT/4 F2 G/4 (ISO79) Note ) Note ) G/4: Applicable to ISO79- Output Fixed setting: 4 NPN open collector output (Pin no. 4) + PNP open collector output (Pin no. 2) 65 PNP open collector output (Pin no. 4) Part No. S--A S--B Nil M Display unit With unit display switching function Note ) Fixed SI unit Pressure unit: PSI (Initial value) P With unit display switching function Note ) Fixed unit: MPa Bracket B Bracket assembly OUT U P DOWN Note Bracket B and the bracket assembly make up one set. Lead wire length: 5m Option Nil S L Option 2 Nil A None None With bracket Note: Mounting screws are not included. Note) Mounting screws are not included. Lead wire with M2 connector (5m), straight Lead wire with M2 connector (5m), right-angled Lead wire with M2 connector, right-angled S--C Lead wire length: 5m

58 Digital Pressure Switch For Air Series ISE7 Specifications Rated pressure range Set pressure range Proof pressure Set pressure resolution Fluid Power supply voltage Current consumption Switch output Max. load current Max. applied voltage Residual voltage Response time Short circuit protection Repeatability Hysteresis mode Hysteresis Window comparator mode Display Display accuracy Indication light Functions Enclosure Fluid temperature range Environmental Operating humidity range Operating temperature range resistance Withstand voltage Insulation resistance Vibration resistance Impact resistance Temperature characteristics (Based on 25 C: Operating temperature range) ISE7 to MPa. to MPa.5MPa.MPa Air, lnert gas, Non-flammable gas 2 to 24 VDC, Ripple (p-p) % or less (with power supply polarity protection) 55 ma or less (at no load) Output -4: Fixed setting; NPN open collector output (Pin no. 4) + PNP open collector output (Pin no. 2) Note ) Output -65: PNP open collector output (Pin no. 4) Note ) 8 ma V (with NPN output) V or less (with load current of 8 ma) 2.5 ms (Response time selections with anti-chattering function: 2 ms, 6 ms, 64 ms, ms, 2 ms) With short circuit protection ±.5%F.S. Adjustable (can be set from ) digit, 7-segment indicator, 2-color display (red and green) can be interlocked with the switch output, Sampling cycle: 5 times/s ±2%F.S. ± digit or less (at 25 C ± C) Light up when output is ON (Green) Anti-chattering function, Unit display switching function, ero out function, Key lock function IP67 to 5 C (with no freezing or condensation) Operating: to 5 C, Stored: to 6 C (with no freezing or condensation) Operating and stored: 5 to 85%RH (with no condensation) VAC for min. between live parts and enclosure 5 MΩ or more between live parts and enclosure (at 5 VDC Mega) to 5 Hz,.5 mm or 98 m/s 2 amplitude in X, Y, directions for 2 hours each 98 m/s 2 in X, Y, directions times each (Non energized) ±2%F.S. or less Standard Compliant with CE Marking and UL/CSA (UL58) standards Wetted material Fitting: C62 (electroless nickel plated), Sensor port: PBT, Sensor pressure receiving area: silicon, O-ring: NBR Port size 2: Rc/4, N2: NPT/4, F2: G/4 (ISO79) Note 2) Lead wire Lead wire with M2 4-pin pre-wired connector (5 m) Mass (Weight) 9 g (excluding the lead wire with M2 4-pin pre-wired connector) Note ) The NPN and PNP outputs function for a single set point. Note 2) G/4: Applicable to ISO79- Internal Circuit and Wiring Examples Fixed setting: NPN open collector output + PNP open collector output (the pressure set point for switching the output signal is common to both outputs.) Maximum V (NPN only), 8 ma, Residual voltage V or less Output -4 DC (+) Main circuit (Brown) OUT (NPN) (Black) OUT (PNP) (White) DC ( ) (Blue) Load Load + 2 to 24 VDC Output -65 Main circuit See the operation manual for information on how to set and on handling precautions. DC (+) (Brown) N.C. (White) OUT (PNP) (Black) Load DC ( ) (Blue) + 2 to 24 VDC SE ISE PSE I SE PS I SE 2 SP ISA2 IS SM PF2 IF Data

59 4 2-color Display Digital Pressure Switch/For General Fluids Series ISE75/75H How to Order MPa ISE M 5MPa ISE75H 2 4 M Output Brown White Blue Black DC (+) OUT (PNP) DC ( ) OUT (NPN) Optional Part No. Piping 2 Rc/4 N2 NPT/4 F2 G/4 (ISO79) Note ) Note ) G/4: Applicable to ISO79- Output Fixed setting: 4 NPN open collector output (Pin no. 4) + PNP open collector output (Pin no. 2) 65 PNP open collector output (Pin no. 4) When option parts are required separately, use the following part numbers to place an order. Option Part No. Note Bracket 2 Connector Pin Assignments Output -65 Brown 2 White Blue 4 Black Lead wire with M2 connector, straight 4 DC (+) NC DC ( ) OUT (PNP) S--A S--B Nil M Display unit With unit display switching function Fixed SI unit Note ) Pressure unit: PSI (Initial value) P With unit display switching function Note ) Fixed unit: MPa Bracket B Bracket assembly OUT U P DOWN Lead wire length: 5m Option 2 Nil None With bracket A Option Nil None Lead wire with M2 connector (5m), S straight Lead wire with M2 connector (5m), L right-angled Bracket B and the bracket assembly make up one set. Lead wire with M2 connector, right-angled S--C Lead wire length: 5m

60 Digital Pressure Switch For General Fluids Series ISE75/75H 5 Specifications Rated pressure range Set pressure range Proof pressure Set pressure resolution Fluid Power supply voltage Current consumption Switch output Repeatability Hysteresis mode Hysteresis Window comparator mode Display Display accuracy Indication light Functions Enclosure Fluid temperature range Environmental Operating humidity range Operating temperature range resistance Withstand voltage Insulation resistance Vibration resistance Impact resistance Temperature characteristics (Based on 25 C: Operating temperature range) Standard Compliant with CE Marking and UL/CSA (UL58) standards Wetted material Pressure receiving area: Stainless steel SUS6, Fittings: Stainless steel SUS4 Port size 2: Rc/4, N2: NPT/4, F2: G/4 (ISO79) Note 2) Lead wire Lead wire with M2 4-pin pre-wired connector (5 m) Mass (Weight) 2 g (excluding the lead wire with M2 4-pin pre-wired connector) Note ) The NPN and PNP outputs function for a single setpoint. Note 2) G/4: Applicable to ISO79- Internal Circuit and Wiring Examples Fixed setting: NPN open collector output + PNP open collector output (the pressure set point for switching the output signal is common to both outputs) Maximum V (NPN only), 8 ma, Residual voltage V or less Output -4 Output -65 DC (+) Main circuit Max. load current Max. applied voltage Residual voltage Response time Short circuit protection (Brown) OUT (NPN) (Black) OUT (PNP) (White) DC ( ) (Blue) ISE75 ISE75H to MPa to 5MPa.4 to MPa.5 to 5MPa MPa 45MPa.MPa Fluid that will not corrode stainless steel SUS4 and SUS6 2 to 24 VDC, Ripple (p-p) % or less (with power supply polarity protection) 55 ma or less (at no load) Output -4: Fixed setting; NPN open collector output (Pin no. 4) + PNP open collector output (Pin no. 2) Note ) Output -65: PNP open collector output (Pin no. 4) Note ) 8 ma V (with NPN output) V or less (with load current of 8 ma) 2.5 ms (Response time selections with anti-chattering function: 2 ms, 6 ms, 64 ms, ms, 2 ms) With short circuit protection ±.5%F.S. Load Load + 2 to 24 VDC Adjustable (can be set from ) ditit, 7-segment indicator, 2-color display (red and green) can be interlocked with the switch output, Sampling cycle: 5 times/s ±2%F.S. ± digit or less (at 25 C ± C) Light up when output is ON (Green) Anti-chattering function, Unit display switching function, ero out function, Key lock function IP67 5 to 8 C (with no freezing or condensation) Operating: 5 to 5 C, Stored: to 6 C (with no freezing or condensation) Operating and stored: 5 to 85%RH (with no condensation) 25 VAC for min. between live parts and enclosure 5 MΩ or more between live parts and enclosure (at 5 VDC Mega) to 5 Hz,.5 mm or 98 m/s 2 amplitude in X, Y, directions for 2 hours each 98 m/s 2 in X, Y, directions times each (Non energized) Main circuit ±%F.S. or less See the operation manual for information on how to set and on handling precautions. DC (+) (Brown) N.C. (White) OUT (PNP) (Black) Load DC ( ) (Blue) + 2 to 24 VDC SE ISE PSE I SE PS I SE 2 SP ISA2 IS SM PF2 IF Data

61 Series ISE7/75/75H 6 Description Functions Indication light (Green) button UP button Display calibration function This function eliminates slight differences in the output values and allows uniformity in the numbers displayed. Displayed values of the pressure sensor can be calibrated to within ±5% of their readings. Displayed pressure value ±5%R.D. + Applied pressure Peak/Bottom hold function : Factory setting display value set prior to shipment : Display calibration range This function constantly detects and updates the maximum and minimum pressure values and allows to hold the display value. Key lock function This function prevents incorrect operations such as changing the set value accidentally. ero out (ero ADJ) function The measured pressure reading can be adjusted to zero. More specifically, the factory-set reading can be corrected to within ±7% F.S. Unit display switching function The reading unit can be selected. Unit/Reading resolution ISE7 Pa.MPa kgf/cm 2. bar. psi Anti-chattering function Displays the switch operation status. Use this button to switch the mode and set the set value. Use this button to change the mode or increase the ON/OFF set value. It also allows you to switch to the peak value display mode. Note) When the display calibration function is used, the set pressure value may change ± digit. ISE75/75H.MPa (x ) A large bore cylinder or ejector consumes a large amount of air in operation and may experience a temporary drop in the primary pressure. This function prevents detection of such temporary drops in primary pressure as abnormal pressure. OUT U P MPa DOWN PRESSURE SWITCH Error function Take the following corrective solutions when error occurs. Error description LCD display Condition Solution Over-current error Residual pressure error Applied pressure error System error LCD display Displays the current pressure condition, set mode and error code. The display mode can be selected from four options: fixed green single-color reading, fixed red single-color reading, green reading interlocked with output for switching to red reading, and red reading interlocked with output for switching to green reading. DOWN button Use this button to change the mode or decrease the ON/OFF set value. It also allows you to switch to the bottom value display mode. A load current greater than 8 ma is turned on through either or both of the switch outputs. A pressure level greater than ±7% F.S. has been applied during zero adjustment. The switch will automatically return to measuring mode in three seconds, however. Note that the range of zero adjustment differs by ± digit due to switchto-switch variations. Supply pressure exceeds the maximum set pressure. Supply pressure is below the minimum set pressure. Internal data error Internal data error Internal data error Internal data error Shut off the power supply. After eliminating the output factor that caused the excess current, turn the power supply back on. Bring the pressure back to atmospheric pressure and try using the zero out function. Reduce/Increase supply pressure to within the set pressure range. Shut off the power supply. Turn the power supply back on. Note) If the switch will not recover to normal even after all of the above mentioned solutions have been applied, consult SMC for investigation. Response time selections: 2ms, 6ms, 64ms, ms, 2ms 6-2-5

62 Digital Pressure Switch For Air/For General Fluids Series ISE7/75/75H 7 Dimensions ISE H / / MPa 7 OUT U P DOWN Lead wire with M2 connector (5m) straight SE ISE PSE 4.5 I SE PS With bracket MPa OUT U P DOWN Piping port 2: Rc/4 N2: NPT/4 F2: G/4 (ISO79) Piping port 2: Rc/4 N2: NPT/4 F2: G/4 (ISO79) (28.7) (8.2) (28.7) (8.2) Lead wire with M2 connector (5m) 44.5 right-angled 5 Note) The connector faces down (toward the piping). Do not attempt to rotate the connector, as it is not rotatable. 2 Connector Pin Assignments Output -4 Brown 2 White Blue 4 Black Output -65 Brown 2 White Blue 4 Black 4 DC (+) OUT (PNP) DC ( ) OUT (NPN) DC (+) NC DC ( ) OUT (PNP) I SE 2 SP ISA2 IS SM PF2 IF Data

63 Series ISE7/75/75H Pressure Switch Precautions Be sure to read before handling. 8 Mounting Warning 2. Apply wrench only to the metal part of the main housing when installing the pressure switch onto the system piping. Do not apply a wrench to the body part as this may damage the switch. Warning Series ISE7/75/75H Digital Pressure Switch Precautions Be sure to read before handling. Mounting. Operation Refer to the instruction manual for the operation of the digital pressure switch. Warning Wiring. Connect a DC ( ) wire (blue) as close as possible to the DC power supply GND terminal. Connecting the power supply away from the GND terminal can cause malfunctions due to noise from devices that are connected to the GND terminal. 2. Do not attempt to insert or pull the pressure sensor or its connector when the power is on.. A cable with a right-angled connector is also available. The right-angled connector faces down (toward the piping). Do not attempt to rotate the connector, as it is not rotatable

64 Series ISE7/75/75H Specific Product Precautions Be sure to read before handling. 9 Warning Handling. Do not drop, bump, or apply excessive impacts (98 m/s2) while handling. Although the body of the sensor may not be damaged, the internal parts of the sensor could be damaged and lead to a malfunction. 2. The tensile strength of the cord is 5 N. Applying a greater pulling force on it can cause a malfunction. When handling, hold the body of the sensor do not dangle it from the cord.. Do not exceed the screw-in torque of 4 N m for ISE7 and 8 N m for ISE75/75H when connecting the pipe to the switch. Exceeding these values may cause the switch to malfunction. 4. Do not use pressure sensors with corrosive and/poisonous or flammable gases or liquids. 5. When connecting the pipe to the switch, engage the wrench horizontally to the chamfered barrel of the fitting. Be careful not to apply excessive force to the switch s main unit. Warning Connection. Incorrect wiring can damage the switch and cause a malfunction or erroneous switch output. 2. Connections should be done while the power is turned off.. Wire separately from power lines and high voltage lines, avoiding wiring in the same conduit with these lines. Malfunctions may occur due to noise from these other lines. 4. If a commercial switching regulator is used, make sure that the F.G. terminal is grounded. Warning. Our pressure switches are CE marked; however, they are not equipped with surge protection against lightning. Lightning surge countermeasures should be applied directly to system components as necessary. 2. Our pressure switches do not have an explosion proof rating. Never use in the presence of an explosive gas as this may cause a serious explosion. Caution Operating Environment. Do not use in an environment with spattering liquid of oil or solvent. Warning. Regarding poisonous, corrosive or combustible gases Do not use the switch for poisonous or corrosive gases. Also note that the switch is not explosion-proof. 2. Regarding use of the switch for fluids Do not use the switch for any corrosive or flammable gas or fluid (ISE7 series). Do not use the switch for any fluid capable of corroding SUS4 or SUS6 stainless steel; or for any flammable gas or liquid (ISE75/75H series). (For information on the corrosiveness of fluids, contact the fluid manufacturers.) Caution Bracket B Pressure Sources Mounting. Connecting pipe to the switch When connecting the pipe to the switch, apply a torque of.6 N m or greater for the ISE7 series and a torque of 25 N m or greater for the ISE75/75H series. 2. Bracket-mounting the switch Interlock the neck of the switch's piping port between the bracket assembly and bracket B. Using two M6 screws, mount the switch onto a wall. If the panel thickness is less than 5 mm, use nuts or other alternative means to increase the mounting strength. OUT U P DOWN Bracket B and the bracket assembly make up one set. SE ISE PSE I SE PS I SE 2 SP ISA2 IS SM PF2 IF Data Bracket assembly 6-2-5

65 Series ISE7/75/75H Specific Product Precautions 2 Be sure to read before handling. Caution Set pressure range and rated pressure range. Set the pressure within the rated pressure range. The set pressure range is the range of pressure that is possible in setting. The rated pressure range is the range of pressure that satisfies the specifications (accuracy, linearity, etc.) on the sensor. Although it is possible to set a value outside the rated pressure range, the specifications will not be guaranteed even if the value stays within the set pressure range. Switch Pressure range kpa.4mpa.5mpa MPa MPa 5MPa For MPa (For Air) For MPa (For General Fluids) For 5MPa (For General Fluids) ISE7 ISE75 ISE75H kpa (.MPa) MPa.4MPa.5MPa MPa The ISE75/75H switch shows zero () when the pressure being applied goes below the lower limit of the set pressure range. MPa MPa 5MPa 5MPa Rated pressure range of switch Set pressure range of switch

66 OUT OUT2 2 4 MPa kpa CH High Precision, Remote Type Digital Pressure Sensor Series PSE5/2 SE ISE PSE I SE PS 4 PRESSURE 2 A single controller monitors up to 4 pressure sensors. I SE 2 SP ISA2 IS SM PF2 IF Data 6--

67 OUT OUT2 2 4 MPa kpa CH OUT OUT2 2 4 MPa kpa CH 4 PRESSURE 2 A single controller monitors up to 4 pressure sensors. 2 Pressure Sensor Series PSE5 4 mm OUT Controller kpa OUT2 OUT kpa OUT2 4 mm OUT OUT2 2 4 PRESSURE 65 mm OUT Panel mounting The use of connector literally makes wiring work a snap. kpa CH Multi-channel Controller Series PSE2 MPa kpa OUT2 Space saving OUT Low power consumption: 55 ma or less (Controller) The new controller provides energy savings without compromising display brightness quality thanks to the use of transparent (negative) LCD and a backlight. 2 Simplified application... kpa OUT2 No tools required 76% reduction in installation space (Compared to the panel mounted SE4/ISE4.) Less panel mounting work Thanks to a tool-free module press-in connector, all you need to do is to simply snap-in the lead wire and lock it! Crimping tools are not required. The connection cable is a halogen-free heavy-duty cord. (ISO 4 compatible) Pressure sensor Auto shift function (P. 6--7) Allows stable switch output even when supply pressure changes. Auto preset (P. 6--4) Automatically sets the pressure value. Auto identification function (P. 6--7) Can automatically identify the pressure range of a connected SMC sensor. Copy function (P. 6--7) Each channel s information can be copied to another channel. CH setting can be copied to CH2, CH, and CH4. CH Copy Copy Copy CH2 CH CH4 A single controller monitors various applications. Suction verification Leak test OUT OUT2 2 4 PRESSURE MPa kpa CH Multifunction Display calibration (P. 6--7) Each channel has an adjustable display function. Although supply pressure for each channel is the same, slightly different values are displayed. MPa kpa CH MPa kpa CH MPa kpa CH MPa kpa CH Displays exact the same pressure values for all channels. Anti-chattering function (P. 6--2) Prevents malfunction due to sudden pressure changes. 4 Application Ejector supply pressure verification Placement verification MPa kpa CH MPa kpa CH MPa kpa CH MPa kpa CH Channel scan function (P. 6--8) Allows constant monitoring of the displayed pressure value for each channel. Reset function Key lock function Displays peak & bottom pressure values Connectable to SMC s other series (Series PSE5 & PSE52 ) PSE52 Verifies supply pressure for line cleaning and washing operations. Note) Connector types vary depending on the core wire size of the sensor cable and the outside diameter of insulation. Refer to Connecting to other series on page MPa kpa Connecting to general purpose pressure sensor PSE52 allows the sensor to verify hydraulic or liquid pressure rather than air pressure. CH PRESSURE MPa kpa CH MPa kpa CH PSE52 Suctioning of wet workpieces can be verified. MPa kpa CH PSE52 Verifies peening of a hydraulic cylinder. SE ISE PSE I SE PS I SE 2 SP ISA2 IS SM PF2 IF Data

68 Pressure Sensor Series PSE5 How to Order PSE5 M5 Option Description Connector Sensor cable Connector + Sensor cable Specifications 2 Part no. S-26-E S-26-F S-26-G Pressure sensing range High pressure [ to MPa] Vacuum [ to kpa] Low pressure [ to kpa] Compound pressure [ to kpa] When only optional parts are required, order using the part numbers listed below. Note 4 pcs. per set Cable length: m Cable length: m The connector is not connected to the cable at the time of shipment. M5 Port size M5 x.8 Option Nil L CL Without cable Sensor cable ( m) Sensor cable ( m) + Connector ( pc.) Model PSE5-M5 PSE5-M5 PSE52-M5 PSE5-M5 Rated pressure range Proof pressure to MPa.5 MPa to kpa to kpa 5kPa to kpa Fluid Power supply voltage Current consumption Output specification Accuracy Linearity Repeatability Power supply voltage effect Enclosure Temperature range Withstand voltage Insulation resistance Vibration resistance Impact resistance Temperature characteristics (Based on 25 C) Port size Material Sensor cable/option Air/Non-corrosive gas 2 to 24 VDC (Ripple ±% or less) 5 ma or less Analog output ( to 5 V, Output impedance: Approx. kω) ±2% F.S. or less (Within rated pressure range, Ambient temperature 25 ± C) ±% F.S. or less ±% F.S. or less ±% F.S. or less based on the analog output at 8 V ranging from 2 to 24 VDC IP4 to 5 C; Stored: to 7 C (No freezing or condensation) VAC, 5/6Hz for minute between external terminals and case 5 MΩ between external terminals and case (at 5 VDC) to 5 Hz at whichever is smaller of.5 mm amplitude or 98 m/s 2 acceleration, in X, Y, directions, for 2 hours each (De-energized) 98 m/s 2 in X, Y, directions, times each (De-energized) ±2% F.S. or less based on the analog output value at 25 C from a range of to 5 C M5 x.8 Body: Stainless steel Grade, Internal enclosure: PPE; Pressure sensor: Silicon; O-ring: NBR Halogen-free heavy-duty cord, ø2.7,.5 mm 2, cores, m Resistance 4 2 Connector Note) At the factory, the connector is not connected to the cable, but packed together with it for shipment. 6--4

69 Pressure Sensor Series PSE5 4 Internal Circuit DC (+) Power supply DC ( ) GND Analog output ( to 5 V) Sensor cable color Brown Blue Black Main circuit Brown Black Load Blue 2 to 24 VDC SE ISE Dimensions PSE PSE5 -M5 I SE With sensor cable ø.4 ø2.7 ø2 ø M5 x.8 Pressure port 2 ø2.5 ø PS I SE 2 SP ISA2 IS SM PF2 IF Data 6--5

70 5 Multi-channel Controller Series PSE2 How to Order PSE2 M Input/Output specifications NPN 5 outputs + Auto shift input PNP 5 outputs + Auto shift input Unit specifications Nil With unit display switching function M Fixed SI unit Note) Note) Fixed unit For vacuum low pressure & compound pressure: kpa For high pressure: MPa Accessory: Power supply/output connection cable (2 m) Included with the controller. Option Power supply/output connection cable S-26-A When only optional parts are required, order with the part numbers listed below. Description Panel mount adapter Front protective cover Front protective cover + Panel mount adapter 48 conversion adapter This adapter is used to mount Series PSE2 on the panel fitting of Series PS. Part no. S-26-B S-26- S-26-C S-26-D Note Waterproof seal, screws included Waterproof seal, screws included 48 conversion adapter Option 2 Nil 4C Option Nil Panel mount A B Without connector Sensor connector (4 pcs.) Waterproof seal (Accessory) Connector Without panel mount/protective cover Panel Front protective cover + Panel mount Front protective cover Waterproof seal (Accessory) Panel Panel mount adapter Panel mount adapter Mounting screws (M x 8L) (Accessory) Mounting screws (M x 8L) (Accessory) Connector 6--6 Order panel mount adapter separately. S-26-E (4 pcs. per set)

71 Multi-channel Controller Series PSE2 6 Specifications Model Output specification Power supply voltage Current consumption Power supply voltage for sensor Power supply current for sensor Note ) Sensor input Hysteresis Switch output Response time Repeatability Setting/Display accuracy Display Indication light Auto shift input Auto identification function Note 2) Resistance No. of inputs Input protection Hysteresis mode Window comparator mode No. of outputs Maximum load current Maximum load voltage Residual voltage Output protection Anti-chattering function Enclosure Ambient temperature range Ambient humidity range Vibration resistance Impact resistance Temperature characteristics Connection Material Weight Applicable pressure sensor Regulating pressure range Set pressure resolution Note ) kpa MPa kgf/cm 2 bar psi mmhg InHg PSE2 PSE2 NPN open collector PNP open collector 2 to 24 VDC ±%, Ripple (p-p) % or less (With power supply polarity protection) 55 ma or less (Current consumption for sensor is not included.) [Power supply voltage].5 V 4 ma maximum ( ma maximum for the total power supply current when 4 sensors are input.) to 5 VDC (Input impedance: Approx. 8 kω) 4 inputs With excess voltage protection (Up to 26.4 V) Variable -digit fixed 5 outputs (CH: 2 outputs, CH2 to 4: output) 8 ma VDC (With NPN) V or less (With load current of 8 ma) With short circuit protection 5 ms or less With anti-chattering function, Response time selection: 2 ms, 6 ms, 64 ms ±.% F.S. or less ±.5% F.S. ± digit or less (at ambient temperature of 25 ± C) For measured value display: 4-digit, 7-segment indicator, Display color: Yellow For channel display: -digit, 7-segment indicator, Display color: Red Red (Lights up when output is ON.) Non-voltage input (Reed or Solid state), Input ms or more, Independently controllable auto shift function ON/OFF With auto identification function Front face: IP65, Other: IP4 Operating: to 5 C, Stored: to 6 C (No freezing or condensation) Operating/Stored: 5 to 85% RH (No condensation) to 5 Hz at whichever is smaller of.5 mm amplitude or 98 m/s 2 acceleration, in X, Y, directions for 2 hrs. each (De-energized) 98 m/s 2 in X, Y, directions, times each (De-energized) ±.5% F.S. or less based on 25 C Power supply/output connection: 8P connector, Sensor connection: 4P connector Enclosure: PBT; Display: Transparent nylon; Back rubber cover: CR Approx. 6 g (Power supply/output connecting cable not included) PSE5 (For high pressure) PSE5 (For vacuum) PSE52 (For low pressure) PSE5 (For compound pressure). to MPa.... to kpa..... to kpa.... to kpa Note ) If the Vcc and V side of the sensor input connector are short circuited, the inside of the controller will be damaged. Note 2) Auto identification function comes with Series PSE5 pressure sensor only. Other SMC series (PSE5 and PSE52) are not equipped with this function. Note ) For controllers with unit display switching function. (Either of SI units, [kpa] or [MPa], will be the set unit for those controllers without unit switching function.) SE ISE PSE I SE PS I SE 2 SP ISA2 IS SM PF2 IF Data 6--7

72 Series PSE2 7 Dimensions PSE2 & PSE Connector (option) MPa kpa OUT OUT2 CH 2 4 PRESSURE PSE2 MADE IN JAPAN 6.8 Power supply/output connector (8P) PIN no. Terminal DC (+) DC ( ) CH_OUT CH_OUT2 CH2_OUT CH_OUT CH4_OUT Auto shift input Sensor connector (4P x 4) Power supply/output connection cable (Included) Pin no. 8 Yellow : Auto shift input 7 Green : CH4_OUT 6 Red : CH_OUT 5 Gray : CH2_OUT 4 White : CH_OUT2 Black : CH_OUT 2 Blue : DC ( ) Brown: DC (+) PIN no. Terminal DC (+) IN ( to 5 V) DC ( ) N.C. Connector (Option)

73 Multi-channel Controller Series PSE2 8 Dimensions Front protective cover + Panel mount (2) MPa kpa SE ISE PSE OUT OUT2 2 4 PRESSURE CH 46.4 I SE PS 48 conversion adapter + Panel mount 55 or more OUT OUT2 2 4 PRESSURE MPa kpa CH 55 or more Panel mount adapter Front protective cover Waterproof seal Panel Panel mount adapter Waterproof seal Panel 48 conversion adapter I SE 2 SP ISA2 IS SM PF2 IF Data Panel fitting dimension Applicable panel thickness:.5 to 8 mm 6--9

74 Series PSE5/2 9 Descriptions 4-digit display Displays the measured pressure value, content for each setting, and error code. Switch output display Displays the output status of OUT (CH to CH4), OUT2 (CH only). Lights up when it is ON. UP button Use this button to change the mode or set value. button Use this button to set the mode or set value. Error Code & Solution LED display Contents Solution Excess current is flowing into the switch output of OUT. Excess current is flowing into the switch output of OUT2. Pressure is applied to a pressure sensor during the reset operation (a zero point adjustment) as follows: When compound pressure is used: ± 2.5% F.S. or more. When pressure other than compound pressure is used: ±5% F.S. or more. After displaying for 2 seconds, it will return to the measuring mode. Supply pressure exceeds the maximum regulating pressure. Supply pressure is below the minimum regulating pressure. Internal data error. Internal data error. Internal data error. Internal data error. Shut off the power supply. After eliminating the output factor that caused the excess current, turn the power supply back on. Bring the pressure back to atmospheric pressure and use the reset function (zero point adjustment) again. Reduce/Increase supply pressure to within the regulating pressure range. Please contact SMC. Shut off the power supply and turn it back on. Please contact SMC if it does not recover. OUT OUT2 2 4 PRESSURE MPa kpa Internal Circuit and Connection CH Unit display The selected unit lights up. Use unit labels for units other than MPa and kpa. Unit labels kgf/cm 2 bar PSI inhg mmhg Channel display Displays the selected channel. DOWN button Use this button to change the mode or set value. PSE2-(M) NPN open collector 5 outputs + Auto shift input specification DC (+) Sensor input: + to 5 VDC DC ( ) N.C. DC (+) Sensor input: + to 5 VDC DC ( ) N.C. DC (+) Sensor input: + to 5 VDC DC ( ) N.C. DC (+) Sensor input: + to 5 VDC DC ( ) N.C. PSE2-(M) PNP open collector 5 outputs + Auto shift input specification DC (+) Sensor input: + to 5 VDC DC ( ) N.C. DC (+) Sensor input: + to 5 VDC DC ( ) N.C. DC (+) Sensor input: + to 5 VDC DC ( ) N.C. DC (+) Sensor input: + to 5 VDC DC ( ) N.C. Main circuit Main circuit.2 k 7. k.2 k 7. k DC (+) (Brown) Auto shift input (Yellow) CH_OUT (Black) CH_OUT2 (White) CH2_OUT (Gray) CH_OUT (Orange) CH4_OUT (Pink) DC ( ) (Blue) DC (+) (Brown) Auto shift input (Yellow) CH_OUT (Black) CH_OUT2 (White) CH2_OUT (Gray) CH_OUT (Orange) CH4_OUT (Pink) DC ( ) (Blue) Load Load Load Load Load Load Load Load Load Load +2 to 24 VDC + +2 to 24 VDC + 6--

75 Multi-channel Controller/Pressure Sensor Series PSE5/2 Operation : Initial Setting Channel selection MPa kpa OUT OUT2 2 4 PRESSURE CH CH CH2 CH CH4 SE ISE Press button and hold for 2 seconds or longer. PSE 2 Range setting I SE PS OUT OUT2 2 4 PRESSURE MPa kpa CH Compound pressure Vacuum Low pressure Pressure Sensor/Sensor Range Sensor supply pressure Regulating pressure range Applicable pressure sensor Output mode setting OUT OUT2 OUT OUT2 2 4 PRESSURE High pressure Note) Sensor range varies depending on the type of pressure sensor. (Compound pressure) (Vacuum) (Low pressure) (High pressure) to kpa to kpa to kpa. to MPa PSE5 PSE5 PSE52 PSE5 If the controller is equipped with a unit switching function, unit setting can be changed. (Refer to page 6--7 for details.) MPa kpa CH Normally Open Normally Open or Normally Closed (For CH2, CH, and CH4, go to Response time setting.) 2 4 PRESSURE MPa kpa CH OUT setting OUT2 setting/(ch only) or Normally Closed I SE 2 SP ISA2 IS SM PF2 IF Data 6--

76 Series PSE5/2 Operation : Initial Setting 4 Response time setting MPa kpa OUT OUT2 2 4 PRESSURE CH 5 ms 2 ms 6 ms 64 ms Press button. 5 Manual setting/auto preset OUT OUT2 Anti-chattering function Devices such as large bore cylinders and high-flow vacuum ejectors consume a large volume of air when they operate, and this may cause a momentary drop in the supply pressure. This function prevents such momentary drops from being detected as abnormal pressures by changing the response time setting. <Principle> The pressure values measured within the response time that is selected by the user are averaged. By comparing this average pressure value with the set pressure value, switch output (ON//OFF) is determined. 2 4 PRESSURE MPa kpa CH Manual set mode Press button. CH setting is completed when the channel display changes from blinking to lights on. Repeat the same setting steps for CH2 to CH4. or Auto preset mode Pressure Set value P P2 Switch output ON operation when normal OFF Switch output ON operation when anti-chattering OFF function is used. Momentary change t (ms) t (ms) Time <Averaging> <Averaging> Time Time 6--2

77 Multi-channel Controller/Pressure Sensor Series PSE5/2 2 Operation 2: Pressure Setting Measuring mode For CH2 to CH4 Manual setting OUT OUT2 OUT OUT2 OUT OUT2 OUT OUT2 OUT OUT2 OUT OUT2 2 4 PRESSURE 2 4 PRESSURE 2 4 PRESSURE 2 4 PRESSURE 2 4 PRESSURE 2 4 PRESSURE Manual mode Manual mode Manual mode MPa kpa CH MPa kpa CH MPa kpa CH (For CH) Manual mode Manual mode MPa kpa CH MPa kpa CH MPa kpa CH (For CH) Channel selection CH CH2 CH CH4 OUT setting () For normally open Displays alternately For normally closed OUT setting (2) For normally open Displays alternately For normally closed OUT2 setting ()/CH only For normally open Displays alternately For normally closed OUT2 setting (2)/CH only For normally open Displays alternately For normally closed For CH For CH2 to CH4 Increases the set value Decreases the set value Increases the set value Decreases the set value Increases the set value Decreases the set value Increases the set value Decreases the set value Displays rectified value Displays zero when the auto shift input function is not turned on. Output mode Hysteresis mode: Hysteresis of the switch output can be set arbitrarily. <Normally open> ON Switch output & 2 OFF <Normally closed> ON Switch output & 2 OFF P2 P4 n2 n4 Hysteresis P P Hysteresis n n High pressure: Compound pressure type Positive pressure type High vacuum: Vacuum type Note) If the hysteresis is set for less than 2 digits, the switch output may possibly chatter when the input pressure changes around the set value. Window comparator mode: Allows the switch output to be turned ON or OFF within any set pressure range. <Normally open> Hysteresis Hysteresis ON Switch output & 2 OFF <Normally closed> P P P2 P4 Hysteresis Hysteresis ON Switch output & 2 OFF n n2 n n4 High pressure: Compound pressure type Positive pressure type High vacuum: Vacuum type Note) The hysteresis is set to digits. When setting the pressure, allow 7 digits or more. Regulating pressure range Main application Adsorption and vacuum. to. kpa release verification. to. kpa Adsorption verification Display High pressure: Compound pressure type Positive pressure type High vacuum: Vacuum type High pressure: Compound pressure type Positive pressure type High vacuum: Vacuum type Note ) Hysteresis mode P2(n2) P(n) P2(n2) P(n) Note 2) Window comparator mode P2(n) > P(n2) P2(n) < P(n2). to. kpa Supply pressure P2(n2) P(n) P2(n) > P(n2) verification. to. MPa Leak test P2(n2) P(n) P2(n) > P(n2) P(n) and P4(n4) are the same as P(n) and P2(n2). Note ) If the hysteresis is set too small, the switch output may possibly chatter when the input pressure changes around the set value. Note 2) The hysteresis is set to digits. When setting the pressure in the window comparator mode, allow 7 digits or more. If the allowance is less than 7 digits, the controller will not operate. SE ISE PSE I SE PS I SE 2 SP ISA2 IS SM PF2 IF Data To measuring mode 6--

78 Series PSE5/2 Operation 2: Pressure Setting Auto preset Channel selection MPa Measuring mode OUT OUT2 2 4 PRESSURE kpa CH CH CH2 CH CH4 Adsorption Verification High Auto preset mode MPa kpa OUT auto preset preparation Prepare the equipment to be set in this mode. Vacuum Max. A ON Suction Work Work 2 Work n In the case where OUT ( setting is not ) required. In the case where OUT2 ( setting is not ) required. + + OUT OUT2 CH 2 4 PRESSURE MPa kpa OUT OUT2 CH 2 4 PRESSURE MPa kpa OUT OUT2 CH 2 4 PRESSURE MPa kpa OUT OUT2 CH 2 4 PRESSURE To measuring mode OUT auto preset For adsorption verification: In this mode, repeat the adsorption and release of the workpiece for a few times. The optimum values will be set automatically. For supply pressure verification: The optimum values will be set automatically. OUT2 auto preset preparation (CH only) For adsorption verification: Change the conditions of the workpiece such as the (suction) nozzle with vacuum pad attachment and supply vacuum pressure. For supply pressure verification: Prepare the equipment for the OUT2 setting in this mode. OUT2 auto preset (CH only) For adsorption verification: In this mode, repeat the adsorption and release of the workpiece for a few times. The optimum values will be set automatically. For supply pressure verification: The optimum values will be set automatically. OFF Min. B Atmosphere Released Work Work 2 Work n Max. A: Maximum pressure value when workpiece is adsorbed. Min. B: Minimum pressure value when workpiece is not adsorbed. ON = A OFF = B + A B 4 A B

79 Multi-channel Controller/Pressure Sensor Series PSE5/2 4 Operation : Special Setting Precision indicator setting Refer to A Display calibration function on page 6--7 for details. Measuring mode After setting all 4 channels, press button. Proceed to the copy mode. + Press and hold for 2 seconds or longer. Calibration mode OUT OUT2 2 4 PRESSURE Calibration mode MPa kpa CH MPa kpa or Channel selection SE ISE PSE I SE PS 2 Copy setting OUT OUT2 2 4 PRESSURE After setting for copy ( mode, ) press. MPa kpa CH OUT OUT2 OUT OUT2 2 4 PRESSURE 2 4 PRESSURE Calibration mode Refer to B Copy setting function on page 6--7 for details. OUT OUT2 OUT OUT2 2 4 PRESSURE 2 4 PRESSURE CH MPa kpa CH MPa kpa CH MPa kpa CH Displays alternately Copy mode Copy mode Selection of the channel to be copied Proceed to the auto shift mode. or Copy mode Selection of the channel to be copied to Displays alternately Setting is complete. Return to the copy mode. Setting is complete (CH). Return to calibration mode. Repeat the setting procedure for CH2 to CH4. Displays the supply pressure value button increases the value. button decreases the value. Displays alternately Displays the percentage. Displays the adjusted amount of pressure since the time of shipment (±5% R.D. or less). I SE 2 SP ISA2 IS SM PF2 IF Data 6--5

80 Series PSE5/2 5 Operation : Special Setting Auto shift Refer to C Auto shift function on page 6--7 for details. Auto shift mode MPa or MPa OUT kpa OUT kpa Displays alternately OUT2 2 4 CH OUT2 2 4 CH PRESSURE PRESSURE CH On Off MPa kpa 4 Auto identification Auto identification mode OUT OUT2 2 4 PRESSURE MPa kpa Auto identification mode ON. CH Setting is complete. To measuring mode or OUT OUT2 OUT OUT2 OUT OUT2 OUT OUT2 2 4 PRESSURE 2 4 PRESSURE 2 4 PRESSURE 2 4 PRESSURE CH MPa kpa CH MPa kpa CH MPa kpa CH CH2 CH CH4 Displays alternately Displays alternately Displays alternately Setting is complete. Proceed to the auto identification mode. Refer to D Auto identification function on page 6--7 for details. Auto identification mode OFF. On On On Off Off Off 6--6

81 Multi-channel Controller/Pressure Sensor Series PSE5/2 6 Function Details A Display calibration function This function eliminates slight differences in the output values of all 4 channels and allows uniformity in the numbers displayed. Displayed values of the pressure sensors can be adjusted to within ±5%. Displayed pressure value ±5% R.D. + Applied pressure B Copy function Information that can be copied includes the following: q Pressure set values, w Range settings, e Display Units, r Output modes, t Response times. When CH is copied to CH2, CH, and CH4, information of OUT in CH will be copied. When CH2, CH, or CH4 is copied to CH, information of OUT in CH2, CH, or CH4 will be copied only to OUT in CH. Note) When the copy function is used, the regulating pressure value of the copied channel may change ± digit. SE ISE PSE Displayed value at the time of shipment Adjustable range of display calibration function I SE Note) When the display calibration function is used, the regulating pressure value may change ± digit. PS C Auto shift function If there is a fluctuation in the supply pressure, erroneous operation may occur (e.g., in the case of adsorption verification, the switch does not turn ON even though the workpiece is being adsorbed, or does not turn OFF even though the workpiece is no longer being adsorbed.) The auto shift function rectifies pressure changes to ensure proper ON/OFF switch response during such fluctuations. <Principle> At the point when the supply pressure fluctuates, the set pressure value is rectified by setting the auto shift input (external input) to Lo (no-voltage input), using the pressure measured at that point as a standard. This function is good only for those channels whose function selection is turned on during the auto shift mode setting. Maintain the constant pressure for ms or more after a drop in the auto shift input. When the auto shift is input, ooo will be displayed for approximately second, and the pressure value at that point will be saved as a rectified value C_5 (for CH) or C_ (for CH2 and CH). Based on the saved rectified values, the set value P_ to P_4 or n_ to n_4 will likewise be rectified. The time from the moment the auto shift is input, to the moment the switch output actually operates is 5 ms or less. If the set value rectified by the auto shift input exceeds the regulating pressure range, it will be rectified once more to within the values of the regulating pressure range. When the auto shift function is turned off, the shift value will be zero. When all of the auto shift functions are turned off, ooo will not be displayed even if the auto shift input is set to Lo (no-voltage input). Values C_5 and C_, rectified after the auto shift is input, will be lost once the power is turned off. Values C_5 and C_, rectified after the auto shift function is used, will be reset to zero (initial value) when the power is turned back on again. Note) Rectified values are not saved in EEPROM. D Auto identification function This function automatically identifies the pressure range of the pressure sensor that is connected to the multi-channel pressure sensor controller, thus eliminating the need of having to reset the range again after replacing the sensor. This function will be activated either when Aon is set in the auto identification mode or when the power is turned back on in that condition. However, this function only works in conjunction with specific pressure sensors (SMC Series PSE5 ). When other pressure sensors are used, this function will not work. When using other types of pressure sensors, first set the auto identification mode to AoF, and then proceed to setting the range. Turning the power back on while in the Aon setting can cause a malfunction. When auto shift is NOT used: When the supply pressure fluctuates, a correct sensing is no longer possible. Set value Pressure When auto shift is used: Set value Switch output ON & 2 OFF Auto shift input P P2 Switch output ON & 2 OFF Pressure P P2 Hi Lo Supply pressure normal Supply pressure normal Set value rectification Supply pressure drop Does not turn ON Supply pressure drop ms or more Set value rectification 5 ms or less Supply pressure increase Time Does not turn OFF Supply pressure increase Time Time Time Switch output ( ) response auto shift time is input. when E Unit display switching function Display units can be switched with this function. Units that can be displayed vary depending on the range of the pressure sensors connected to the controller. Display units can be selected using either or. Unit Display and Resolution Applicable pressure sensor PSE5 PSE5 PSE52 PSE5 Regulating pressure range. to MPa to kpa to kpa to kpa kpa MPa kgf/cm 2 bar psi mmhg inhg I SE 2 SP ISA2 IS SM PF2 IF Data 6--7

82 Series PSE5/2 7 Operation 4: Other Functions Reset Measuring mode + Press and hold for second or longer. Key lock Lock/Unlock selection Measuring mode Lock Peak/Bottom display Measuring mode Press and hold for 2 seconds or longer. Peak/Bottom mode OFF Channel scan Measuring mode Press and hold for 4 seconds or longer. Press and hold for 2 seconds or longer. Unlock To measuring mode Note) Channel selection and channel scan operation will not be locked even if the key lock function is on. Measuring mode CH CH4 Peak/Bottom selection Peak mode Peak value blinks any of these keys. Bottom mode Bottom value blinks To return to the measuring mode, press If any buttons other than above are pressed during the peak/bottom mode, the peak/bottom mode will be deactivated. CH2 CH Press and hold for 2 seconds or longer. Channel scan function deactivated. Return to the measuring mode. Pressure value for each channel are displayed at 2 second intervals. 6--8

83 Series PSE Specific Product Precautions Be sure to read before handling. 8 Pressure Sensor Handling Warning. Do not drop, bump, or apply excessive impacts (98 m/s 2 ) while handling. Although the body of the sensor may not be damaged, the inside of the sensor could be damaged and lead to a malfunction. 2. The tensile strength of the cord is 2 N. Applying a greater pulling force on it can cause a malfunction. When handling, hold the body of the sensor do not dangle it from the cord.. Do not exceed the screw-in torque of.5 N m when installing piping. Exceeding this value may cause malfunctioning of the sensor. 4. Do not use pressure sensors with corrosive and/or inflammable gases or liquids. 5. Connecting the sensor cable (Option) Hold the female connector of the sensor cable with your fingers and carefully insert it into the connector. Warning Sensor Male connector Female connector A connector cover is provided as part of the cable assembly (see the figure below). It is designed to keep the female connector from slipping out of the sensor. To lock the connector cover in place, first make sure it is facing in the right direction as you slip it over the female connector, then lock it to the sensor body by turning it clockwise. To remove the cover, first unlock it by turning it counterclockwise, then pull back on it. To remove the female connector, grab it with your fingers and pull back on it. Do not pull on the cable. Lock Unlock Sensor Connector cover Operating Environment. The pressure sensors are CE marked; however, they are not equipped with surge protection against lightning. Lightning surge countermeasures should be applied directly to system components as necessary. 2. The pressure sensors do not have an explosion proof rating. Never use pressure sensors in the presence of inflammable or explosive gases. Controller Handling Warning. Do not drop, bump, or apply excessive impacts ( m/s 2 ) while handling. Although the body of the controller case may not be damaged, the inside of the controller could be damaged and cause a malfunction. 2. The tensile strength of the power supply/output connection cable is 5 N; that of the pressure sensor lead wire with connector is 25 N. Applying a greater pulling force than the applicable specified tensile strength to either of these components can lead to a malfunction. When handling, hold the body of the controller do not dangle it from the cord. Warning Connection. Incorrect wiring can damage the switch and cause a malfunction or erroneous switch output. Connections should be done while the power is turned off. 2. Do not attempt to insert or pull the pressure sensor or its connector when the power is on. Switch output may malfunction.. Wire separately from power lines and high voltage lines, avoiding wiring in the same conduit with these lines. Malfunctions may occur due to noise from these other lines. 4. If a commercial switching regulator is used, make sure that the F.G. terminal is grounded. Warning Operating Environment. Our multi-channel pressure sensor controllers are CE marked; however, they are not equipped with surge protection against lightning. Lightning surge countermeasures should be applied directly to system components as necessary. 2. Our multi-channel pressure sensor controllers do not have an explosion proof rating. Never use pressure sensors in the presence of inflammable or explosive gases.. Enclosure IP65 applies only to the front face of the panel when mounting. Do not use in an environment where oil splashing or spraying are anticipated. SE ISE PSE I SE PS I SE 2 SP ISA2 IS SM PF2 IF Data 6--9

84 Series PSE Specific Product Precautions 2 Be sure to read before handling. 9 Mounting Caution The front face of the panel mount conforms to IP65 (IP4 when using the 48 conversion adapter); however, there is a possibility of liquid filtration if the panel mount adapter is not installed securely and properly. Securely fix the adaptor with screws as shown below. Standard Front protective cover (S-26-) Panel mount (S-26-B) Tighten screws /4 to /2 turn after the heads are flush with the panel. When using 48 conversion adapter 2-M x 8L 48 conversion adapter (S-26-D) Wiring. Connecting sensor cable and connector (S-26-E) Cut the sensor cable as shown below. Insert each lead wire into the corresponding connector number by following the chart provided below. Connector no. C Caution B 4 2 Core wire color of sensor cable Brown (DC+) Black (Analog output) Blue (DC ) N.C. 4 A 4 2 Sensor connector port Power supply/output connector 2 m 2 mm or more Make sure that the number of connector and the core wire color match. After verifying that the wires are inserted all the way, temporarily hold the connector down manually. Using pliers, snap A into B as shown below so that there is no gap between A and B, and secure the connector. The A and B portion of the sensor connector are already tacked down temporarily at the time of shipment. Do not snap the A portion in place before inserting the cable. Note that the connector cannot be taken apart to be reused once it is crimped. Use a new sensor connector in case wiring or the snapping of A into B are done incorrectly. 4 2 Brown Black Blue N.C. Verify from the top side of A that the lead wires are inserted completely. To connect the connector to the multi-channel pressure sensor, push the connector with its A portion facing toward you into the socket until it clicks as shown below. To remove the connector, pull it straight out while applying pressure to the fingers on both sides. 2. Connecting power supply/output connection cable To connect the power supply/output connection cable to the controller, insert the cable connector with the C part facing down until it clicks

85 Series PSE Specific Product Precautions Be sure to read before handling. 2 Wiring Caution. Connecting to other series Any pressure sensor (SW) can be connected as long as it generates analog output ( to 5 V) signal. However, the pressure range must match. SMC pressure sensors, Series PSE5 & PSE52, are also connectable. When connecting to pressure sensors other than the Series PSE5, connector types will vary depending on the wire core size of the cable and the outside diameter of the insulation cover. Refer to the table provided below. Connector Insulation part no. Wire core size cover O.D. Sensor part no. S-26-E S-26-E- S-26-E-2 S-26-E- AWG24-26 (.4 to.2 mm 2 ) AWG24-26 (.4 to.2 mm 2 ) AWG2-22 (. to.5 mm 2 ) AWG2-22 (. to.5 mm 2 ) ø. to.4 ø.4 to 2. ø. to.4 ø.4 to 2. PSE5, PSE5 PSE52 PSE52 Refer to the following diagram for connecting Series PSE52 to the connector. Brown Black Blue N.C. F.G. Connect the shielding wire to the frame ground (F.G.) or F.G. terminal. Regulating Pressure Range & Rated Pressure Range Caution There is no shielding wire for ( Series PSE5 & PSE5. ). Regulating pressure range: Refers to allowable pressure range in a pressure setting mode. Setting range is between P_(n_) to P_4(n_4). For Series PSE2, the regulating pressure range and the setting pressure range that can be displayed are the same. 2. Rated pressure range: Refers to the pressure range that satisfies the product specifications. Pressure range that satisfies the product specifications (accuracy and linearity) for PSE SE ISE PSE I SE PS I SE 2 SP ISA2 IS SM PF2 IF Data 6--2

86 High Precision, Remote Type, 2-color Display Digital Pressure Sensor Series PSE54/56 Compact Pressure Sensor for Pneumatics Series PSE54 SE ISE PSE I SE Pressure Sensor Controller Series PSE Response Time ms Set Pressure Resolution Can be mounted in close proximity with each other either horizontally or vertically. OUT PRESSURE Connection MPa OUT2 OUT PRESSURE MPa OUT2 OUT PRESSURE MPa OUT2 Power supply/output connector e-con connector Sensor connector 2 outputs + Analog output or auto shift input Weight g Dimension x x mm Manifolding is possible. Pressure Sensor for General Purpose Fluids Series PSE Pads can be directly mounted. Wetted Material Stainless steel 6L 9.6 Copper-free Oil-free (Single diaphragm) 8 Washing line PS I SE 2 SP ISA2 IS SM PF2 IF Data 6--2

87 2 Variations Compact Pressure Sensor for Pneumatics P Series PSE54 Male thread type Plug-in reducer type M5 female thread, through type M x.5 M5 x.8 R /8 (With M5 female thread) NPT /8 (With M5 female thread) ø4 plug-in reducer ø6 plug-in reducer M5 x.8 M5 x.8 (With mounting hole) Pressure Sensor for General Purpose Fluid P Male thread type R /8, /4 (With M5 female thread) NPT /8, /4 (With M5 female thread) URJ /4, TSJ /4 Female thread type Rc /8 Series PSE56 Applicable fluid example Controller P For pneumatics For general purpose fluids Series PSE54 PSE54 PSE56 PSE56 PSE56 PSE564 to kpa to kpa to MPa to kpa to kpa to 5 kpa Vacuum Series PSE Compound pressure Positive pressure Low pressure Compound pressure Positive pressure Argon Air containing drainage Ammonia Freon Carbon dioxide Functions Rated pressure range Nitrogen Hydraulic fluid Silicon oil Lubricating oil Fluorocarbon Auto shift function Auto preset function Precision indicator setting Peak and bottom display function Key lock function Reset function Error indication function Unit display switching function Anti-chattering function kpa kpa kpa MPa kpa kpa kpa 5 kpa 6--24

88 Compact Pressure Sensor For General Air Series PSE54 Port size M M5 N R4 R6 Specifications Piping Specifications Pressure sensing range Vacuum ( to kpa) Compound pressure ( to kpa) Model Rated pressure range Proof pressure Fluid Power supply voltage Current consumption Output specification Accuracy (Ambient temperature of 25 C) Linearity Repeatability Power supply voltage effect Resistance Temperature characteristics Port size Material Sensor cable Weight Enclosure Operating temperature range Operating humidity range Withstand voltage Insulation resistance Vibration resistance Impact resistance Model Case M x.5 M5 x.8 R /8 (With M5 female thread) NPT /8 (With M5 female thread) ø4 plug-in reducer ø6 plug-in reducer Pressure sensing section With sensor cable Without sensor cable PSE54 M IM5 IM5H M x g 2.9 g How to Order M M5 female thread, through type M5 female thread, through type (With mounting hole) PSE54 to kpa M5 M5 x.8 Resin case: PBT Fitting: Stainless steel 42.7 g.2 g R/8 M5 x g 9.8 g N NPT/8 M5 x.8 Note) At the factory, the connector is not connected to the cable, but packed together with it for shipment. Option/Part No. Description Connector for PSE2 Connector for PSE Part no. S-26-E-4 S-28-C Note pc. pc. Conforms to CE marking and UL (CSA) standards. PSE54 to kpa R4 ø4 plug-in reducer Resin case: PBT PBT Fitting: C64BD Pressure sensor: Silicon, O-ring: NBR -wire oval cable (.5 mm 2 ) Option (Connector) Nil C C2 Without 4.4 g.9 g Connector for PSE2 multiple channel pressure controller pc. 5 kpa Air, No-corrosive gas, Non-flammable gas 2 to 24 VDC ±%, Ripple (p-p) % or less (With power supply polarity protection) 5 ma or less Analog output to 5 V (Within rated pressure range), Output impedance: Approx. kω ±2% F.S. or less ±.4% F.S. or less ±.2% F.S. or less ±.8% F.S. or less IP4 Operating: to 5 C, Stored: 2 to 7 C (No condensation or freezing) Operating/Stored: 5 to 85% RH (No condensation) VAC, 5/6 Hz for minute between live parts and case 5 MΩ between live parts and case (at 5 VDC) to 5 Hz at whichever is smaller of.5 mm amplitude or 98 m/s 2 acceleration, in X, Y, directions, for 2 hours each (De-energized) 98 m/s 2 in X, Y, directions, times each (de-energized) ±2% F.S. or less (based on 25 C) R6 IM5 ø6 M5 female thread, plug-in reducer through type 4.6 g 2. g Connector for PSE multiple channel pressure controller pc. 4. g.8 g IM5H M5 female thread, through type (with mounting hole) Resin case: PBT Fitting: A66S-T5 44. g 4.6 g SE ISE PSE I SE PS I SE 2 SP ISA2 IS SM PF2 IF Data

89 Series PSE54 4 Internal Circuit PSE54 Voltage output type to 5 V Output impedance Approx. kω Main circuit kω Brown DC (+) Black OUT (Analog output) Load Blue DC ( ) + to 24 VDC Dimensions PSE54 - M M5 PSE5 - R4 R6 A B Common dimensions 9.6 PSE54 - N 4.4 M: M x.5 M5: M5 x.8 M5 x.8 A 8 : R /8 N: NP T/8 PSE54 -M.8 PSE54 -M5.5 B.5 With across flats 7 With across flats 2 B A PSE54 -IM PSE54 -IM5H ø.4 A PSE54 -R4 ø4 PSE54 -R6 ø6 B M5 x.8 8 M5 x

90 5 Pressure Sensor For General Fluids Series PSE56 4 Pressure sensing range Positive pressure ( to MPa) Vacuum ( to kpa) Compound pressure ( to kpa) Positive pressure ( to 5 kpa) Port size R /8 (With M5 female thread) 2 R /4 (With M5 female thread) C Rc /8 N NPT /8 (With M5 female thread) N2 NPT /4 (With M5 female thread) A2 URJ /4 B2 TSJ /4 Specifications Piping Specifications Port size Material Sensor cable Weight Model Fluid Power supply voltage Current consumption Output specification Accuracy (Ambient temperature of 25 C) Linearity Repeatability Power supply voltage effect Enclosure Operating temperature range Operating humidity range Withstand voltage Insulation resistance Resistance Model Rated pressure range Proof pressure Vibration resistance Impact resistance Temperature characteristics Model With sensor cable Without sensor cable PSE56 Nil 28 Output specifications Voltage output type to 5 V Current output type 4 to 2 ma How to Order Option (Connector) Nil C C2 Without Option/Part No. Connector for PSE2 multiple channel pressure controller pc. Description Connector for PSE2 Connector for PSE Connector for PSE multiple channel pressure controller pc. Part no. S-26-E-4 S-28-C Note pc. pc. Conforms to CE marking and UL (CSA) standards. PSE56 PSE564 2 N N2 C A2 B2 R /8 R /4 NPT /8 NPT /4 Rc /8 URJ /4 TSJ /4 M5 x.8 M5 x.8 M5 x.8 M5 x.8 9 g g PSE56 to MPa.5 MPa PSE56-2 g 8 g PSE56 to kpa 5 kpa 94 g 2 g Note ) Current output type cannot be connected to PSE2 and PSE. Note 2) The connector is not connected to the cable and is supplied loose at the time of shipment. 2 g 9 g to kpa 5 kpa 87 g 95 g PSE Fluid, including gas, that will not corrode Stainlesss steel 6L 2 to 24 VDC ±%, Ripple (p-p) % or less (With power supply polarity protection) ma or less Analog output 4 to 2 ma (Within rated pressure range) Analog output to 5 V (Within rated pressure range) Allowable load impedance: 5 Ω or less (at 24 VDC) Output impedance: Approx. kω Ω or less (at 2 VDC) ±% F.S. or less ±.5% F.S. or less ±.2% F.S. or less ±.% F.S. or less IP65 Operating: to 6 C, Stored: 2 to 7 C (No condensation or freezing) Operating/Stored: 5 to 85% RH (No condensation) 25 VAC for minute between live parts and case 5 MΩ between live parts and case (at 5 VDC) to 5 Hz at whichever is smaller of.5 mm amplitude or 2 m/s 2 acceleration, in X, Y, directions, for 2 hours each (De-energized) 5 m/s 2 in X, Y, directions, times each (De-energized) ±2% F.S. or less ( to 5 C, based on 25 C), ±% F.S. or less ( to 6 C, based on 25 C) Case: C64 + nickel plated, Piping port/pressure sensor: Stainless steel 6L PSE56 - : Oil proof -wire heavy-duty vinyl cable with air tube (.2 mm 2 ) PSE : Oil proof 2-wire heavy-duty vinyl cable with air tube (.2 mm 2 ) 2 g g to 5 kpa 75 kpa 9 g g SE ISE PSE I SE PS I SE 2 SP ISA2 IS SM PF2 IF Data

91 Series PSE56 6 Internal Circuit PSE56 - Voltage output type to 5 V Output impedance Approx. kω Main circuit kω Brown DC(+) Black OUT + (Analog output) Load Blue DC( ) 2 to 24 VDC PSE Current output type 4 to 2 ma Allowable load impedance 5 Ω or less (at 24 VDC) Ω or less (at 2 VDC) Main circuit Brown LINE(+) Load + Blue LINE( ) Load 2 to 24 VDC Install the load either on the LINE (+) or LINE ( ) side. Dimensions PSE56-2 / PSE56 - N N2 PSE56 -C PSE56 -A2 PSE56 -B B M5 x.8 B B B A A A ø4 ø24 ø5. Part-C Model PSE56 - PSE56-2 PSE56 -N PSE56 -N2 PSE56 -C PSE56 -A2 PSE56 -B2 2 The dimensions of Part C are common to all PSE56 models. 5 A Air tube B R /8 R /4 NPT /8 NPT /4 Rc /8 URJ /4 TSJ /

92 Series PSE Specific Product Precautions Be sure to read before handling. 7 Pressure Sensor Warning. Do not drop, bump, or apply excessive impact (PSE54: 98 m/s 2, PSE56: 5 m/s 2 ) while handling. Although the body of the sensor may not be damaged, the inside of the sensor could be damaged and lead to malfunction. 2. The tensile strength of the cord is 5 N. Applying a greater pulling force to it can cause malfunction. When handling, hold the body of the sensor do not dangle it from the cord.. Do not use pressure sensors with corrosive and/or flammable gases or liquids. 4. Connection of sensor connector Sheath 2 mm or more Cut the sensor cable as illustrated to the right. Referring to the table below, insert each lead wire of the cable at the position Insulator marked with a number corresponding to the color of the lead wire. Connector no. 2 4 Handling Confirm that the numbers on the Part-A connector match the colors of the wires and that the wires are inserted to the bottom. Press Part A by hand for temporary fixing. Press in the central part of Part A vertically with a tool such as pliers. A sensor connector cannot be taken apart for reuse once it is crimped. If the wire arrangement is incorrect or if the wire insertion fails, use a new sensor connector. For connection to SMC Series PSE pressure switches, use sensor connectors (S-28-C) or e-con connectors listed below. For detailed information about e-con connectors, please consult the manufacturers of the respective connectors. Warning For PSE2 (S-26-E) Brown (DC (+)) Black (OUT: to 5 V) Blue (DC (-)) Not connected Manufacturer Sumitomo M Tyco Electronics AMP Wire core color Operating Environment. The pressure sensors are CE marked; however, they are not equipped with surge protection against lightning. Lightning surge countermeasures should be applied directly to system components as necessary. 2. The pressure sensors do not have an explosion proof rating. Never use pressure sensors in the presence of flammable or explosive gases. 2 4 For PSE (S-28-C) Brown (DC (+)) Not connected Blue (DC (-)) Black (OUT: to 5 V) 2 4 Part no. 74--FL Warning Controller Air Supply. Use of toxic, corrosive or flammable gases Since the switch uses stainless steel 6L as the material of the pressure sensor and fittings, do not use toxic or corrosive gases. 2. Fluid compatibility Since the switch uses stainless steel 6L as the wetted material (for the pressure sensor and fittings), use fluids that will not corrode this material. (For the corrosiveness of the fluids, please consult with the manufacturers of the respective fluids.) Helium leakage test Helium leakage test is conducted on the welded parts. Use ferrules by Crawford Fittings (Swagelok fittings) as TSJ fittings, seals and glands by Cajon (VCR fittings) as URJ fittings. If ferrules, seals, or glands of other brands are to be used, be sure to conduct helium leakage test before using those products. Handling Warning. Do not drop, bump, or apply excessive impact ( m/s 2 ) while handling. Although the body of the controller case may not be damaged, the inside of the controller could be damaged and cause malfunction. 2. The tensile strength of the power supply/output connection cable is 5 N; that of the pressure sensor lead wire with connector is 25 N. Applying a greater pulling force than the applicable specified tensile strength to either of these components can lead to malfunction. When handling, hold the body of the controller do not dangle it from the cord. Warning Connection. Incorrect wiring can damage the switch and cause malfunction or erroneous switch output. Connections should be done while the power is turned off. 2. Do not attempt to insert or pull out the pressure sensor or its connector when the power is on. Switch output may malfunction.. Wire separately from power lines and high voltage lines, avoiding wiring in the same conduit with these lines. Malfunctions may occur due to noise from these other lines. 4. If a commercial switching regulator is used, make sure that the F.G. terminal is grounded SE ISE PSE I SE PS I SE 2 SP ISA2 IS SM PF2 IF Data

93 Series PSE Specific Product Precautions 2 Be sure to read before handling. 8 Controller Warning Operating Environment. Our pressure sensor controllers are CE marked; however, they are not equipped with surge protection against lightning. Lightning surge countermeasures should be applied directly to system components as necessary. 2. Our pressure sensor controllers do not have an explosion proof rating. Never use pressure sensors in the presence of flammable or explosive gases.. Enclosure IP65 applies only to the front face of the panel when mounting. Do not use in an environment where oil splashing or spraying is anticipated. Caution Mounting. Mounting with bracket Mount the bracket on the body with two M x 5L mounting screws. Tighten the bracket mounting screws at a tightening torque of.5 to.7 N m. M x 5L 2. Mounting with panel mount adapter Secure the panel mount adapter with two M x 8L mounting screws. Panel Front protective cover (Part no. S-27-) M x 5L Panel mount adapter (Part no. S-27-C) Rotate 9 to mount. Bracket (Part no. S-28-B) M x 8L Caution. Panel mount adapter removal To remove the controller with panel mount adapter from the equipment, remove the two mounting screws, and pull out the controller while pushing the claws outward. Failure to follow this procedure can cause damage to the controller and panel mount adapter. Caution Mounting Claw Wiring Claw. Connection and removal of sensor connector Hold the lever and connector body with two fingers and insert the connector straight into the pin until it is locked with a click sound. To remove the connector, pull it out straight while pressing the lever with one finger. Lever Sensor connector 2. Connector pin numbers for power supply/output cable DC (+) Brown 5 OUT Black 4 OUT2 White Analog or auto shift Gray 2 DC (-) Blue 6--

94 Series PSE Specific Product Precautions Be sure to read before handling. 9 Caution Regulating Pressure Range and Rated Pressure Range Set the pressure within the rated pressure range. The regulating pressure range is the range of pressure that can be set on the controller. The rated pressure range is the range of pressure that satisfies the specifications (accuracy, linearity, etc.) of the sensor. Although it is possible to set a value outside the rated pressure range, the specifications will not be guaranteed even if the value stays within the regulating pressure range. For vacuum Sensor For compound pressure For positive pressure PSE54 PSE56 PSE54 PSE56 PSE56 PSE564 kpa kpa 5 kpa MPa kpa kpa kpa kpa kpa kpa kpa kpa kpa (. MPa) Pressure range MPa 5 kpa 5 kpa 5 kpa MPa Rated pressure range of sensor Regulating pressure range of controller SE ISE PSE I SE PS I SE 2 SP ISA2 IS SM PF2 IF Data 6--

95 Low Differential Pressure Sensor Series PSE55/ Flow control Can control air flow by monitoring the flow rate inside the duct. Plug connection Controller PSE e-con connector Filter clogging monitoring Rated differential pressure range: to 2 kpa Accuracy: ±% F.S. LED display to confirm energization Proof pressure: 65 kpa Output: to 5 VDC/ (Analog output) 4 to 2 madc Applications Can control filtration and replacement periods by monitoring the clogging of the filter. Low differential pressure sensor PSE55 Two mounting methods Direct mounting Liquid level detection Can detect the liquid level through changes in the purge pressure. Bracket mounting SE ISE PSE I SE PS I SE 2 SP ISA2 IS SM PF2 IF Data 6--

96 2 Low Differential Pressure Sensor Series PSE55 PSE55 How to Order Option/Part No. Description Bracket Connector for PSE Specifications Output specification Environmental resistance Impact resistance Temperature characteristics Port size Nil 28 Part no. S--A S-28-C Accuracy (Ambient temperature of 25 C) Linearity Repeatability Indication light Enclosure Operating temperature range Operating humidity range Withstand voltage Insulation resistance Vibration resistance Output specifications Voltage output type to 5 V Current output type 4 to 2 ma Note With M x 5L (2 pcs.) pc. Material of wetted parts Sensor cable With sensor cable Weight Without sensor cable Note) Can detect differential pressure from to 2 kpa within the range of 5 to 5 kpa. Option (Bracket) Nil None Bracket A Option 2 (Connector) Nil None Connector for PSE multiple channel pressure controller pc. C2 Note ) Current output type cannot be connected to the Series PSE. Note 2) The connector is unassembled in the factory but is included with the shipment. Note) The bracket is unassembled in the factory, but is included with the shipment. Model PSE55 PSE55-28 Rated differential pressure range to 2 kpa Operating pressure range 5 to 5 kpa Note) Proof pressure 65 kpa Applicable fluid Air/Non-corrosive gas/non-inflammable gas Power supply voltage 2 to 24 VDC ±%, Ripple (p-p) % or less (With power supply polarity protection) Current consumption 5 ma or less 6--4 Analog output to 5 VDC (Within rated differential pressure range) Output impedance: Approx. kω Analog output 4 to 2 madc (Within rated differential pressure range) Allowable load impedance: 5 Ω or less (at 24 VDC) Ω or less (at 2 VDC) ±% F.S. or less ±.5% F.S. or less ±.% F.S. or less Orange light is on (When energized) IP4 Operating: to 5 C, Stored: 2 to 7 C (No freezing or condensation) Operating/Stored: 5 to 85% RH (No condensation) VAC or more, 5/6 Hz for minute between live parts and case 5 MΩ or more between live parts and case (at 5 VDC) to 5 Hz at whichever is smaller of.5 mm amplitude or m/s 2 acceleration, in X, Y, directions, for 2 hours each (De-energized) m/s 2 in X, Y, directions, times each (De-energized) ±% F.S. or less (Based on 25 C) ø4.8 (ø4.4 in the end) resin piping (Applicable to I.D. ø4 air tubing) Resin pipe: Nylon, Piston area of sensor: Silicon -wire oval cable (.5 mm 2 ) 2-wire oval cable (.5 mm 2 ) 75 g 5 g

97 Low Differential Pressure Sensor Series PSE55 Analog Output to 5 VDC 4 to 2 madc Analog output [V] 5 2 Differential pressure [kpa] Analog output [ma] Differential pressure [kpa] SE ISE PSE I SE Internal Circuit PS PSE55 Voltage output type to 5 V Output impedance Approx. kω Dimensions With bracket 27 Main circuit kω M x.5 depth 4 A Brown DC (+) Black OUT + (Analog output) Load Blue DC ( ) ø4.8 ø4.4 2 to 24 VDC PSE55-28 Current output type 4 to 2 ma Allowable load impedance 5 Ω or less (at 24 VDC) Ω or less (at 2 VDC) Main circuit Brown LINE (+) Load + Blue LINE ( ) Load Install the load either on the LINE (+) or LINE ( ) side. 2 x ø.5 through ø to 24 VDC Indicator light 4.9 I SE 2 SP ISA2 IS SM PF2 IF Data.6 S--A bracket A View 6--5

98 4 Controller Series PSE How to Order Nil L Option/Part No. Input/Output specifications Description Power supply/output connection cable Bracket Sensor connector Panel mount adapter Panel mount adapter + Front protective cover NPN2 output + -5 V output NPN2 output ma output NPN2 output + Auto shift input PNP2 output + -5 V output PNP2 output ma output PNP2 output + Auto shift input PSE Part no. S-28-A S-28-B S-28-C S-27-C S-27-D Note With M x 5L (2 pcs.) pc. M Option Without cable Power supply/output connection cable Power supply/ Output connection cable S-28-A Note) The cable is unassembled in the factory, but is included with the shipment. With M x 8L (2 pcs.) With M x 8L (2 pcs.) Unit specifications Nil With unit display switching function M Fixed SI unit Note ) Note ) Fixed unit For vacuum & low pressure & low differential pressure & compound pressure: kpa Positive pressure: MPa (For MPa) kpa (For 5 kpa) Option Nil C Without connector Sensor connector Note) The connector is unassembled in the factory, but is included with the shipment. Option 2 Nil A B D Without bracket/panel mount adapter/front protective cover Bracket M x 5L M x 5L Panel mount adapter Panel Bracket Panel mount adapter + Front protective cover Panel Front protective cover Panel mount adapter Panel mount adapter Sensor connector (e-con connector) S-28-C Mounting screw (M x 8L) (Accessory) Mounting screw (M x 8L) (Accessory) Note) These options are unassembled in the factory, but are included with the shipment. 6--6

99 Controller Series PSE 5 Specifications Weight Resistance Analog output Model Current output Note 2) Accuracy (To display value) (25 C) Display accuracy (Ambient temperature of 25 C) Display Indicator light Auto shift input Note 2) Enclosure Operating temperature range Operating humidity range Withstand voltage Insulation resistance Vibration resistance Impact resistance Temperature characteristics Connection Material With power supply/output connection cable Without power supply/output connection cable PSE Set (differential) pressure range to kpa to kpa to kpa. to MPa 5 to 5 kpa.2 to 2 kpa Pressure range Note ) For compound pressure For vacuum For low pressure For positive pressure For low difference pressure Rated (differential) pressure range to kpa to kpa to kpa to MPa to 5 kpa to 2 kpa Power supply voltage Current consumption Sensor input No. of inputs 2 to 24 VDC, Ripple (p-p) % or less (With power supply polarity protection) 5 ma or less (Current consumption for sensor is not included.) to 5 VDC (Input impedance: MΩ) input Input protection With excess voltage protection (Up to 26.4 V) Hysteresis Switch output Maximum load current Hysterisis mode: Variable, Window comparator mode: Variable NPN or PNP open collector output: 2 outputs 8 ma Maximum load voltage VDC (at NPN output) Residual voltage V or less (With load current of 8 ma) Output protection With short circuit protection Response time Anti-chattering function ms or less Response time settings for anti-chattering function: 2 ms, 6 ms, 64 ms, 28 ms Repeatability ±.% F.S. or less Output voltage: to 5 V (Within rated pressure range (Differential pressure)), Output impedance: Approx. kω Voltage output Note 2) Linearity: ±.2% F.S. (Not including sensor accuracy), Response speed: 5 ms or less Accuracy (To display value) (25 C) ±.6% F.S. or less ±.% F.S. or less ±.5% F.S. or less to 5VDC Analog output [V] 5 A C Output current: 4 to 2 ma (Within rated pressure range) Maximum load impedance: Ω (at 2 VDC), 6 Ω (at 24 VDC), Minimum load impedance: 5 Ω Linearity: ±.2% F.S. (Not including sensor accuracy), Response time: 5 ms or less ±.5% F.S. ±2 digits or less B Pressure D Differential pressure ±.% F.S. or less ±.5% F.S. or less ±2.% F.S. or less ±.5% F.S. ± digit or less + /2 digit, 7 segment indicator, 2-color display (Red/Green), Sampling frequency: 5 times/sec OUT: Lights up when ON (Green), OUT2: Lights up when ON (Red) Non-voltage input (Reed or Solid state), Low level input: 5 ms or more, Low level:.4 V or less IP4 Operating: to 5 C, Stored: to 6 C (No freezing or condensation) Operating/Stored: 5 to 85% RH (No condensation) VAC for minute between live parts and case 5 MΩ or more between live parts and case (at 5 VDC Mega) to 5 Hz at whichever is smaller of.5 mm amplitude or 98 m/s 2 acceleration, in X, Y, directions, for 2 hours each (De-energized) Note ) Pressure range can be selected during initial setting. Note 2) Auto shift function is not available when analog output option is selected. Also, analog output option is not available when auto shift function is selected. Note ) The following units can be selected with unit conversion function: For vacuum & compound pressure: kpa kgf/cm 2 bar psi mmhg inhg For positive pressure & low pressure: MPa kpa kgf/cm 2 bar psi For low differential pressure: kpa mmh2o Analog Output 4 to 2 madc Analog output [ma] 2 4 A C m/s 2 in X, Y, directions, times each (De-energized) ±.5% F.S. or less (Based on 25 C) Power supply/output connection: 5P connector, Sensor connection: 4P connector Front case: PBT, Rear case: PBT 85 g g B Pressure D Differential pressure Conforms to CE marking and UL (CSA) standards. Range For vacuum For compound pressure For positive pressure Range For low differential pressure Rated pressure range to kpa kpa to kpa to MPa to 5 kpa Rated differential pressure range A kpa C B kpa kpa MPa 5 kpa to 2 kpa 2 kpa D 6--7 SE ISE PSE I SE PS I SE 2 SP ISA2 IS SM PF2 IF Data

100 Series PSE 6 Internal Circuit PSE NPN open collector output (2 outputs), Max. V or 8 ma, residual voltage V or less Analog output: to 5 V Output impedance: Approx. kω DC (+) Main circuit PSE NPN open collector output (2 outputs), Max. V or 8 ma, residual voltage V or less Analog output: 4 to 2 ma Maximum load impedance: Ω (2 VDC), 6 Ω (24 VDC) Minimum load impedance: 5 Ω Main circuit Descriptions LCD Output (OUT) display (Green) Up button DC (+) (Brown) Analog output (Gray) OUT (Black) OUT2 (White) Load DC ( ) (Blue) PSE2 NPN open collector output with auto shift input (2 outputs), Max. V, 8 ma, residual voltage V or less Main circuit (Brown) Analog output (Gray) OUT (Black) OUT2 (White) Load DC ( ) (Blue) DC (+) (Brown) Auto shift input (Gray) OUT (Black) OUT2 (White) DC ( ) (Blue) Load Load Load Load Load Load Displays the current pressure, set mode, selected display unit, and error code. Four different display settings are available. Always use red or green display; or switch between green and red according to the output. Lights up when OUT is ON. Use this button to select the mode or increase the ON/OFF set value. It is also used for switching to the peak display mode to 24 VDC 2 to 24 VDC 2 to 24 VDC PSE PNP open collector output (2 outputs), Max. 8 ma, residual voltage V or less Analog output: to 5 V Output impedance: Approx. kω DC (+) Main circuit PSE4 PNP open collector output (2 outputs), Max. 8 ma, residual voltage V or less Analog output: 4 to 2 ma Maximum load impedance: Ω (2 VDC), 6 Ω (24 VDC) Minimum load impedance: 5 Ω Main circuit Output (OUT2) display (Red) button Down button (Brown) Analog output (Gray) Load OUT (Black) OUT2 (White) Load DC ( ) (Blue) DC (+) (Brown) Analog output (Gray) Load OUT (Black) OUT2 (White) Load DC ( ) (Blue) PSE5 PNP open collector output with auto shift input (2 outputs), Max. 8 ma, residual voltage V or less Main circuit DC (+) (Brown) Auto shift input (Gray) OUT (Black) OUT2 (White) DC ( ) (Blue) Lights up when OUT2 is ON. Load Load Load Load 2 to 24 VDC 2 to 24 VDC 2 to 24 VDC Use this button to change the mode or confirm the set value. Use this button to select the mode or decrease the ON/OFF set value. It is also used for switching to the bottom display mode. 6--8

101 Controller Series PSE 7 Dimensions Power supply/output connector 2 ±. 2 M x.5 depth 4.5 SE ISE Sensor connector PSE I SE Power supply/output connection cable (S-28-A) DC (+) Brown 5 OUT Black 4 OUT2 White Analog output or auto shift input Gray 2 DC ( ) Blue 2 2 m 2 With bracket S-28-B Bracket With panel mount adapter A S-27-C Panel mount adapter Panel thickness.5 to 6 4 Sensor connector PIN no Terminal DC (+) N.C. DC ( ) IN ( to 5 V) 22 5 A View 5 With panel mount adapter + Front protective cover S-27-D Panel mount adapter + Front protective cover PS I SE 2 SP ISA2 IS SM PF2 IF Data

102 Series PSE 8 Dimensions Panel cutout dimensions Horizontal stacking mount of multiple units (n pcs.) Mount of single unit or more x n pcs. +.5 x (n pcs. ) Vertical stacking mount of multiple units (n pcs.) 24 or more x n pcs. +.5 x (n pcs. )

103 Controller Series PSE 9 Functions A Auto shift function When there are large fluctuations in the supply pressure, the switch may fail to operate correctly. The auto shift function compensates such supply pressure fluctuations. It measures the (differential) pressure at the time of auto shift signal input and uses it as the reference (differential) pressure to correct the set value on the switch. Set value correction by auto shift function (Differential) Pressure Switch output (2) Auto shift input C Display calibration function This function eliminates slight differences in the output values and allows uniformity in the numbers displayed. Displayed values of the pressure sensors can be adjusted to within ±5%. Display pressure value Supply pressure Supply pressure Supply pressure normal drop increase P- C-5 C-5 (P-) ON OFF Compound pressure Vacuum Low pressure Positive pressure Low differential pressure Hi Lo H- (H-2) ±5%R.D. 5 ms or more Possible Set Range For Auto Shift Input Set (differential) pressure range. to. kpa. to. kpa to. kpa. to. MPa 5 to 5 kpa.2 to 2. kpa + Applied pressure ms or less Switch output response time when auto shift is input. Possible set range. to. kpa. to. kpa. to. kpa. to. MPa 5 to 5 kpa 2. to 2. kpa B Auto preset function Auto preset function, when selected in the initial setting, calculates and stores the set value from the measured (differential) pressure. The optimum set value is determined automatically by repeating vacuum and break with the target workpiece several times. Adsorption Verification High Vacuum Absorption Max. A P- Min. B Atmosphere H- Work Work 2 Nonabsorption Work Work 2 Work n P- = A (A B) / 4 H- = (A B) / 2 Work n A = Maximum pressure value B = Minimum pressure value Displayed value at the time of shipment Adjustable range of display calibration function Note) When the precision indicator setting function is used, the set (differential) pressure value may change ± digit. D Peak and bottom display function This function constantly detects and updates the maximum and minimum values and allows to hold the display value. E Key lock function This function prevents incorrect operations such as accidentally changing the set value. F Reset function This function clears and resets the zero value on the display of measured (differential) pressure within ±7% F.S. of the factory adjusted value. G Error indication function Error name Error code Overcurrent error Residual pressure error Applied pressure error Auto shift error System error OUT OUT2 Internal data error Internal data error Internal data error Internal data error Description H Unit display switching function Display units can be switched with this function. Units that can be displayed vary depending on the range of the pressure sensors connected to the controller. Pressure range Applicable pressure sensor Set (differential) pressure range kpa MPa kgf/cm 2 bar psi inhg mmhg For For For compound vacuum low pressure pressure PSE5 PSE5 PSE54 PSE54 PSE52 PSE56 PSE56 to kpa to kpa to kpa....2 Load current of switch output exceeds 8 ma. Pressure applied during the zero reset operation exceeds ±7% F.S. After displaying the error code for seconds, the switch automatically returns to the measuring mode. Due to individual product differences, the setting range varies ±4 digits. Supply pressure exceeds the maximum set (differential) pressure or upper limit of the display pressure. A sensor may be unconnected or miswired. Or, supply pressure is below the minimum set (differential) pressure or lower limit of the display pressure. The value measured at the time of auto shift input is outside the set (differential) pressure range. After displaying the error code for one second, the switch returns to the measuring mode. For positive pressure PSE5 PSE56. to MPa....2 PSE564 5 to 5 kpa... For low differential pressure PSE55.2 to 2. kpa. mmh2o Series PSE5 pressure sensors are also applicable. Please contact SMC for more information. SE ISE PSE I SE PS I SE 2 SP ISA2 IS SM PF2 IF Data 6--4

104 Series PSE Functions I Anti-chattering function A large bore cylinder or ejector consumes a large volume of air in operation and may experience a temporary drop in the supply pressure. This function prevents detection of such temporary drops in the supply pressure as an error. Response time settings: 2 ms, 6 ms, 64 ms, 28 ms <Principle> This function averages pressure values measured during the response time set by the user and then compares the average pressure value with the pressure set point value to output the result on the switch. Pressure Momentary change Pressure range P- Switch output operation in ON normal OFF conditions. Switch output ON operation when anti-chattering OFF function is on. H- t (ms) t (ms) Time <Averaging> <Averaging> Time Time 6--42

105 Series PSE Specific Product Precautions Be sure to read before handling. Pressure Sensor Handling Warning. Do not drop, bump, or apply excessive impact while handling. Although the body of the sensor may not be damaged, the inside of the sensor could be damaged and lead to malfunction. 2. The tensile strength of the cord is 5 N or less. Applying a greater pulling force to it can cause malfunction. When handling, hold the body of the sensor do not dangle it from the cord.. Care should be taken when stripping the outer cable covering as the insulator may be accidentally torn or damaged if incorrectly stripped, as shown on the right. 4. Do not use pressure sensors with corrosive and/or flammable gases or liquids. 5. Connection of sensor connector Cut the sensor cable as illustrated to the right. Referring to the table below, insert each lead wire of the cable at the position marked with a number corresponding to the color of the lead wire. Confirm that the numbers on the connector match the colors of the wires and that the wires are inserted to Manufacturer Sumitomo M Tyco Electronics AMP OMRON Corporation Connector no Sheath the bottom. Press Part A by hand for temporary fixing. Press in the central part of Part A vertically with a tool such as pliers. A sensor connector cannot be taken apart for reuse once it is crimped. If the wire arrangement is incorrect or if the wire insertion fails, use a new sensor connector. For connection to SMC Series PSE pressure switches, use sensor connectors (S-28-C) or e- con connectors listed below mm or more Insulator Wire core color For PSE (S-28-C) Brown (DC (+)) Not connected Blue (DC ( )) Black (OUT: to 5 V) Part no. 74--FL XN2A-4 Part-A For detailed information about e-con connectors, please consult the manufacturers of the respective connectors. When piping, increase the length of the air tubing to allow for any possible warping, increased tension or moment load or increased tension, etc. In cases where SMC air tubing is not used, make sure the product has similar I.D. accuracy within ø4 ±. mm. Handling Make sure that the air tubing is firmly inserted to avoid possible disconnection. (Tensile strength is approx. 25 N when being inserted 8 mm.) Please consult with SMC if you intend to use with fluids other than air, non-corrosive gas and non-inflammable gas. Warning Operating Environment. The pressure sensors are CE marked; however, they are not equipped with surge protection against lightening. Lightning surge countermeasures should be applied directly to system components as necessary. 2. The pressure sensors do not have an explosion proof rating. Never use pressure sensors in the presence of flammable or explosive gases. Caution Piping Connection Cut the air tubing vertically. Carefully hold the air tubing Air tubing and slowly push it into the resin pipe, ensuring that it is inserted by more than 8 mm. For your information, the tensile strength is approx. 25 Resin pipe N when inserted by more than 8 mm. Insert the low pressure tubing into Lo pipe, and the highpressure tubing into Hi pipe. Controller Handling Warning. Do not drop, bump, or apply excessive impact ( m/s 2 ) while handling. Although the body of the controller case may not be damaged, the inside of the controller could be damaged and cause malfunction. 2. The tensile strength of the power supply/output connection cable is 5 N; that of the pressure sensor lead wire with connector is 25 N. Applying a greater pulling force than the applicable specified tensile strength to either of these components can lead to malfunction. When handling, hold the body of the controller. SE ISE PSE I SE PS I SE 2 SP ISA2 IS SM PF2 IF Data 6--4

106 Series PSE Specific Product Precautions 2 Be sure to read before handling. 2 Controller Warning Warning Caution Front protective cover (Part no. S-27-) Connection. Incorrect wiring can damage the switch and cause malfunction or erroneous switch output. Connections should be done while the power is turned off. 2. Do not attempt to insert or pull out the pressure sensor or its connector when the power is on. Switch output may malfunction.. Wire separately from power lines and high voltage lines, avoiding wiring in the same conduit with these lines. Malfunctions may occur due to noise from these other lines. 4. If a commercial switching regulator is used, make sure that the F.G. terminal is grounded. Operating Environment. Our pressure sensor controllers are CE marked; however, they are not equipped with surge protection against lightning. Lightning surge countermeasures should be applied directly to system components as necessary. 2. Our pressure sensor controllers do not have an explosion proof rating. Never use pressure sensors in the presence of flammable or explosive gases. Mounting. Mounting with bracket Mount the bracket on the body with two M x 5L mounting screws. Tighten the bracket mounting screws at a tightening torque of.5 to.7 N m. Panel M x 5L M x 5L Panel mount adapter (Part no. S-27-C) Rotate 9 to mount. Bracket (Part no. S-28-B) 2. Mounting with panel mount adapter Secure the panel mount adapter with two M x 8L mounting screws. M x 8L Mounting. Panel mount adapter removal To remove the controller with panel mount adapter from the equipment, remove the two mounting screws, and pull out the controller while pushing the claws outward. Failure to follow this procedure can cause damage to the controller and panel mount adapter. Caution DC (+) Brown 5 OUT Black 4 OUT2 White Analog or auto shift Gray 2 DC ( ) Blue Claw Wiring Lever Claw. Connection and removal of sensor connector Hold the lever and connector body with two fingers and insert the connector straight into the pin until it is locked with a click sound. To remove the connector, pull it out straight while pressing the lever with one finger. Sensor connector 2. Connector pin numbers for power supply/output 6--44

107 Series PSE Specific Product Precautions Be sure to read before handling. Set Differential Pressure Range & Rated Differential Pressure Range Caution Set the pressure within the rated differential pressure range. The set differential pressure range is the range of differential pressure that can be set on the controller. The rated differential pressure range is the range of differential pressure that satisfies the specifications (accuracy, linearity, etc.) of the sensor. Although it is possible to set a value outside the rated differential pressure range, the specifications will not be guaranteed even if the valve stays within the set differential pressure range. For low differential pressure Sensor PSE55 Pressure range 2 kpa 2 kpa 5 kpa kpa 2 kpa.2 kpa 2 kpa Rated differential pressure range of sensor Set differential pressure range of controller SE ISE PSE I SE PS I SE 2 SP ISA2 IS SM PF2 IF Data 6--45

108 LCD Readout Digital Pressure Switch Series SE/ISE (For Vacuum) (For Positive Pressure) For General Pneumatics Push-button calibration allows for precise and simple set up. Built-in failure prediction output function When system performance declines due to filter element clogging, worn vacuum pads, piping leakage, etc., the switch can detect and indicate an oncoming problem before failure occurs. Two independent outputs Allows the calibration of two different setpoints e.g. change of vacuum pad size requiring different setpoints, two different supply pressures requiring different pressure confirmation points. Self-diagnostic function Excessive current Excessive pressure Data error RE SMC kpa LCD: Error display Indication lights LED (Red) Calibration data For details about certified products conforming to international standards, visit us at The calibration data is stored in an EEPROM. The EEPROM is rated to keep its memory for, hours (approx. years) without having power supplied. Modular version can be integrated with X system Suction filter comes as standard SE ISE PSE I SE PS I SE 2 SP ISA2 IS SM PF2 IF Data 6-4-

109 Series SE/ISE 2 How to Order Nil L Operating pressure range to.98 MPa to 98 kpa Piping specifications Single mounting R /8 T Single mounting NPTF /8 Note) M5 x.8 female threaded. Output specifications 2 22 NPN open collector 2 outputs without analog output NPN open collector 2 outputs with analog output ( to 5 V) Positive pressure ISE Vacuum Caution SE Piping specifications Single mounting R /8 T Single mounting NPTF /8 X With suction filter M5 x.8 XY With suction filter M6 x (Option) Note) Single mounting type: M5 x.8 female threaded. Refer to pages 6-4- and for Safety Instructions and Common Precautions on the products mentioned in this catalog, and refer to pages 6-- to 6-- for Precautions on every series. Wiring specifications Nil Grommet type (Lead wire:.6 m) L Grommet type (Lead wire: m) C Connector type (Lead wire:.6 m) CL Connector type (Lead wire: m) CN Without connector Analog output is only available in a grommet type. Please refer to page for figure. Output specifications NPN open collector 2 outputs without analog output NPN open collector 2 outputs with analog output ( to 5 V) Q CE marked products Note) Only available with output specifications 2 and 2. NPN open collector output Failure predict function without analog output NPN open collector output Failure predict function with analog output ( to 5 V) 6-4-2

110 LCD Readout Digital Pressure Switch Series SE/ISE Specifications Model Vacuum SE Positive pressure kpa ISEL Positive pressure MPa ISE Operating pressure range to kpa to 98 kpa to.98 MPa Max. operating pressure Min. display unit Indicator light (2) kpa MPa Frequency response () Hysteresis mode Hysteresis Window comparator mode Fluid Temperature characteristics Repeatability Voltage Output specification Current consumption Error display Pressure indication Self-diagnostic function Operating temperature range Noise resistance Withstand voltage Insulation resistance Vibration resistance Impact resistance Connector type Lead wire Grommet type Weight Port size Enclosure 2 kpa () MPa. ON: When Green LED (OUT) or Red (OUT2) turns on 2 Hz Adjustable ( digits or more) Fixed ( digits) Air, Non-corrosive gases ±% F.S. or less % F.S. or less 2 to 24 VDC (Ripple ±% or less) NPN open collector V 8 ma or less 25 ma or less Red light blinks. Display the error code on LCD. /2 digits (5 mm-size numerals) Overcurrent, Overpressure, Data error Pressure during clear to 6 C (No dewing) Vp-p, Pulse width µs, Rise time ns Between external terminals and housing VAC, 5 /6 Hz for min. Between external terminals and housing 2 MΩ (5 VDC by megameter) to 5 Hz Pulse width.5 mm or acceleration 98 m/s 2 (at the smaller vibration) to X, Y, direction (2 hours) 98 m/s 2 to X, Y, direction ( times for each direction) Heat-resistant vinyl electric wire ø.55. mm 2 4-wire Oil-resistant vinyl cabtire code -2, -2: ø.5.4 mm 2 4 cores -22, -24: ø.5.5 mm 2 5 cores 4 g (including.6 m-long lead wire) R /8, M5 x.8, NPTF /8, M5 x.8 R X ejector mounted type: M5 x.8 /8, M5 x.8 NPTF /8, M5 x.8 IP4 Note ) Instant pressure supply of.5 MPa has no influence on the switch. Note 2) SE : Failure predictive output is Red. Note ) Hysteresis mode: When the values of P and P2 are the same or when P > P2 within digits, the hysteresis will be automatically digits for the set value of P. Window comparator mode: The hysteresis is digits, so separate P from P2 by 7 digits or more and set them. digit is the minimum pressure display unit. (See the table above.) Description RE button This clears the unit when an abnormality occurs. Displays. button Switches to the setting mode. RE SMC kpa LCD Displays present pressure. Displays each mode. Displays error code. DOWN button Decreases the ON/OFF set point value. Used for switch to peak mode low. UP button Increases the ON/OFF set point value. Changed to peak mode high. SE ISE PSE I SE PS I SE 2 SP ISA2 IS SM PF2 IF Data 6-4-

111 Series SE/ISE 4 Calibration Procedure Pressure Setting 2 output type. Input mode for set point value 2. Input set point value for OUT (). Input set point value for OUT (2) kpa kpa Press the button. kpa Press the button. Table ON OFF Table 2 Press the button. P: Setting of OUT P2: Setting of OUT P: Setting of OUT2 P4: Setting of OUT2 Output type Hysteresis mode (P P2, P P4) Hysteresis (Adjustable) P2 (P4) Pressure Low Vacuum Low P (P) Press the button. ON OFF Hysteresis (Fixed) button: Increases set point value button: Decreases set point value (Refer to the Table.) button: Increases set point value button: Decreases set point value P (P) Pressure Low Vacuum Low Press the button. Press the button. Press the button. button: Increases set point value button: Decreases set point value 4. Input set point value for OUT2 () 5. Input set point value for OUT2 (2) Window comparator mode (P< P2, P< P4) (Hysteresis = digits fixed) P2 (P4) output type with failure prediction function Hysteresis (Fixed) button: Increases set point value button: Decreases set point value button: Increases set point value button: Decreases set point value digit is the minimum setting pressure unit.. Input mode for set point value 2. Input set point value for OUT (). Input set point value for OUT (2) P: setting of OUT P2: setting of OUT2 P: setting of failure prediction pressure EC: Number of failure prediction Vacuum Failure prediction High P Set pressure P Set pressure Low P2 kpa High High Failure prediction counter Normal time 2 times times kpa kpa High High button: Increases set point value button: Decreases set point value Press the button to complete the setting. Press the button. 4. Calibration of failure predictive pressure 5. Calibration of number of failure prediction occurrences kpa button: Increases set point value button: Decreases set point value (Refer to the Table 2.) kpa kpa kpa Note) Hysteresis mode (one for positive pressure is same) When P and P2 (also P and P4 for 2 output type) are the same or P > P2 within digit, hysteresis for set pressure P (or P) becomes increments automatically. Window comparator mode (one for positive pressure is same) Hysteresis is digit, so set P and P2 (also P and P4) at least 7 digit. Press the button to complete the setting. button: Increases set point value button: Decreases set point value Occurrence number: to 6 times ( is not available for prediction.) Failure prediction will register when switches turn OFF without reaching the pressure of (P) after switch turns ON (over P). Output of failure detection occurs when failure prediction is counted continuously within certain preset levels. The count of failure prediction is reset when switch turns ON (over P) and pressure exceeds the failure prediction set pressure (P). (Example of hysteresis mode.) 6-4-4

112 LCD Readout Digital Pressure Switch Series SE/ISE 5 Other Functions Internal Circuit and Wiring Example Peak mode high RE Peak mode low RE Reset function RE Error Correction Take the following corrective solutions when errors occur. Display SMC SMC SMC kpa kpa kpa Description Set data was changed by accident, reason unknown. OUT is short-circuited. Overcurrent is being applied to the load. OUT 2 is short-circuited. Overcurrent is being applied to the load. Pressure exceeding.5 MPa is being applied. (The pressure over rated pressure is being applied in case of positive pressure.) When performing zero clear, compared with the atmospheric pressure, pressure of more than ±.7 MPa for MPa and ±7 kpa for vacuum is being applied. To display the high peak pressure (highest degree of vacuum), press the button during normal operation. The LCD displays H. To return back to the normal operation, press the button again. To display the low peak pressure (lowest degree of vacuum), press the button during normal operation. The LCD displays. To return back to the normal operation, press the button again. A RE operation leads to the following results. ) Reset will cause the following during normal operation: Peak high is cleared. Peak low is cleared. Failure prediction counter is cleared. Failure predictive output is reset. 2) Reset will cause the following when an error has occurred: Data set in setting mode will remain stored and will return to the same state as when the power is applied. (All calibration data has retained.) In the case of data error, reset the setup mode and then switch will assume normal operation. (All calibration data has retained.) Note) Reset Function does not work during setup mode. Solution Perform the RE operation, and reset all data again. Turn off the power and replace the load connected with OUT (Black wire). Turn off the power and replace the load connected with OUT2 (White wire). Reset the supply pressure less than.5 MPa. (Reduce the supply pressure to below rated pressure in case of rated voltage.) Apply atmospheric pressure and then reset the switch. Circuit and connection Main circuit Main circuit Main circuit LED Green LED Red Regular connection LED Green LED Red LED Green LED Red Tr Tr D D DC (+) Power supply + terminal Brown Out Analog output to 5 V (±5% F.S) Gray Load impedance: kω Output Load Connection example with a PLC at negative common terminal Tr D Tr2 Tr2 Tr2 D2 D2 D2 How to Use Connector Hook OUT Black OUT2 Output 2 White DC ( ) Supply voltage GND terminal Blue Brown Gray Black White Blue Brown Gray Black White Blue Load 2 to 24 VDC to 24 VDC PLC Input terminal PLC Input terminal COM. Attaching and detaching connectors When assembling the connector to the switch housing, push the connector straight onto the pins until that lever locks into the housing slot. When removing the connector from the switch housing, push the leverdown to unlock it from the slot and then withdraw the connector straight off of the pin. With connector.2 to. mm 2 Max. coating O.D. Socket ø.7 mm Part no. DXT7-7- Connector DC polarity indicator Lever Pin Slot Housing 2. Crimping of lead wires and socket Strip.2 to.7 mm of the lead wire end, insert each stripped wire into a socket and crimp contact it using special crimping tool. Be careful that the outer insulation of the lead wires does not interfere with socket contact part. (Crimping tool: DXT7-75-). Attaching and detaching lead wires with sockets Attaching Push the socket into the square holes of the connector (with +,, 2, indication), and continue to push the sockets all the way in until they lock by hooking into the seats in the connector. (When they are pushed in their hooks open and they are locked automatically.) Then confirm that they are locked by pulling lightly on the lead wires. Detaching To detach a socket from connector, pull out lead wire while pressing the socket's hook with a stick having a thin tip (about. mm). If the socket will be used again, first spread the hook outward SE ISE PSE I SE PS I SE 2 SP ISA2 IS SM PF2 IF Data

113 Series SE/ISE 6 How to Replace Filter Element Replace the filter element when clogging causes deterioration of the adsorption force or slow response time. (Element part number: X-FE) Confirm that the filter gasket is seated in the groove and then reassemble the parts. Filter case Filter element (X-FE) Filter gasket Gasket groove Regarding the filter case Caution. The case is made of polycarbonate. Therefore, do not operate it in an environment that is exposed to chemicals such as thinner, carbon tetrachloride, chloroform, acetic ester, aniline, cyclohexane, trichloroethylene, sulfuric acid, lactic acid, or water-soluble cutting oil (alkalinic). 2. Operate it away from direct sunlight

114 LCD Readout Digital Pressure Switch Series SE/ISE 7 Dimensions/Switch Only Grommet type I T SE- - RE button button 2.5 DOWN button UP button SE ISE PSE I SE Lead wire length Connector type I SE- - C RE button button Lead wire length () 2-ø.5 Mounting hole T () 2-ø.5 Mounting hole.5.5 : R /8 T: NPTF /8 M5 x DOWN button UP button : R /8 T: NPTF /8 M5 x.8 PS I SE 2 SP ISA2 IS SM PF2 IF Data 6-4-7

115 Series SE/ISE 8 Dimensions/Switch Only Grommet type SE-X Vacuum supply port Vacuum pad connection port RE button button DOWN button UP button Pneumatic circuit PV Connector type SE-X - C PV 8.25 Vacuum supply port X: M5 x.8 XY: M6 x. 8 Lead wire length () 7 RE button button.25 Vacuum supply port X: M5 x.8 XY: M6 x. Lead wire length 6 5 () ø. Mounting hole DOWN button UP button ø. Mounting hole Vacuum supply port Vacuum pad connection port X: M5 x.8 XY: M6 x. Pneumatic circuit 5.75 Vacuum pad connection port X: M5 x.8 XY: M6 x. Vacuum pad connection port 6-4-8

116 Air Checker: Electronic Pressure Switch Series PS/PS For Positive Pressure For Vacuum For General Pneumatics Small, lightweight electronic pressure switch Extremely compact (/ size as compared to Series SE2) W x H x L (mm) <Standard type without connection part> 2-wire type Applicable to either NPN or PNP output. Easy mounting Plug-in port for One-touch fittings. Wide calibration range Calibration:. to.45 MPa is possible with one pressure switch. High visibility A large LED indicator for high visibility. SE ISE PSE I SE PS I SE 2 SP ISA2 IS SM PF2 IF Data 6-5-

117 Series PS/ 2 PS Output specifications.4 Pressure.2 (MPa) -. PS ON OFF PS ON OFF How to Order R6 Lead wire length L m Piping specifications R6 Switch Specifications Use the calibration adjustment to set ON pressure. Rotate clockwise to increase pressure setpoint. For setting vacuum, rotate counterclockwise. In the event of setting, use a flat head screwdriver suited for the groove of a trimmer, and rotate it lightly with a finger tip. Setting pressure t Pressure Switch Calibration Trimmer L ø6 reducer Switch turns ON when the pressure is larger than setting pressure. Switch turns ON when the pressure is smaller than setting pressure. High vacuum Rotation angle of the trimmer is 22. There is a stop provided to prevent the trimmer from rotating beyond its limits. Rotation beyond the limit can damage the trimmer. Adjust the trimmer gently within the rotation angle. Switch 2-wire system (For positive pressure) 2-wire system (For vacuum and residual pressure) 22 Internal Circuit/Wiring Brown (Red) Input NPN Source type Input unit Left end adjustment limit Switch Blue (Black) Input + High pressure Pressure setting trimmer Right end adjustment limit Lead wire colors inside ( ) are those prior to conformity to IEC standards. Circuit OUT (+) OUT (+) Brown (Red) Brown (Red) Load + + Main circuit Main circuit of switch 2 to 24 VDC of switch 2 to 24 VDC Load OUT ( ) OUT ( ) Blue (Black) Blue (Black) Example of connection with a PLC (Sequence controller) PNP Sink type Input unit Specifications Model Switch output PS-R6L Present pres. Setting pres.: ON PS-R6L Present pres. Setting pres.: ON Max. operating pressure MPa Regulating pressure range. to.45 MPa. to.4 MPa Fluid Indication light Temperature characteristics Repeatability Hysteresis Load voltage Load current Leakage Int. voltage drop Operating temperature range Insulation resistance Air/Non-corrosive gas ON: When red LED turns on ±% F.S. or less ±% F.S. or less 4% F.S. 2 to 24 VDC (Ripple ±% or less) 5 to 4 ma ma or less 5 V or less to 6 C (With no condensation) Between external terminals and case 2 MΩ (5 VDC by megameter) Withstand voltage Between external terminals and case VAC 5/6 Hz for min. Vibration resistance Impact resistance Weight Port size Enclosure Lead wire Dimensions A Caution to 5 Hz Pulse width.5 mm or acceleration 98 m/s 2 (at the smaller vibration) in X, Y, directions (2 hours) 98 m/s 2 X, Y, directions ( times for each direction) 5 g (Excluding lead wire) ø6 reducer IP4 Grommet oil-proof cabtire cord 2-wires ø2.55,.8 mm 2, m Refer to pages 6-4- to for Safety Instructions and Common Precautions on the products mentioned in this catalog, and refer to pages 6-- to 6-- for Precautions on every series AIRCHECKER + PS-R6L PRESS.. to 45 MPa { to 4.6 kgf/cm 2 } MADE IN JAPAN Calibration trimmer LED display ø6 reducer Lead wire length Applicable One-touch fittings A KQ S H Y L T 6-M5 6 Other Series KQ/KS Series KJ 4.5 Series KJ (-X2) 6 Blue (Black) COM Brown (Red) COM 6-5-2

118 Compact Pressure Switch Series SE/ISE For Vacuum For Positive Pressure For General Pneumatics Can be integrated with M ejector system. Variable hysteresis to % of set pressure (Variable) Easy and simple wiring SE ISE PSE I SE PS I SE 2 SP ISA2 IS SM PF2 IF Data 6-6-

119 Series SE/ISE 2 How to Order Nil L Operating pressure range/ Setting pressure range to MPa to kpa Piping specifications R /8 T NPTF /8 Note) M5 x.8 (female) threaded. Positive pressure Vacuum ISE SE T Output specifications NPN open collector output w/o analog output, turns adjustment NPN open collector output w/o analog output, 2 degrees adjustment NPN open collector 2 output w/o analog output, turns adjustment NPN open collector 2 output w/o analog output, 2 degrees adjustment NPN open collector output w/analog output, turns adjustment NPN open collector output w/analog output, 2 degrees adjustment PNP open collector output w/o analog output, 2 degrees adjustment Piping specifications For mounting on M ejector Single mounting R /8 Single mounting NPTF /8 Note) Single mounting style: M5 x.8 (female) threaded. Wiring specifications Nil Grommet type (Lead wire:.6 m) L Grommet type (Lead wire: m) C Connector type (Lead wire:.6 m) CL Connector type (Lead wire: m) CN Without connector With Connector/How to Order Without lead wire (Connector pc., Socket 4 pcs.) S-2-A With lead wire S-2-5A- Note) When ordering switch with 5 m long lead wire, indicate both part numbers. Ex.) SE--5CN pc. S-2-5 A-5 pc. Lead wire length Nil.6 m m 5 5 m 6-6-2

120 Compact Pressure Switch Series SE/ISE Specifications Operating pressure range/regulating pressure range Proof pressure Fluid Power supply voltage Current consumption Response time Repeatability Enclosure Operating temperature range Operating humidity range Resistance Vibration resistance Impact resistance Temperature characteristics (Based on 25 C) Withstand voltage Insulation resistance Port size Weight Output Specifications Output type Residual voltage Number of outputs Hysteresis Indicator light Trimmer adjustment Analog output Model SE For vacuum to kpa NPN open collector V, 8 ma V or less (With load current of 8 ma) 2 to % of set prss. % F.S. or less to % of set prss. (Variable) (Fixed) (Variable) ON: when output is ON (Red) ISEL For low pressure to kpa ON: when output is ON (OUT: Red, OUT2: Green) ISE For high pressure to MPa.5 MPa 5 kpa Air/Non-corrosive, non-flammable gas 2 to 24 VDC ±%, Ripple (P-P)% or less output: 7 ma or less at 24 VDC, 2 output: 25 ma or less at 24 VDC 5 ms or less ±% F.S. or less IP4 Operating: to 6 C, Stored: to 6 C (With no condensation) Operating/Stored: 5 to 85%RH (With no condensation) to 5 Hz at whichever is smaller of.5 mm amplitude or 98 m/s 2 acceleration, in X, Y, directions for 2 hrs. each (De-energized) 98 m/s 2 in X, Y, directions, times each (De-energized) ±% F.S. or less VAC for min. (Between lead wires and case) 5 MΩ or more (at 5 VDC by megameter) : R 8, M5 x.8 T: NPTF /8, M5 x.8 : M ejector mount type Approx. 4 g (Including.6 m Long lead wire) PNP open collector 8 ma to % of set press. (Adjustable) ON: when output is ON (Red) turns 2 degrees turns 2 degrees turns 2 degrees to 5 V ±5% F.S. None None Output impedance: Approx. kω SE ISE PSE I SE PS I SE 2 SP ISA2 IS SM PF2 IF Data 6-6-

121 Series SE/ISE 4 Calibration Procedure Set the ON-pressure by the pressure setting trimmer. Turning clockwise can set the high pressure/high vacuum pressure. In the event of setting, use a flat head screwdriver suited for the groove of a trimmer, and rotate it lightly with a fingertip. I I SE- -4/-5/-8/-9 Switches with variable hysteresis can be adjusted by means of the HYS potentiometer in the range to % of the setting pressure range. Readjust it when the hysteresis setting trimmer was changed after setting the ON pressure. Pressure setting trimmer Hysteresis setting trimmer High vacuum Indicator light SE(L)- -6/-7 Supply pressure Set point Atmospheric pressure Caution HYS With pressure setting trimmer ( ), OUT (Black lead wire, Red LED) can be set. With pressure setting trimmer 2 ( 2), OUT 2 (White lead wire, Green LED) can be set. Pressure setting trimmer Pressure setting trimmer 2 Indicator light 2 Set the possible min. pressure for adsorption confirmation. If setting the pressure lower than that, switch becomes ON in case that adsorption is not completely done. If setting the pressure higher than that, switch does not become ON even though it may absorb workpieces. Regarding the pressure setting Steady adsorption Unsteady adsorption Non adsorption Observe the following precautions for setting the vacuum pressure: Use your fingertips to gently turn the screwdriver. Do not use a screwdriver with a large grip or with a tip that does not fit into the trimmer groove because this could strip the groove. Hysteresis Hysteresis is the pressure difference between the ON and the OFF pressure of the output signal. The set pressure is the pressure selected to switch from OFF to ON condition. High vaccum Set point Atmospheric pressure Hysteresis How to Use Connector ON OFF. Attaching and detaching connectors When assembling the connector to the switch housing, push the connector straight onto the pins until the lever locks into the housing slot. When removing the connector from the switch housing, push the lever down to unlock it from the slot and then withdraw the connector straight off of the pin. Socket Hook Hook High pressure Hook + 2 Lead wire Socket.2 to. mm2 Max. coating O.D. ø.7 mm Connector DC polarity indicator Lever Lead wire.2 to. mm 2 Socket Max. coating O.D. Connector ø.7 mm DC polarity indicator Lever Pin Slot Housing 2. Crimping of lead wires and sockets Strip.2 to.7 mm at the end of the lead wires, insert the ends of the core wires evenly into the sockets, and then crimp with a crimping tool. When this is done, take care that the coverings of the lead wires do not enter the core wire crimping area. (Crimping tool: model no. DXT7-75-) Core wire crimping area Covering retainer Socket Core wire Lead wire Hook Covering. Attaching and detaching lead wires with sockets Attaching Insert the sockets into the square holes of the connector (with +,, 2, indication), and continue to push the sockets all the way in until they lock by hooking into the seats in the connector. (When they are pushed in their hooks open and they are locked automatically.) Then confirm that they are locked by pulling lightly on the lead wires. Detaching To detach a socket from a connector, pull out the lead wire while pressing the socket s hook with a stick having a thin tip (about mm). If the socket will be used again, first spread the hook outward. Connector Lead wire Internal Circuit and Wiring Example I I I I SE(L)- -4/-5 Main circuit of switch LED Red SE(L)- -6/-7 Main circuit of switch SE(L)- -8/-9 Main circuit of switch SE(L)- -55 Main circuit of switch LED Red LED Green LED Red kω LED Red Black OUT Caution Brown DC (+) Blue DC ( ) Brown DC (+) Black OUT White OUT2 Blue DC ( ) Brown DC (+) Black OUT White OUT2 Blue DC ( ) Brown DC (+) Black OUT Blue DC ( ) Refer to pages 6-4- to for Safety Instructions and Common Precautions on the products mentioned in this catalog, and refer to pages 6-- to 6-- for Precautions on every series

122 Compact Pressure Switch Series SE/ISE 5 Dimensions Grommet type: SE--4/-5/-8/-9 Indicator light (Red) Connector type: SE--4C/-5C/-8C/-9C Indicator light (Red) 2 Grommet type: SE- -4/-5/-8/-9 I I T Pressure setting trimmer 5 SE--6/-7 Pressure setting trimmer ø.5 Mounting hole 5 Hysteresis setting trimmer Indicator light (Red, Green) Pressure setting trimmer L L H 2 H L L 2 HYS 2 H H H HYS HL L L HL H 27 2-M2.5 x 24L Mounting threads 4 6 () Pressure setting trimmer Pressure setting trimmer () O-ring Hysteresis setting trimmer Indicator light (Red) Pressure setting trimmer 2 Indicator light (Red, Green) Piping port M5 x.8 depth 5 2 Pressure supply port ø2 : R /8 T: NPTF /8 Connector type: SE- -4C/-5C/-8C/-9C I Hysteresis setting trimmer Indicator light (Red, Green) M2.5 x 24L Mounting threads 5 T I Pressure setting trimmer SE--6C/-7C 5.5 H 2 2 HYS HL 2 L HL H () Pressure setting trimmer Pressure setting trimmer 2 Pressure setting trimmer Pressure setting trimmer 2-ø.5 Mounting hole L L H H L L HYS 2 H H 6 () O-ring Hysteresis setting trimmer Indicator light (Red) Pressure setting trimmer 2 Piping port M5 x.8 depth 5 2 Indicator light (Red, Green) Pressure supply port ø2 : R /8 T: NPTF /8 SE ISE PSE I SE PS I SE 2 SP ISA2 IS SM PF2 IF Data 6-6-5

123 Compact Pressure Switch Series SE2/ISE2 For Vacuum For Positive Pressure For General Pneumatics Can be integrated with X or R ejector system. Easy and simple wiring Connector type SE ISE PSE I SE PS I SE 2 SP ISA2 IS SM PF2 IF Data 6-6-7

124 Series SE2/ISE2 2 How to Order Nil L Operating pressure range/ Setting pressure range to MPa to kpa Piping specifications Single mounting R /8, M5 x.8 T Single mounting NPTF /8, M5 x.8 Note) M5 x.8 (female) thread. Positive pressure Vacuum ISE2 SE2 Caution T X XY R Piping specifications Single mounting R /8 Single mounting NPTF /8 W/suction filter (Mounting on X unit) M5 x.8 W/suction filter (Mounting on X unit) M6 x (Option) Base mounting (Mounting on R unit) Note) Single mounting type: M5 x.8 (female) threaded. Refer to pages 6-4- to for Safety Instructions and Common Precautions on the products mentioned in this catalog, and refer to pages 6-- to 6-- for Precautions on every series. 5 Output specifications NPN open collector V, 8 ma 55 PNP open collector 8 ma Wiring specifications Nil Grommet type (Lead wire:.6 m) L Grommet type (Lead wire: m) C Connector type (Lead wire:.6 m) CL Connector type (Lead wire: m) CN Without connector With Connector/How to Order Without lead wire (Connector pc., Socket pcs.) S--A With lead wire S--5A- Note) When ordering switch with 5 m long lead wire, indicate both part numbers. Ex.) SE2--5CN pc. S--5 A-5 pc. Lead wire length Nil 5.6 m m 5 m 6-6-8

125 Compact Pressure Switch Series SE2/ISE2 SE2/ISE2 Specifications Operating pressure range/ Regulating pressure range Proof pressure Fluid Power supply voltage Current consumption Response time Repeatability Enclosure Operating temperature range Operating humidity range Resistance Vibration resistance Impact resistance Temperature characteristics (Based on 25 C) Withstand voltage Insulation resistance Port size Weight Output Specifications Model Output type Residual voltage Hysteresis Number of outputs Indicator light SE2 For vacuum to kpa ISE2L For low pressure to kpa ISE2 For high pressure to MPa 5 kpa.5 MPa Air/Non-corrosive, non-flammable gas 2 to 24 VDC ±%, Ripple (P-P) % or less 7 ma or less at 24 VDC 5 ms or less ±% F.S. or less IP4 Operating: to 6 C, Stored: to 6 C (With no condensation, nor freezing) Operating/Stored: 5 to 85%RH (With no condensation) to 5 Hz at whichever is smaller of.5 mm amplitude or 98 m/s 2 acceleration, in X, Y, directions for 2 hrs. each (De-energized) 98 m/s 2 in X, Y, directions, times each (De-energized) ±% F.S. or less VAC for min. (Between lead wires and case) 5 MΩ or more (at 5 VDC by megameter) : R /8, M5 x.8 T: NPTF /8, M5 x.8 X: With suction filter (For mounting on X unit) R: Base mount type (For mounting on R unit) 5 g (Including.6 m Long lead wire) NPN open collector V, 8 ma PNP open collector 8 ma V or less (With load current of 8 ma) % F.S. or less (Fixed) ON: when output is ON (Red) SE ISE PSE I SE PS I SE 2 SP ISA2 IS SM PF2 IF Data 6-6-9

126 Series SE2/ISE2 4 Calibration Procedure Set the ON-pressure by the pressure setting trimmer. Turning clockwise can set the high pressure/high vacuum pressure. Pressure setting trimmer Indicator light How to Use Connector. Attaching and detaching connectors When assembling the connector to the switch housing, push the connector straight onto the pins until the lever locks into the housing slot. When removing the connector from the switch housing, push the lever down to unlock it from the slot and then withdraw the connector straight off of the pin. Lead wire.2 to. mm 2 Max. coating O.D. ø.7 mm Socket Internal Circuit and Wiring Example -5 NPN open collector Main circuit LED Red DC ( + ) Brown OUT Black Electric circuit diagram -55 PNP open collector + Load 2 to 24 VDC Max. V, 8 ma DC ( ) Blue DC ( + ) Brown Set the possible min. pressure for adsorption confirmation. If setting the pressure lower than that, switch becomes ON in case that adsorption is not completely done. If setting the pressure higher than that, switch does not become ON even though it may absorb workpieces. High vacuum Supply pressure Set point Atmospheric pressure Caution Hysteresis High vacuum Set point Atmospheric pressure High pressure Steady adsorption Unsteady adsorption Non adsorption Regarding the pressure setting Observe the following precautions for setting the vacuum pressure: Use your fingertips to gently turn the screwdriver. Do not use a screwdriver with a large grip or with a tip that does not fit into the trimmer groove because this could strip the groove. Hysteresis is the pressure difference between the ON and the OFF pressure of the output signal. The set pressure is the pressure selected to switch from OFF to ON condition. Hysteresis ON OFF Core wire crimping area Socket Socket Hook Hook + O Hook Hook Connector DC polarity indicator Lever Lead wire Socket Connector.2 to. mm 2 Max. coating O.D. ø.7 mm DC polarity indicator Lever Pin Slot Housing 2. Crimping of lead wires and sockets Strip.2 to.7 mm at the end of the lead wires, insert the ends of core wires evenly into the sockets, and then crimp with a crimping tool. When this is done, take care that the coverings of the lead wires do not enter the core wire crimping area. (Crimping tool: model no. DXT7-75-) Covering retainer Core wire Lead wire Covering.Attaching and detaching lead wires with sockets Attaching Insert the sockets into the square holes of the connector (with +,, indication), and continue to push the sockets all the way in until they lock by hooking into the seats in the connector. (When they are pushed in their hooks open and they are locked automatically.) Then confirm that they are locked by pulling lightly on the lead wires. Detaching To detach a socket from a connector, pull out the lead wire while pressing the socket s hook with a stick having a thin tip (about mm). If the socket will be used again, first spread the hook outward. Connector Lead wire Main circuit Connection example with a PLC at common terminal Switch Main circuit of switch LED Red Filter case Caution Caution OUT Black DC ( ) Blue DC ( + ) Brown OUT Black DC ( ) Blue Load Max. 8 ma Electric circuit diagram + 2 to 24 VDC + 2 to 24 VDC PLC Input terminal COM. Do not use with thinner, carbon tetrachloride, chloroform, acetate, aniline, cyclohexane, trichloroethylene, sulfuric acid, lactic acid and watermiscible cutting fluid (alkaline). 2. Operate it away from direct sunlight. Refer to pages 6-4- to for Safety Instructions and Common Precautions on the products mentioned in this catalog, and refer to pages 6-- to 6-- for Precautions on every series. 6-6-

127 L H Compact Pressure Switch Series SE2/ISE2 5 Dimensions/With Suction Filter: SE2-X Grommet type: SE2-X -5 Indicator light (Red) Pressure setting trimmer Vacuum supply port Pneumatic circuit Vacuum pad connection port SE ISE PSE I SE 6 () PS Connector type: SE2-X -5C PV 8 Vacuum supply port M5 x.8 PV O Pressure setting trimmer 8 6 () 59 Vacuum supply port M5 x ø. Mounting hole L H ø. Mounting hole Indicator light (Red) Vacuum pad connection port M5 x.8 Vacuum supply port.2 Pneumatic circuit 5.5 Vacuum pad connection port M5 x.8 V V Vacuum pad connection port I SE 2 SP ISA2 IS SM PF2 IF Data 6-6-

128 Series SE2/ISE2 6 Dimensions/Standard Type: SE2- T Grommet type: SE2- T-5 Pressure setting trimmer Connector type: SE2- T-5C Pressure setting trimmer L H L H Indicator light (Red) 2 Indicator light (Red).5 6 () 6 () 2-ø.5 Mounting hole Dimensions/Base Mount Type: SE2-R Grommet type: SE2-R-5 Pressure setting trimmer 6 () Gasket Piping port M5 x.8 depth 5 L H : R /8 T: NPTF /8 Indicator light (Red) 2-M2.5 x 4L Mounting thread Vacuum supply port ø..5 2-ø.5 Mounting hole Piping port M5 x.8 depth 5 Connector type: SE2-R-5C Pressure setting trimmer 6 () Gasket L H : R /8 T: NPTF /8 Indicator light (Red) 2-M2.5 x 4L Mounting thread Vacuum supply port ø

129 Compact Pressure Switch Series SE2/ISE2 7 Dimensions: ISE2 - T Grommet type: ISE2- T-5 T Connector type: ISE2- -5C Pressure setting trimmer Pressure setting trimmer L H L H 2 5 Indicator light (Red) 2 5 Indicator light (Red) SE ISE PSE I SE 6 () 6 () PS.5 2-ø.5 Mounting hole Piping port M5 x.8 depth 5 : R /8 T: NPTF /8.5 2-ø.5 Mounting hole Piping port M5 x.8 depth 5 : R /8 T: NPTF /8 I SE 2 SP ISA2 IS SM PF2 IF Data 6-6-

130 Adsorption Confirmation Switch Series SP For General Pneumatics Can be integrated with X ejector system. Best suited for small diameter nozzles ø. to ø.2 Adsorption confirmation switch Adsorption nozzle ø. to ø.2 Several mm 2 chip part Suction filter comes as standard SE ISE PSE I SE PS I SE 2 SP ISA2 IS SM PF2 IF Data 6-7-

131 Series SP 2 Vacuum SP How to Order 5 Available nozzle diameter S ø. to ø.7 B ø.5 to ø.2 Note) When ordering switch with 5 m long lead wire, Indicate both part numbers. Ex.) SP- X-5CN pc. S--5 A-5 pc. Specifications Connection X Model Fluid Operating pressure range Applicable adsorption nozzle dia. Hysteresis Internal orifice Supply voltage Output type Indicator light Current consumption Operating temperature range Port size Grommet type Lead wire Connector type With suction filter M5 x.8 (For mounting on X ejector) With Connector/How to Order Without lead wire (Connector pc. Socket pcs.) With lead wire XY With suction filter M6 x (For mounting on X ejector) Output specifications 5 NPN open collector V, 8 ma SP-S S--A S--5A- Lead wire length Nil.6 m m 5 5 m Wiring specifications Nil L C CL CN Air 2 to kpa ø. to ø.7 (Refer to Graph () on page 6-7-.) ø.5 to ø.2 (Refer to Graph (2) on page 6-7-.) ø.5.5 kpa Grommet type (Lead wire:.6 m) Grommet type (Lead wire: m) Connector type (Lead wire:.6 m) Connector type (Lead wire: m) Without connector Precautions Be sure to read before handling. Refer to pages 6-4- to for Safety Instructions and Common Precautions on the products mentioned in this catalog, and refer to pages 6-- to 6-- for Precautions on every series. Caution If a positive pressure is applied to the switch, such as a vacuum break, the output will turn ON (illuminating the indicator light). Make sure that the output will not negatively affect the equipment. SP-B ø.8 2 to 24 VDC (Ripple ±% or less) NPN open collector V, 8 ma ON: When output is ON. 7 ma or less at 24 VDC to 6 C (With no condensation) M5 x.8 Grommet oil-resistant vinyl heavy-duty code -wire, ø.4,.2 mm 2 Heat-resistant vinyl electrical wire ø.55,. mm

132 Adsorption Confirmation Switch Series SP Applicable Adsorption Nozzle Range Relation between supply pressure and adsorption nozzle diameter is shown in the below graph. How to Set Adsorption Confirmation Adjustment Needle Graph () SP-S Supply pressure (kpa) Pneumatic Circuit and Principle Vacuum source How to Use Connector kpa = 7.5 mmhg Graph (2) SP-B kpa = 7.5 mmhg S S2 P Pressure sensor S P2. Attaching and detaching connectors When assembling the connector to the switch housing, push the connector straight onto the pins until the lever locks into the housing slot. When removing the connector from the switch housing, push the lever down to unlock it from the slot and then withdraw the connector straight off of the pin. Lead wire.2 to. mm 2 Max. coating O.D. ø.7 m Socket Hook Connector DC polarity indicator Lever Pin Slot Housing S4 Adsorption (ø. to ø.2) Internal Circuit and Wiring Example Main circuit of switch 5 2 Applicable adsorption nozzle range Adsorption nozzle diameter (mm) Adsorption nozzle diameter (mm) 5 2 Lead wire colors inside ( ) are those prior to conformity to IEC standards. Supply pressure (kpa) 2. Crimping of lead wires and sockets Strip.2 to.7 mm at the end of hte lead wires, insert the ends of the core wires evenly into the sockets, and then crimp with a crimping tool. When this is done, take care that the coverings of the lead wires do not enter the core wire crimping area. (Crimping tool: model no. DXT7-75-) Core wire crimping area Covering retainer Socket Core wire Lead wire Hook Applicable adsorption nozzle range The air pressure forms a bridge circuit inside the unit with a vacuum applied to the circuit, but with the adsorption nozzle S4 open, adjust needle S2 so that (P P2). When parts are absorbed by nozzle S4, the resulting (P2 P) differential will be detected by the pressure sensor. Brown (Red) DC(+) Supply voltage + terminal Black (White) OUT NPN open collector MAX. V, 8 ma Blue (Black) DC( ) Supply voltage GND terminal Covering. Attaching and detaching lead wires with sockets Attaching Insert the sockets into the square holes of the connector (with +,, indication), and continue to push the sockets all the way in until they lock by hooking into the seats in the connector. (When they are pushed in their hooks open and they are locked automatically.) Then confirm that they are locked by pulling lightly on the lead wires. Detaching To detach a socket from a connector, pull out the lead wire while pressing the socket's hook with a stick having a thin tip (about mm). If the socket will be used again, first spread the hook outward. Socket Connector. Supply the vacuum and electrical power source to the unit. Rotate an adjustment needle clockwise until it stops. 2. With the adsorption nozzle away from a workpiece (open), turn the adjustment needle counterclockwise until the indicator light turns on.. From the above 2. position, turn the adjustment needle /4 to turn clockwise Right Adjustment needle closed Right Left 4. Re-adjust the needle so the indicator light turns ON only when the work adsorption is steady. Adjustment needle Hysteresis High vacuum Set point Atmospheric pressure High pressure Indicator light ON /4 to turn Indicator light Hysteresis Indicator light OFF Hysteresis is the pressure difference between the ON pressure and the OFF pressure of the output signal. The set pressure is the pressure selected to switch from OFF to ON condition. How ro Replace Filter Element ON OFF If the filter element becomes clogged, leading to a reduced adsorption force or delayed response time, stop the operation and re-place the element. (Element part number X-FE) Verify that the filter gasket is placed properly in the gasket groove before installing an element. Filter case Filter element (X-FE) Filter gasket Gasket groove SE ISE PSE I SE PS I SE 2 SP ISA2 IS SM PF2 IF Data Hook Lead wire 6-7-

133 Series SP 4 Dimensions Grommet type: SP- X - Adjusting needle ADJ 2 Vacuum supply port Pressure sensor 8 Adsorption nozzle port Vacuum supply port X: M5 x.8 XY: M6 x PV Connector type: SP- X - C Vacuum supply port X: M5 x.8 XY: M6 x PV 8 8 Lead wire length 6 () 5 7 ADJ 2-ø. Mounting hole Adjusting needle ø. Mounting hole Vacuum supply port Lead wire length 6 () Adsorption nozzle port X: M5 x.8 XY: M6 x Adsorption nozzle port X: M5 x.8 XY: M6 x.2 Pressure sensor 5.5 Adsorption nozzle port 6-7-4

134 Air Catch Sensor Series ISA2 Detection distance. to.5 mm Repetition accuracy. mm or less SE ISE PSE I SE PS Model ISA2-G ISA2-H Detection distance. to.25 mm. to.5 mm Detection accuracy. mm or less Note) Detection distance:. to.5 mm (ISA2-G),. to.5 mm (ISA2-H) Supply pressure: At supply pressure to 2 kpa 2 Port Solenoid Valve with Manual Lock is newly added. To check the workpiece position on the reference plane Note) Position check of metal mold I SE 2 SP ISA2 IS SM PF2 IF Data 6-8-

135 Stable detection of. to.5 mm clearance Due to the pneumatic bridge circuit and semiconductor pressure sensor, the non-contact type sensor is hardly affected by fluctuations in the supply pressure. 2 Plug connectors (Centralized wiring) Requires less man hours to wire. Easy to add and remove manifold stations. Terminal box Modular construction Requires less man hours to wire. With regulator + 2 port solenoid valve With 2 port solenoid valve

136 Air catch sensor Series ISA2 Optimum position is known at a glance. LED level meter Extraneous material Above set position NG W Easy-to-operate large dial SE ISE PSE I SE PS Set position W W OK Below set position OK Minimum operating pressure kpa (ISA2-G) Energy consumption can be reduced compared with the conventional models (Conventional models: 5 kpa) Position of supply port: Either right side or left side is available. 2 wiring methods Individual wiring Centralized wiring Scale provides guidelines for set position. Variations Model Operating pressure range Detection distance ISA2-G to 2 kpa. to.25 mm ISA2-H 5 to 2 kpa. to.5 mm Output type Electrical entry Mounting Number of manifold stations Port size Enclosure NPN open connector, PNP open collector Lead wire with connector (Individual wiring) Terminal box (Centralized wiring) DIN rail, Bracket to 6 stations Rc, NPT, G /8 IP66 (IP65 for solenoid valve. Regulator and pressure gauge are open type.) I SE 2 SP ISA2 IS SM PF2 IF Data 6-8-

137 4 Air Catch Sensor Series ISA2 Manifold Without control unit With control unit C V SR SL PR PL IISA2 IISA2 N Control unit With regulator + 2 port solenoid valve With 2 port solenoid valve Electrical entry and supply port position Centralized wiring with supply port on the right Centralized wiring with supply port on the left Individual wiring with supply port on the right Individual wiring with supply port on the left Nil B D How to Order PL station 2 stations stations 4 stations 5 stations 6 stations B C SL B Note) The supply port position is the one when the switch is viewed from the front. Stations Option Without bracket With bracket With mounting bracket for DIN rail Note) DIN rail must be ordered separately. (Refer to the page ) Voltage of 2 port solenoid valve VAC 2 2 VAC VAC 4 22 VAC 5 24 VDC 6 2 VDC 6 2 VAC D Nil C W M E2 Pressure gauge of regulator Note ) Without pressure gauge Note 2) A E2 MPa single notation.2 Square embedded 2 pressure gauge PSI single notation MPa E4 MPa single notation.4 4 PSI single notation MPa G2 MPa single notation.2 Round pressure gauge P2 MPa-PSI double notation MPa G4 MPa single notation.4 P4 MPa-PSI double notation MPa Note ) Due to new Japanese weight and measurement legislation, PSI notation type cannot be sold or used in Japan. Note 2) The pressure gauge port is Rc /8. Manufactured upon receipt of order. Throttle/Manual lock of 2 port solenoid valve Without throttle, without manual lock With throttle, without manual lock Without throttle, with manual lock With throttle, with manual lock Manual lock Throttle Electrical entry of 2 port solenoid valve D : DIN connector D: DIN connector T : Conduit terminal DL: DIN connector (Without connector) TL: Conduit terminal (With indicator light) (With indicator light) 6-8-4

138 Air Catch Sensor How to Order For single and double notation type and additional stations Air catch sensor ISA2 G E2 Series ISA2 5 Ordering Example Without control unit Centralized wiring Terminal box Stations With control unit 2 port solenoid valve Regulator.5..5 MPa.2 6 Centralized wiring air catch sensor ISA2-HE4P PULL. Centralized wiring air catch sensor ISA2-GE4P IISA2NSR-B set ( station manifold part number) ISA2-GE4P set (Air catch sensor part number) Prefix the part number of the air catch sensor with an asterisk ( ). Centralized wiring/supply port left Supply port IN Left Detection distance G. to.25 mm Piping specifications H. to.5 mm Nil Rc /8 N NPT /8 F G /8 Made to order Pressure gauge Note ) A Without pressure gauge Note 2) E2 MPa single notation.2 Square embedded pressure gauge 2 PSI single notation MPa E4 MPa single notation.4 4 PSI single notation MPa G2 MPa single notation.2 Round pressure gauge P2 MPa-PSI double notation MPa G4 MPa single notation.4 P4 MPa-PSI double notation MPa Note ) Due to new Japanese weight and measurement legislation, PSI notation type cannot be sold or used in Japan. Note 2) The pressure gauge port is Rc /8. Manufactured upon receipt of order. 6 PULL..2. MPa.4 9 Supply port IN.2. MPa.4 9 Right Bracket 6 PULL..2. MPa PULL..2. MPa.4 9 Individual wiring Terminal box Bracket IISA2CSL-B5DLCE2 set ( stations manifold part number) ISA2-HE4P sets (Air catch sensor part number) Prefix the part number of the air catch sensor with an asterisk ( ). 6 PULL..2. MPa.4 Individual wiring air catch sensor ISA2-GE4 9 Output specifications 5 Individual wiring air catch sensor ISA2-GE4N DIN rail mounting bracket 6 PULL..2 NPN output PNP output IISA2NPL-D set ( station manifold part number) ISA2-GE4N set (Air catch sensor part number) Prefix the part number of the air catch sensor with an asterisk ( ).. MPa PULL..2. MPa.4 9 Electrical entry Centralized wiring/supply port right Terminal box Individual wiring/supply port right 6 PULL..2. MPa.4 9 Bracket Prefix the part number of the air catch sensor with an asterisk ( ). 6 Centralized wiring air catch sensor ISA2-HE4P Stations Stations 2 Stations 2 Stations 2 IN Left Individual wiring Centralized wiring Nil PUL L..2. MPa PUL L..2. MPa.4 2 port solenoid valve IISA2VPR-B5DLC set ( stations manifold part number) ISA2-GE4 sets (Air catch sensor part number) L N P Straight Right angle Without lead wire Terminal block box Manufactured upon receipt of order. 9 6 PUL L..2. MPa.4 9 Supply port DIN rail mounting bracket IISA2NSR-D set ( stations manifold part number) ISA2-HE4P sets (Air catch sensor part number) Prefix the part number of the air catch sensor with an asterisk ( ). Supply port IN Right IN Right SE ISE PSE I SE PS I SE 2 SP ISA2 IS SM PF2 IF Data 6-8-5

139 Series ISA2 6 Specifications Model Detection distance Fluid Operating pressure range Recommended detection nozzle Consumption flow rate l/min (ANR) Supply pressure Power supply voltage Current consumption Switch Output Hysteresis Note ) Indicator light Environmental Resistance Working Principle S S2 5 kpa kpa 2 kpa Maximum load current Maximum load voltage Residual voltage Output protection Repeatability (Including temperature characteristics) Enclosure Operating temperature range Operating humidity range Withstand voltage Insulation voltage Vibration resistance Impact resistance Port size Lead wire (Individual wiring type) Terminal block box (Centralized wiring type) P Sensor P2 S S, S2: Fix orifice S: Variable orifice (adjusted by setting dial) S4: Detection nozzle ISA2-G ISA2-G 5 ISA2-H ISA2-H 5. to.25 mm. to.5 mm Dry air (filtered to 5 µm) to 2 kpa ø.5 5 or less 8 or less 2 or less NPN open collector: one output. mm or less (Detection distance range. to.5 mm, supply pressure to 2 kpa). mm or less (Detection distance range. to.5 mm). mm or less (Detection distance range. to.5 mm) S4 PNP open collector: one output 5 to 2 kpa ø2. or less 5 or less 22 or less 2 to 24 VDC, Ripple (p-p) % or less (With power polarity protection) 5 ma or less NPN open collector: one output 8 ma VDC (at NPN output).5 V or less (at 8 ma) Yes PNP open collector: one output. mm or less (Detection distance range. to.5 mm, supply pressure to 2 kpa) LED level meter Note 2) with red, 2 green (Set value < detection distance: red, Set value = detection distance: green, Set value > detection distance: green + green 2) IP66 Operating: to 6 C, Stored: 2 to 7 C (No condensation or no freezing) Operating/stored: 5 to 85%RH (No condensation) VAC in 5/6 Hz for minute between external terminal and case 2 MΩ or more between external terminal and case (measured with 5 VDC megaohm meter).5 mm amplitude in to 5Hz or acceleration of 98 m/s 2 without control unit and bracket mounted, Others m/s 2, whichever is smaller for 2 hours in X, Y, direction each (De-energized) Without control unit and bracket mounted: 98 m/s 2, Others: 5 m/s 2 in X, Y and direction, times each (De-energized) Nil: Rc /8, N type: NPT /8, F type: G /8 4-core, oil resistant, cable (.64 mm 2 ) with M2, 4-pin pre-wired connector Front wiring (Electrical entry ø2) Individual wiring type (body only): 25 g, common wiring type (body only): 25 g, Weight Terminal box: 25 g, lead wire: 278 g, connecting bracket with sealing for additional station: 4 g Note ) Refer to Relation between Nozzle Diameter and Detection Distance (page 6-8-8) for hysteresis. Note 2) Refer to Setting Procedure (page 6-8-) for LED level meter. In a bridge circuit as in the left figure, a detection gap is applied to the detection nozzle (S4) while the setting dial S is adjusted to balance the pressure applied to the pressure sensor (P = P2). The pressure sensor detects the differential pressure generated when the detection nozzle (S4) is released. When the work piece comes close to the detection nozzle, the back pressure P2 increases until it is larger than P (P2 > P). Then the switch output turns on to notify that the pressure is below the detection gap

140 Air Catch Sensor Series ISA2 7 Internal Circuit and Wiring NPN open collector output Main circuit of switch DC (+) OUT Load DC ( ) MAX 8 ma 2 to 24 VDC Circuit and Wiring for 2 Port Solenoid Valve Without indicator light DC circuit SOL NR DC (+) 2 to 24 VDC Without display light AC Circuit Rectifying device SOL NR ( ) to 2 VAC PNP open collector output Main circuit of switch DC (+) OUT DC ( ) MAX 8 ma Load 2 to 24 VDC 2 DC ( ) Conduit terminal With indicator light DC circuit DC (+) NR SOL 2 to 24 VDC LED 2 DC ( ) Conduit terminal DIN type connector With indicator light AC Circuit Rectifying device SOL NR indicator light 2 ( ) ( ) 2 ( ) to 2 VAC SE ISE PSE I SE PS Wiring Individual wiring : Blue 2: NC : Brown 4: Black. Insert the connector of the lead wire with its key groove at the proper position. 2. Hold the knurl with 2 fingers and rotate it clockwise until finger tight. Lead wire with connector Knurl. Connect the colored wires coming from the cable terminal. Refer to the circuit diagram and table above to avoid mistakes. 2 4 Brown Blue Black DC (+) NC DC ( ) OUT DIN type connector With indicator light DC circuit SOL NR LED DC (+) 2 DC ( ) to 24 VDC Centralized wiring Refer to catalog and instruction manual of Series VCA for wiring. Pay attention to the power supply voltage. Use of incorrect power supply will cause damage to equipment. Terminal block Seal conduit entry (ø2) OUT DC ( ) OUT 2 DC (+) OUT NC OUT 4 OUT 6 OUT 5. Mount the seal conduit on the terminal box. For mounting procedure, refer to the catalog and instruction manual provided by the manufacturer of the seal conduit. 2. Thread the cable through the seal conduit and arrange wiring according to the polarity of the terminal block illustrated above.. Fasten the seal conduit with a tightening torque not greater than 5 N m. Do not hold the terminal box or the switch. I SE 2 SP ISA2 IS SM PF2 IF Data 6-8-7

141 Series ISA2 8 Relation between Nozzle Diameter and Detection Distance The data in the following charts are characteristics of hysteresis at the detection distance. In case accuracy is required by the settings, the design should be made so that the hysteresis will stay within the optimum adjustment range not larger than. mm. The smaller the hysteresis, the better the sensitivity. In cases where the hysteresis exceeds. mm, the air catch sensor should be used to check the presence of the work piece. ISA2-G Detection nozzle: ø. Detection side piping: ø6 x ø4 tubing 5 m. Supply pressure.9 kpa kpa.4. 2kPa.2. Optimum adjustment range Detection distance (mm) Hysteresis (mm) Detection nozzle: ø.5 Detection side piping: ø6 x ø4 tubing 5 m. Supply pressure.9 kpa.8 Hysteresis (mm) Optimum adjustment range Detection distance (mm) Detection nozzle: ø2. Detection side piping: ø6 x ø4 tubing 5 m. Supply pressure.9 kpa kpa.4. 2 kpa.2. Optimum adjustment range Detection distance (mm) Hysteresis (mm) kpa 2 kpa ISA2-H Detection nozzle: ø. Detection side piping: ø6 x ø4 tubing 5 m. Supply pressure.9 5 kpa.8 Hysteresis (mm) Optimum adjustment range Detection distance (mm) Detection nozzle: ø.5 Detection side piping: ø6 x ø4 tubing 5 m. Supply pressure.9 5 kpa.8 kpa.7 Hysteresis (mm) Optimum adjustment range Detection distance (mm) Detection nozzle: ø2. Detection side piping: ø6 x ø4 tubing 5 m. Supply pressure.9 5 kpa.8 kpa.7 Hysteresis (mm) Optimum adjustment range Detection distance (mm) kpa 2 kpa 2 kpa 2 kpa 6-8-8

142 Air Catch Sensor Series ISA2 9 Response Time Response time changes with detection distance and piping length. It is hardly influenced by the supply pressure and nozzle diameter (ø. to ø2.). While all graphs assume a fixed set distance with changes in the detection distance, the upper charts show responses at various set values and the lower charts show responses at various piping lengths. If the set distance is equal to the set value, the response becomes quicker as the set value becomes smaller or the piping length becomes shorter. ISA2-G Detection nozzle: ø.5 Supply pressure: kpa Detection side piping: ø6 x ø4 tubing 5 m 2.5 Set value Response time (sec) Detection distance (mm) Detection nozzle: ø.5 Detection side piping: ø6 x ø4 Response time (sec). mm Detection distance Response time characteristics Supply pressure: kpa Set distance:.5 mm m Detection distance (mm) Piping tubing length Response time Nozzle Shape.5 mm.5 mm Piping tubing length.25 mm m 8 m 5 m m Please keep the nozzle shape as illustrated below. Take every caution against chamfer on the detection surface and/or nozzle hole, which could affect the characteristics as illustrated in Figure (). ø 2 or more ø.5 2 or more ISA2-H Detection nozzle: ø2. Supply pressure: kpa Detection side piping: ø6 x ø4 tubing 5 m 2 Response time (sec) Detection distance (mm) Detection distance Response time characteristics Detection nozzle: ø2. Detection side piping: ø6 x ø4 Response time (sec).5 Set value. mm.5 mm.5 mm Supply pressure: kpa Set distance:. mm Detection distance (mm). mm.5 mm Piping tubing length m Piping tubing length Response time ø2 2 or more Figure () Detection surface m 8 m 5 m m Chamfer is not allowed. SE ISE PSE I SE PS I SE 2 SP ISA2 IS SM PF2 IF Data ø or more ø or more ø or more 6-8-9

143 Series ISA2 Supply Pressure Dependence The charts illustrate changes in the detection distance with fluctuations in the supply pressure. ISA2-G Detection nozzle: ø. Detection side piping: ø6 x ø4 tubing 5 m Detection distance (mm) Detection nozzle: ø.5 Detection side piping: ø6 x ø4 tubing 5 m Detection distance (mm) Detection nozzle: ø2. Detection side piping: ø6 x ø4 tubing 5 m Detection distance (mm) mm Supply pressure (kpa) mm Supply pressure (kpa) mm.5 mm.25 mm.5 mm.25 mm.5 mm. mm Supply pressure (kpa) ISA2-H Detection nozzle: ø. Detection side piping: ø6 x ø4 tubing 5 m Detection distance (mm) Supply pressure (kpa) Detection nozzle: ø.5 Detection side piping: ø6 x ø4 tubing 5 m Detection distance (mm) Supply pressure (kpa) Detection nozzle: ø2. Detection side piping: ø6 x ø4 tubing 5 m Detection distance (mm) mm.5 mm. mm.5 mm.5 mm. mm.5 mm.5 mm.. mm Supply pressure (kpa) 6-8-

144 Air Catch Sensor Series ISA2 Setting Procedure The detection distance is set with the LED level meter and setting dial. Keep the setting dial pulled out while in use. If released, it will return to its original position and become unable to rotate.. For accuracy in setting, apply a clearance gauge to the detection nozzle to replicate the set condition in advance. 2. Confirm that the set pressure is applied. If the setting dial is fully open, the LED level meter appears as.. Pull the setting dial and rotate it in the positive direction. The lights will turn on in the order shown below. Before pulling out Pull out Red Green Rotate in the positive direction. SE ISE PSE I SE PS IN Pulled out Handling and setting of 2 port solenoid valve Throttle setting for blowing to prevent water and cutting oil from entering the nozzle. (Clockwise: Close throttle; Counterclockwise: Open throttle) The setting is not applicable to valves without throttle.. Power off the valve. 2. Rotate the throttle clockwise for adjustment so that the detection nozzle will not suck up water or cutting oil. Throttle Rotate clockwise Solenoid. Power on the valve, then off again. Confirm that the detection nozzle does not suck up water or cutting oil. Note) Do not rotate the throttle more than 4 turns or it will fall out. Green 2 4. The sensor output comes on when the lights on the LED level meter turn on as. Complete the setting when this condition is observed. 5. Apply the clearance gauge again to confirm that the lights turn on as. Handling and setting of limit gauge indicator. Removal of cover Hook the finger on the front cover ridge and rotate it in the direction of the OPEN arrow until it stops (5 ). Then pull out and remove the cover. OPEN arrow 2. Setting the installation needle The installation needle should be moved by the fingertip. Set the 2 green installation needles at the maximum and minimum limits of pressure. Example Maximum.24 MPa Minimum.6 MPa. Installation of cover After setting the installation needles, locate the OPEN arrow at the top right position and insert the claws on the cover into the grooves on the case (indicated by in the expanded view of A part). Rotate the cover clockwise until it stops. Confirm that the cover is firmly secured. Expanded view of A part A Finger I SE 2 SP ISA2 IS SM PF2 IF Data 6-8-

145 Series ISA2 2 Relation between Dial Scale and Detection Distance Test procedure and conditions Dial scales when the detection nozzle is under the following conditions; Supplied pressure: kpa Piping: ø6 x ø4 tubing, 5 m in length. Results of measurement Note ) Relation between the detection distance and set dial scales Note 2) (Scale numbers) ISA2-G ISA2-H Detection distance.5 mm. mm.5 mm.2 mm.25 mm Detection nozzle diameter ø. ø.5 ø2.. to.7. to.5.9 to to.. to.5.9 to.4 2. to to to to 7.. to.7 2. to to to to.7 Average variation per scale (Detection distance [mm]) ISA2-G Detection distance.5 mm. mm.5 mm.2 mm.25 mm Detection nozzle diameter ø. ø.5 ø Note ) This data provides reference values as a guide only, this should not be viewed as a guarantee of our products performance. Note 2) Set dial scales are as follows;.2 Scale 6 A scale 9 Detection distance. mm.2 mm. mm.4 mm.5 mm ISA2-H Detection distance. mm.2 mm. mm.4 mm.5 mm Detection nozzle diameter ø. ø.5 ø2.. to to 2.9. to.5. to.8.5 to to to to to to to to to to to.7 Detection nozzle diameter ø. ø.5 ø Between each major scales, it is sub divided into ten smaller settings (for example, between 2. to. 2., 2.2, 2. etc.), settings are possible at each increment

146 Air Catch Sensor Series ISA2 Dimensions: Centralized Wiring Type When the SUP port is on the left, the stations are sequentially numbered from the side of the terminal block box. With bracket L Terminal block box 6 8 L2 8 5 LED level meter End plate L End plate R OUT 2 OUT DC ( ) DC (+) With DIN rail OUT 2 OUT DC ( ) DC (+) 9 9 OUT OUT 4 OUT 5 OUT 6 Terminal block box wiring diagram OUT OUT 4 OUT 5 Terminal block box OUT 6 End plate L 6(Max. 65) Terminal block box wiring diagram (Max. 65) Pressure gauge.2 Seal conduit entry (ø2) Left Right Stations n 6 9 Seal conduit entry (ø2) 6 9 PULL. 8 PULL MPa MPa.4 L. 9 9 L4 L5 6 6 L2 8 5 PULL. L.2. MPa.4 L PULL DIN rail mounting bracket Left Right Stations n PULL..2. MPa Detection port Rc, NPT, G /8. 6 Detection port Rc, NPT, G /8 PULL MPa.4. MPa Setting dial Pressure gauge Bracket SUP port Rc, NPT, G /8 Stations L L2 L M4 x 8 (With HW, SW) LED level meter End plate R SUP port Rc, NPT, G /8 Stations L L2 L L4 L5 6 DIN rail center For the bracket attachment position, refer to page SE ISE PSE I SE PS I SE 2 SP ISA2 IS SM PF2 IF Data 6-8-

147 Series ISA2 4 Dimensions: Individual Wiring Type With bracket LED level meter End plate L 8 L L2 8 5 Lead wire connector End plate R PULL PULL PULL Setting dial MPa.4 MPa.4 MPa.4 24 With DIN rail DIN rail center SUP port Rc, NPT, G /8 SUP port Rc, NPT, G /8 Electrical entry dimensions Straight union Right angle The direction of a right angle connector cannot be changed (Max. 65) M4 x 8 (With HW, SW) LED level meter End plate L 6 (Max. 65) Pressure gauge Left PUL L..2 L Detection port Rc, NPT, G /8. MPa L L2 PUL L..2 MPa.4 DIN rail mounting bracket L L4 L Right Stations n Left 8 PUL L..2. MPa.4 Right Stations n 9 Bracket 5 Pressure gauge End plate R Setting dial Detection port Plug Lead wire connector Rc, NPT, G /8 Stations L L2 L Plug Stations L L2 L L4 L For the bracket attachment position, refer to page

148 Air Catch Sensor Series ISA2 5 Dimensions: With Control Unit SUP port on the left 44 SUP port Rc, NPT, G / Throttle needle..5.5 MPa.2 6 PULL. SUP port Rc, NPT, G /8 6 PULL. SE ISE PSE I SE DIN connector 64.4 Manual lock PS SUP port on the right With regulator + 2 port solenoid valve Conduit terminal DIN connector.5..5 MPa Conduit terminal SUP port Rc, NPT, G /8 With regulator + 2 port solenoid valve DIN connector DIN connector Conduit terminal Conduit terminal..4 9 With 2 port solenoid valve Throttle needle With 2 port solenoid valve SUP port Rc, NPT, G /8 I SE 2 SP ISA2 IS SM PF2 IF Data 6-8-5

149 Series ISA2 6 Bracket Mounting Position With 2 stations, the bracket is mounted on the second sensor from the left. 2 Left 2 Right 2 MPa MPa MPa MPa MPa MPa With n stations, the bracket is mounted on the first and n th sensor from the left. 2 n MPa MPa MPa Addition of Manifold Stations. Disassembly 2. Insertion Recess Existing joint brackets. Assembly Existing joint brackets Protrusion Joint brackets (ISA--A) The switch for adding stations. Loosen the screws and remove the 2 mounting brackets on the front and back side. 2. Disassemble the switch carefully so that the O-ring on the SUP port will not be detached. End plate removal Slot for removal Hook the fingers on the top and bottom removal grooves to pull out the plate. It can be removed by pulling horizontally.. Fit seal for additional station (ISA-7-B) to the recess of the SUP port of the additional switch. 2. Fit the protrusion of the additional switch into the existing switch.. Mount joint brackets (ISA--A) at 2 positions. Note) Perform temporary tightening of screws. 4. Confirm that the recess of the SUP port of the existing switch has seal for additional station attached. 5. Fit the protrusion of the existing switch into the recess of the additional switch. 6. Mount the existing joint bracket. Note) Perform temporary tightening of screws.. Tighten the joint brackets with the prescribed tightening torque of.2 N m. 2. Arrange pneumatic piping and confirm that there is no air leakage from new joints

150 Air Catch Sensor Series ISA2 7 Parts List End plate R ISA-6-B Terminal block box ISA--L SE ISE PSE Regulator IN Spacer Y2 Joint bracket ISA--A A pair consists set. End plate L ISA-6-A Seal for additional station ISA-7-B Throttle 2 port solenoid valve Spacer Y2 Left Seal for additional station ISA-7-B ISA-7-A When 2 air catch sensors are connected or valve is connected to the When a 2 port solenoid when a 2 port solenoid right: valve is connected to the left: Lead wire with connector (Individual wiring type) ISA-8-A Straight, 5 m ISA-8-B Right angle, 5 m End plate L ISA-6-A Bracket ISA-4-A With mounting screw 2 pcs. Combination bracket ISA--A End plate R ISA-6-B Right Terminal block box ISA--L (Centralized wiring/supply port left) ISA--R (Centralized wiring/supply port right) DIN rail mounting bracket ISA-9-A I SE PS I SE 2 SP ISA2 IS SM PF2 IF Data 6-8-7

151 Series ISA2 8 DIN Rail ISA Pressure Gauge for Air Catch Sensor Regulator AR 2 Nil N F L Thread type Rc NPT G Option (The shape of pressure gauge) Note 2) Nil None E Square embedded pressure gauge (With limit indicator) G Note ) Round pressure gauge (With limit indicator) Note ) The pressure gauge port is Rc /8. The pressure gauge is included in the package (not assembled). Note 2) Order individually when.4 MPa gauge is required. Option specification Nil None N Non-relieving R Flow direction: Right to left Note ) Unit representations on the label and pressure gauge are PSI and F When specifying more than one option, enter symbols first in numerical, then in alphabetical orders. Note ) Compatible with thread type NPT. Under the New Measurement Law, this type is only sold outside Japan. (The SI unit is used inside Japan.) In all cases, with the exception of NPT, add -X225 at the end of the order number. Example) AR2-2E--X225 Standard Specifications Model Port size Fluid Proof pressure Maximum operating pressure Set pressure range Gauge port size Note ) Relief pressure Ambient and fluid temperature Construction Weight (kg) Pressure gauge.2 MPa Round Note 2) Square embedded Note ) Note ) The type with square embedded pressure gauge does not have connection. Note 2) The in the part number of the round pressure gauge indicates the type of connection threads, no symbol for R and N for NPT. Contact SMC for supply of the connection thread type NPT and the pressure gauge of PSI unit representation. Note ) With an O-ring ( pc.) and mounting screws (2 pcs.) Part no. ISA-5- ISA-5-2 ISA-5- ISA-5-4 ISA-5-5 ISA-5-6 ISA-5-7 L Square embedded pressure gauge Round pressure gauge GC 4 AS G6 4 Maximum Notation Maximum pressure Notation pressure specifications indication specifications indication Nil MPa single notation 2.2 MPa Nil MPa single notation 2.2 MPa MPa-PSI P Note) 4.4 MPa P PSI single notation 4.4 MPa double notation 2 Port Solenoid Valve Individual wiring type IISA2 P - IISA2 P -2 IISA2 P - IISA2 P -4 IISA2 P -5 IISA2 P -6 Applicable models 2 E VCA27A 5 DL S 4 2 AR2 4 Air.5 MPa. MPa.2 to.2 MPa 8 Set pressure +.5 MPa {at relief flow of. l/min(anr)} 5 to 6 C (No condensation) Relieving type.29 G6-2- GC-2AS Voltage VAC 2 VAC VAC 22 VAC 24 VDC 2 VDC 2 VAC D DL D T TL Standard Specifications Valve specifications Coil specifications Valve type Fluid Withstand pressure MPa Body material Seal material Ambient temperature C Fluid temperature C Enclosure Atmosphere Valve leakage cm /min (ANR) Mounting orientation Vibration resistance/impact resistance m/s 2 Rated voltage Allowable voltage fluctuation Type of coil insulation Power consumption Apparent power DC AC Note ) Note 2) 5 Hz 6 Hz Connection thread Nil P R /8 NPT /8 Note) For double notation of MPa and PSI, add -X at the end of part number. Example) G6-P4--X 2 2N 2F Port size Throttle Rc /4 NPT /4 G /4 Electrical entry Centralized wiring type IISA2 S - IISA2 S -2 IISA2 S - IISA2 S -4 IISA2 S -5 IISA2 S -6 DIN connector DIN connector (With light) DIN connector (Without connector) Conduit terminal Conduit terminal (With light) Direct operation poppet Air, Inert gas 2. Al HNBR 2 to 6 to 6 (No freezing) Dustproof and jetproof (Equivalent to IP65) Environment with no corrosive or explosive gas.2 or less Free /5 or less 24/2 VDC, //2/22 VAC (5/6 Hz) % rated voltage B type VCA2: 6.5 W VCA2: 7.5 VA Note ) Since the AC specifications include a rectifying device, there is no difference between the apparent power required for starting and holding. Note 2) Vibration resistance: No malfunction resulted in a one-sweep test in a to Hz range in the axial and right angle directions of the main valve and armature, for both energized and de-energized states. Shock resistance: No malfunction resulted in an impact test using a drop impact tester. The test was performed in the axial and right angle directions of the main valve and armature, for both energized and de-energized states. Nil S B K Q CE marked Without throttle and manual lock With throttle With manual lock With manual lock and throttle 6-8-8

152 Series ISA2 Specific Product Precautions Be sure to read before handling. 9 Air Catch Sensor Series ISA2 Operating Environment Warning. Do not use in an environment where vibration or impact occurs. Use a bracket in an environment with vibration exceeding m/s The enclosure of the switch conforms to IP66 and that for the solenoid valve to IP65. The pressure gauge and the regulator have open constructions. Take proper protection measures in an environment where water splashes, oil or spatters from welding may adhere to the product.. Since steel piping lacking flexibility is easily affected by moment loads or propagation of vibration, employ flexible tubing, etc., to prevent interactions of such factors. 4. Although CE accredited, this air catch sensor is not equipped with surge protection against lightning. Necessary counter-measures for possible lightning surge should be fitted to system components as required. 5. Do not operate in locations having an atmosphere of flammable, explosive or corrosive gases, which can result in fire, explosion or corrosion. The air catch sensor does not have an explosion proof rating. Caution. When an air catch sensor is contained in a box, provide an air outlet to constantly keep the atmospheric pressure inside the box. Internal pressure rises will hinder normal air discharge and may lead to possible malfunction. 2. The air outlet is provided on the setting dial section of the air catch sensor. Do not turn off air supply to the switch if water or cutting oil splashes around the setting dial. Caution Mounting. If the detection nozzle is exposed to splashes of water or cutting oil, do not allow backflow from the detection nozzle to the switch body. Install the switch body at a position higher than the detection nozzle wherever possible. Caution Piping. Piping equipment In the piping between the switch body and the detection nozzle, do not use equipment or fittings that can possibly cause leakage or serve as resistance. Do not use One-touch fittings in an environment where the air catch sensor is exposed to water or other liquid.. Supply air Since the orifice of the air catch sensor is small, prevent foreign matter from entering the equipment. For this purpose, use supply air that is dry and filtered 5 mm or better. 2. Operating pressure Since the product adopts a semiconductor pressure sensor, keep the operating pressure not larger than.2 MPa. 2 Port Solenoid Valve Series VCA Precautions on Design Warning. Energized continuously Please consult with SMC if the product is to be energized continuously for long periods of time. Caution Selection. Leakage voltage Take special precautions if a resistor is used in parallel with the switching element or a C-R element (for surge voltage protection) is used for protection of the switching element. The valve may fail to turn off due to leakage current flowing through the resistor or C-R element. Power supply Caution Switching element C OFF R Leakage voltage AC coil % or less rated voltage Warning Pressure Source Leakage voltage Mounting DC coil 2% or less rated voltage Valve. Do not use the air catch sensor if the leakage amount increases or the equipment does not operate properly. After installation, connect compressed air and electricity and conduct an appropriate functionality inspection to confirm that the air catch sensor is installed properly. 2. Do not apply external force to the coil. Apply a wrench to the exterior surface of the piping joint at the time of tightening.. Do not use heat insulators, etc. to keep the temperature at the coil assembly. Do not use a tape heater for freeze prevention except on the piping and body. If may cause the coil to burn. SE ISE PSE I SE PS I SE 2 SP ISA2 IS SM PF2 IF Data 6-8-9

153 Series ISA2 Specific Product Precautions 2 Be sure to read before handling. 2 2 Port Solenoid Valve Series VCA Disassembly and Assembly Caution Before the product is disassembled, shut off the power and pressure supply and exhaust the residual pressure. Disassembly procedure. Remove the top mounting screws. 2. Remove the solenoid coil, spring and armature assembly.. If there is any foreign matter adhering on the surface, take appropriate measures to clear it off such as an air blow or washing with neutral detergent. Assembly procedure Reverse the above procedure to assemble the product. In case the electrical entry is changed, also change the mounting orientation of the solenoid coil before assembly. Note ) Tighten the 4 mounting screws by each pair of corners on a diagonal line at the proper tightening torque shown below. Proper Tightening Torque N m VCA27.4 to.5 Caution Wiring Mounting screw Spring Solenoid coil Armature assembly O-ring Body. Use electrical wires with a conductive sectional area of.5 to.25 mm 2. Make sure that no excessive force is applied to the wires. 2. Adopt an electrical circuit which will not cause chattering at the contact.. The voltage variation must stay within the % to +% range of the rated voltage. In case importance is attached to response characteristics due to use of a DC power source, keep the variation within the 5% to +5% range. The voltage drop is the value at the lead wire to which the coil is connected. Caution Terminal no. DIN terminal : + ( ) Wiring DIN connector (B type only) The internal wiring of the DIN connector is illustrated below. Connect each terminal to the power supply (-) 2: (+) 2 - (+) No polarity. A cabtire cable with an O.D. ø6 to 2 mm is applicable. Tighten each part with an appropriate tightening torque shown below. Connector Bind screw with a flange Tightening torque.5 to.6 N m Gasket Washer Rubber seal Note) Fitting cable (Cable O.D. ø6 to 2 mm) Small bind screw Tightening torque.5 to.6 N m Note) With a cable O.D. ø9 to 2 mm, hollow the rubber sealing before use. Conduit terminal In case of a conduit terminal, refer to the marks below for wiring. Tighten each part with an appropriate tightening torque shown below. Seal the piping part (G /2) securely with a dedicated electric wiring pipe, etc. - Mark Round head combination screw M Tightening torque.5 to.6 N m Mark Round head combination screw M tightening torque.5 to.6 N m View A-A (Internal connection diagram) Terminal cover A Conduit terminal A G /2 Tightening torque.5 to.6 N m 6-8-2

154 Series ISA2 Specific Product Precautions Be sure to read before handling. 2 2 Port Solenoid Valve Series VCA Regulator Series AR Electric Circuit Caution In case of series VC (B type coil) Conduit terminal, DIN type connector DC circuit AC circuit (+, -) 2 (-, +) Without indicator light Without indicator light Conduit terminal, DIN type connector DC circuit AC circuit Rectifying (+, -) 2 (-, +) NR Indicator light With indicator light Warning NR SOL. SOL. 2 2 Maintenance NR NR Indicator light device With indicator light Rectifying device SOL. SOL.. Low-frequency operation Perform valve switching at least every days to prevent malfunction. Also, conduct a periodic inspection at intervals of approximately 6 months to use the product in its best condition. Manual Operation Warning How to operate manually Locking type (tool required) To open valve: Rotate to the right by 9 using a flat head screwdriver. It will still hold open even when the driver removed. To close valve: Rotate to the left by 9 to achieve the former closed position. Electrical operations should be undertaken when the valve is closed. Valve closed (vertical slit) Valve open (horizontal slit) Warning. The adjustment knob must be handled manually. Use of tools may cause damage to the product. 2. Check the inlet and outlet pressure indications on the pressure gauge while setting. If the knob is turned to excess, it may cause internal parts to fracture.. Since products for.2 to.2 MPa settings come with a pressure gauge for.2 MPa, do not apply pressure exceeding.2 MPa. It may cause damage to the pressure gauge. Caution Mounting and Adjustment. Unlock the knob before pressure adjustment and lock it again when the adjustment is over. Incorrect procedure may cause damage to the knob or lead to the outlet pressure fluctuation. Pull the adjustment knob to release the lock. An orange colored line is provided at the bottom of the adjustment handle for visual checking. Push the pressure regulation knob to engage the lock. If it does not lock easily, turn the knob slightly clockwise or counterclockwise until the orange colored line goes out of sight. 2. When the product is installed, leave a space of 6 mm on the side of the valve guide (opposite to the knob) for maintenance and inspection. SE ISE PSE I SE PS I SE 2 SP ISA2 IS SM PF2 IF Data 6-8-2

155 For details about certified products conforming to international standards, visit us at Mechanical Style Pressure Switch Series IS Long service life: 5 million cycles IS- IS--X22 Specifications Model Fluid Proof pressure Max. operating pressure Regulating pressure range (at OFF point) Hysteresis Error of scale Repeatability Contacts Wiring specifications Fluid Ambient and fluid temperature Port size Weight Switch Characteristics Max. contact capacity Voltage Max. operating current Impact resistance Electrical Circuit Up to VAC/DC Reed switch IS N Port size R /8 NPT /8 S IS- Air/Inert gas. MPa.7 MPa. to.4 MPa.8 MPa or less ±.5 MPa ±.5 MPa a Grommet, Lead wire length.5 m (Standard) Air 5 to 6 C (No freezing) R /8 74 g 24 VAC/DC or less 5 ma Operating pressure (MPa).5 How to Order Seal Nil S AC 2 VA, 2 W DC 48 VAC/DC 4 ma G VAC/DC 2 ma Operating Pressure Range None With seal ON pressure Hysteresis OFF pressure Set pressure scale (MPa) Option X2 Lead wire length m Regulating pressure range X22. to.6 MPa Lead wire length m X25 Regulating pressure range. to.6 MPa 6-9- SE ISE PSE I SE PS I SE 2 SP ISA2 IS SM PF2 IF Data

156 Series IS 2 Construction q w R /8 Warning. Connect load before connecting with power source. 2. In the case of induction load or lead wire exceeding 5 m long, the following contact protection box should be used. It may lead to damage to a switch. Part no. CD-P CD-P2 2. Internal circuit of contact protection box Surge absorber Condenser Voltage VAC 24 VDC CD-P Choke coil CD-P2 Choke coil Resistance Lead wire length Switch side:.5 m Load side:.5 m Brown Blue (+) Brown ( ) Blue t u y i! o e r.2.4 MPa IS 5 Precautions Mounting/Piping Warning.. Component Parts No. q w e r t y u i o! 4. How to connect contact protection box Connect the lead wires from the body and the contact protective box side indicated SWITCH. Lead wire should be as short as possible, within m. 5. Dimensions of lead wire Enclosure: ø.4 Insulator: ø. Conductor: ø.64 Description Shield plate Switch assembly Piston PT fittings Adjusting screw Pointer Spring Scale plate Miniseal Y type Magnet Warning Material Rolled steel plate Polyacetal inc die-casted Brass Brass Stainless steel 4-WPB Rigid vinyl chloride NBR Rare earth magnet Be sure to read before handling. Refer to pages 6-4- and for Safety Instructions and Common Precautions on the products mentioned in this catalog, and refer to pages 6-- to 6-- for Precautions on every series. Wiring. When changing piping by hand, hold body. Electrical wire must not be subjected to excessive force. It may cause a malfunction or damage. 2. Do not drop nor apply excessive force. It may cause a malfunction or damage.. Tighten IS- applying the spanner on the PT fitting part. 4. Mounting direction is available in either horizontal or perpendicular. Pressure Source. Do not use with corrosive gases or fluids. 2. Never use in an environment where flammable fluid or gas is used. Since this is not an explosion-proof construction, it may lead to an explosive disaster.. Avoid use in vacuum applications. Switch may be imploded. Pressure Setting Warning. Scale of switching set display is the set value at the pressure drop. 2. When detecting ON-pressure signal, note that set pressure on scale plate plus ON-OFF differential (Hysteresis) will be ON-pressure signal.. Pressure display on the scale plate is just as a reference guide. For an accurate setting, measure it by pressure gauge. Operating Environment Warning. Avoid using a switch in a magnetic environment. It may cause a malfunction. 2. Do not use in such an environment, where water or oil is splashed. Since it is the open type construction, if water or oil make an ingress into the internal parts, the electric circuit will be corroded and may result in a malfunction or damage.. Avoid vibration. Vibration may cause malfunction or may cause setting to be incorrect

157 For details about certified products conforming to international standards, visit us at Pneumatic Pressure Switch Series IS Model SE ISE Can be used for micro load, around ma e.g. relays, programmable controllers, etc. Easy electrical wiring Wide space for wiring. Fixed wiring possible with G /2 connector. Wide calibration range. to.7 MPa High frequency operation and long service life due to piston construction High Frequency: cycle/sec Long service life: million cycles With indicator light (Option) IS (Gasket piping) IS (Gasket piping) JIS Symbol IS-2 (Rc /4 thread) IS-2 (Rc /4 thread) Model IS-2 IS IS-2 IS Specifications Piping method Rc /4 thread Gasket piping Rc /4 thread Gasket piping Fluid Proof pressure Max. operating pressure Pressure adjustment range Ambient and fluid temperature Contacts Error of scale Hysteresis Repeatability Weight Micro Switch Ratings Model Load Circuit Rated voltage (V) 25 AC 25 AC DC 25 DC Micro switch load type Micro switch type Standard Micro load How to Order Air/Inert gas. MPa.8 MPa. to.7 MPa 5 to 6 C (No freezing) ab ±. MPa.5 MPa or less ±.5 MPa.5 kg 2 L Port size Nil 2 N2 With gasket Rc /4 NPT /4 Min. applicable load 5 VDC 6 ma 5 VDC ma IS IS Non inductive (A) Inductive load (A) Non inductive (A) Load resistance Light load Inductive load Motor load Load resistance N.C. IS Standard Micro load N.O. N.C. N.O. N.C. N.O. N.C. N.O. N.C. N.O Insulation resistance: MΩ or more at 5 VDC by megameter Voltage resistance: 5 VAC, 5 /6Hz for min. (When using switch with neon light: VAC for min.) Piping method Rc /4 thread Gasket piping Indicator light Nil L L2 L5.. None With neon light/ VAC With neon light/22 VAC LED/24 VDC Note) Micro load type: Not available L2 option. PSE I SE PS I SE 2 SP ISA2 IS SM PF2 IF Data 6-9-

158 Series IS 2 Construction IS-2/-2 (Rc /4 thread) t Locking nut Be sure to read before handling. Refer to pages 6-4- to for Safety Instructions and Common Precautions on the products mentioned in this catalog, and refer to pages 6-- to 6-- for Precautions on every series. q w Precautions IN u Dimensions 2-ø5.5 Mounting hole Plug 5 e r 9 (Hex.) SMC 5 IN Component Parts No. q w e r t y u Description Adjusting screw Setting spring Lever Piston Micro switch Bottom cover O-ring y Only for gasket mounting style 7 Indicator light G /2 Electric wiring hole 5 48 Other 8 Material Rolled steel Rolled steel Rolled steel Polyacetal Aluminum die-cast NBR 7 For IS, Gasket piping side ø5 ø2.2 Caution. Spare part is LIGHT ASSEMBLY only. If it is necessary to repair, please contact SMC. Light Assembly For VAC: VAC: VDC: 58-5 Able to convert into L, L2, L5 by changing each light assembly. Warning. Light assembly for 24 VDC has 2 terminals and polarity. One is + for red load wire and the other is for black load wire. Light will not light up if wired incorrectly. 2. Light ass'y for 24 VDC has ma of current leakage. Connect the LED directly to the power supply if the input of the PLC sees the switch as closed at all times due to leakage. Ex. ) When using contact a only or a&b contacts C. C. N.O. N.C. Ex. 2) When using contact b only C. Caution Wiring Light Relay N.C.. In the case of using a switch with indicator light, wire the indicator light per the following: 2. Please put the enclosed seal of LAMP LIGHTS WHEN PRESSURE RISES. or LAMP GOES OUT WHEN PRESSURE RISES. on the equipment where it is easy to see. + Ex. ) CR CR CR LAMP GOES OUT WHEN PRESSURE RISES. LAMP LIGHTS WHEN PRESSURE RISES. PLC. Thread using for the terminal is M. Mounting/Piping Caution. Allow the space required for maintenance. Otherwise, maintenance or pressure adjustment cannot be made, since the adjusting screw is on the top of the body. 2. Mounting is possible in either horizontal or vertical orientations. Pressure Setting Caution. Turn the adjusting screw on the cover to set the pressure with a flat head screwdriver. Fix the screw with locking nut after adjusting. Hysteresis is a fixed value. Increase the setting value by turning to + (H) side. Decrease the setting value by turning to (L) side. 2. Use a flat head screwdriver to set the pressure. Then, lock it in place with the lock nut. Otherwise the set pressure will change.. The hysteresis (the ON-OFF range) is fixed. 4. Set pressure scale is the value when pressure increases. Operating Environment Warning. Do not use in an environment, where water or oil is splashed. Because it is the open type construction. If water or oil were to make an ingress, the electrical circuit would be corroded and result in a malfunction or damage. 2. Operating fluids are either air or inert gas exclusively. Never use liquids.. Never use in an environment where flammable fluid or gas is used. Use of this product near flammable materials could cause an explosive situation. This product is not explosion-proof.

159 General Purpose Pressure Switch Series ISG ISG General Purpose Switch is widely used in machine tools, industrial machines, compressors, chemical plants, power plants, machineries for ships, and for automatic pressure control such as hydraulic, water, liquid and atmospheric pressure. ISG9 ISG JIS Symbol Model/Specifications Model Open type (Non-waterproof) Dripproof ISG- ISG2- ISG- ISG2- ISG- ISG2- ISG- ISG2- ISG2- ISG22- ISG2- ISG22- ISG2- ISG22- ISG2- ISG22- ISG- ISG2- ISG- ISG2- ISG- ISG2- ISG- ISG2- ISG9- ISG29- ISG9- ISG29- Operating pressure range (MPa) Hysteresis adjusting range (MPa) Proof pressure Repeatability (MPa) (MPa) Body material in contact with fluid material Hysteresis scale plate Electrical entry Brass, Phosphor bronze Brass, Phosphor bronze None Yes (Open type).2 to.. to.2. ±.6.5 to.7.2 to.5.2 to.45.2 to.5.2 to.45. to.4. to.6.5 ±.4 Stainless steel 6 Stainless steel 6 Brass, Phosphor bronze Brass, Phosphor bronze Stainless steel 6 Stainless steel 6 Brass, Phosphor bronze Brass, Phosphor bronze None Yes None Yes None Yes None Yes Grommet (Dripproof) JIS F 88 Cable gland Type A 2a 2b. to..5 ±.2. to.4 Stainless steel 6 None 2c. to.6 Stainless steel 6 Yes to Brass, Phosphor bronze None 7 to 5 kpa.5 ±2 kpa kpa Stainless steel 6 None Ambient and fluid temp.: 5 to 8 C (No freezing), Contacts: ab, 2ab (Made to Order), Port size: R /8, Weight:. kg (Open type),.5 kg (Dripproof) Option Fluid Type of operating fluid is limited by the material of wetted parts. Fluid Body material in contact with fluid material Bellows Non corrosive water/air/liquid/inert gas Phosphor bronze Fluids which do not corrode stainless steel 6 e.g. steam (5 C or less) Stainless steel 6 Ambient temperature: 8 C or less. Contacts ab Snap type (Standard) qe w r a b contact contact When rising pressure q w = ON e r = OFF 2ab Snap type N.C. N.O. N.C. N.O. wety q C r C When rising pressure q e r y = ON q w r t = OFF Rated Voltage Fluid entering part Brass Stainless steel 6 Rated voltage Non inductive (A) Inductive load (A) (V) AC DC Load resistance Light load Inductive load Motor load Insulation resistance: MΩ or more at 5 VDC by megameter Voltage resistance: 2 VAC/ min. SE ISE PSE I SE PS I SE 2 SP ISA2 IS SM PF2 IF Data 6-9-5

160 Series ISG 2 Construction Component Parts No. q w e r t y u i 2 Description Setting pressure adjusting bolt Scale plate Pointer Setting pressure adjusting spring Main lever Bellows assembly Adjusting bolt Snap switch (a + b type) ISG Multipurpose pressure switch Enclosure Open type (Non-waterproof) Dripproof (Equivalent to IP44) Operating pressure range.2 to. MPa 2.5 to.7 MPa. to. MPa 9 to kpa Caution q w e r t y No. o!!!2!!4!5 How to Order Material Copper alloy Stainless steel 6 Other. Bellows assembly is available for maintenance. When replacing other parts, please contact SMC, since it cannot be repaired by user. Order Bellows assembly with the part number as follows: Bellows assembly for ISG - (No other part numbers exist.) Ex.) Bellows assembly for ISG LOW 2 4 Description Body Hysteresis adjusting spring Hysteresis adjusting bolt Bracket Grommet Connection lever for switch operation Stopper for operation lever W Contacts/Bulb gland Nil ab (Standard) Contact W 2ab Nil Type A 2a (Standard) Bulb B Type A 2b gland C Type A 2c Note) Symbol must be ordered alphabetically like -BW. Hysteresis scale plate None Hysteresis scale plate Note) Not available for ISG 9/29 type Port size R /8 N NPT /8 u i o!!!2!!4!5 Operating Environment. Never use in an environment, where flammable fluids or gases are used. Since this product is not explosion-proof and may trigger an explosive disaster. Caution Warning Caution Cable gland 2a 2b 2c Caution Warning Caution Precautions Be sure to read before handling. Refer to pages 6-4- to for Safety Instructions and Common Precautions on the products mentioned in this catalog, and refer to pages 6-- to 6-- for Precautions on every series. Selection. Select the model taking into consideration the material suitable for the operating fluid. Type of operating fluid is limited by the material of wetted parts. Please contact SMC for materials not specified. Wiring. Do not have the internal wiring attached to the connection lever for switch operation. It may malfunction.. The grommet size of open type switch is ø7. It is possible to connect the electric piping /2B without grommet. 2. Max. diameter of an electric cord usable for bulb gland is shown as below.. Terminal thread type is M4. Max. diameter of an electric cord ø 2 ø ø 5 Mounting/Piping. Mounting is possible in either horizontal or vertical orientations. Pressure Source. In the case of using switch in any liquid, install a water hammer or surge reducer to prevent the damage to switch caused by surges or pulsation pressure. Pressure Setting. Set the pressure by adjusting the setting pressure adjusting bolt to the right to increase and to the left to decrease. 2. Adjust the hysteresis with hysteresis adjusting bolt. In case of switch with scale plate, adjust the hysteresis with a flat head screwdriver tightening the adjusting bolt in the thread cap. Turn to the right to increase and to the left to decrease.. Hysteresis must be within the specified range in this catalog, operation may be unstable when activated out of the specified range. 4. Scale plate is only for reference. Use the gauge to get the correct pressure value. 5. Set pressure scale at the value of the pressure increase.

161 General Purpose Pressure Switch Series ISG Dimensions Open type ISG to 9- (Without hysteresis scale plate) ISG to - (With hysteresis scale plate) Hysteresis adjusting bolt Setting pressure adjusting bolt Hysteresis adjusting bolt Setting pressure adjusting bolt SE ISE PSE -ø Dripproof type ISG2 to 29- (Without hysteresis scale plate) -ø R /8 75 R / JIS F 88 A type 2a Cable gland ø6. Hysteresis adjusting bolt Setting pressure adjusting bolt -ø R / ISG2 to 2- (With hysteresis scale plate) R /8 JIS F 88 A type 2a Cable gland Hysteresis adjusting bolt Setting pressure adjusting bolt 2. I SE PS I SE 2 SP ISA2 IS SM PF2 IF Data 6-9-7

162 4 Related Products: Pressure Switch with Neon Light Easy operation by indicating the operating status with a neon light. Internal Wiring Diagram 4.: Power supply for neon light 4: Common 5: Normally closed 6: Normally open b point (4-5) becomes OFF. a point (4-6) becomes ON. Neon light turns off. Spare Parts Bellows assembly and Light/Top cover assembly are available for maintenance. Order them following the example below: (Component parts number are not existed.) Ex.) S276 - Bellows assembly for L S276 - Light and top cover assembly for L When replacing other parts, please contact SMC for repair, since it cannot be repaired by user Specifications Operating pressure range Hysteresis adjusting range Proof pressure Repeatability Contacts Port size Electrical entry Weight Hysteresis scale plate is not available. Model Model IS276-L IS276-L2 IS276-L9 IS276-L IS276-L2 IS276-L9 Dimensions -ø6. 26 Power supply for neon light VAC 22 VAC 24 VDC VAC 22 VAC 24 VDC to. MPa. to.4 MPa.5 MPa ±.2 MPa ab (Neon light b) R /8 Grommet. kg Body material in contact with fluid material Photophor bronze, Brass Stainless steel 6 Neon light R /8 79 Fluid Non-corrosive water/ Air/Liquid/Inert gas Liquid, which do not corrode stainless steel 6. Setting pressure adjusting bolt 2. Hysteresis adjusting bolt 6-9-8

163 For details about certified products conforming to international standards, visit us at Vacuum Switch Diaphragm Style Series SM-5/2 Specifications Model Switch specifications Fluid Max. operating pressure Regulating pressure range Hysteresis Repeatability Ambient and fluid temperature Supply voltage Indicator light Lead wire Port size Weight Electrical Specifications SM-5 Supply voltage Output (Open collector) Current consumption SM-2 Supply voltage Operating current range Max. contact capacity Vacuum switch diaphragm style SM SM-5 Solid state Air/Inert gas.5 MPa 27 to 8 kpa Max. 5 kpa Max. 2 kpa 4.5 to 28 VDC How to Order Connection T 5 ±% or less 5 to 6 C (No freezing) ON: When output is ON. 5 2 R /8 65 g 4.5 to 28 VDC V, Max. ma ma or less (24 VDC) Nil L Switch/Voltage For mounting on M ejector R /8 NPTF /8 SM-2 Contact (Reed switch) VAC/DC or less VAC 24 V or less: 5 ma, 48 V: 4 ma, V: 2 ma AC 2 VA, 2 W DC 2 Lead wire length.5 m (Standard) m Solid state 4.5 to 28 VDC Contact (Reed switch) VAC/DC SE ISE PSE I SE PS I SE 2 SP ISA2 IS SM PF2 IF Data 6--

164 Series SM 2 Internal Circuit SM-5 Wiring SM-5 Main circuit of switch + Brown Connect to the positive terminal of the power source to make the switch s main circuit operate. Output Black Connect to a load. ( ) (PLC input, + replay) Switch Main circuit of switch Brown ( + ) Black ( ) Load + Blue Connect to the GND terminal of the power source. Blue ( ) SM-2 Reed switch Resistance LED ener diode Dimensions Pressure adjusting screw Brown Blue 2 5 R /8 Indicator light Connection example with PLC In the case of common terminal is negative Brown ( + ) Main circuit of switch SM-5 Black ( ) Blue ( ) Indicator light + SM-2 PLC Input terminal COM 6--2

165 Vacuum Switch Diaphragm Style Series SM Precautions Be sure to read before handling. Refer to pages 6-4- to for Safety Instructions and Common Precautions on the products mentioned in this catalog, and refer to pages 6-- to 6-- for Precautions on every series. Warning Surge absorber Caution CD-P Choke coil Warning Wiring. Do not apply excessive pulling force on the lead wire. It may cause a malfunction or damage. 2. Wiring of SM-2 Switches may be connected in series, voltage drop will be increased by the LED s internal resistance (2 V drop per each). Use switches within the specified range of min. operating voltage.. Diaphragm switches have no built-in contact protection circuits. Use switches with contact protection box (part no. CD-P) with inductive loads or 5 m or more lead wire length. 4. Internal circuit of contact protection box Brown Blue 5. How to connect the contact protection box Connect the lead wires from the body and the contact protective box side indicated SWITCH. Lead wire should be as short as possible, within m. Installation/Piping. When piping switch by hand, hold body. Electrical wire must not be subjected to excessive force. 2. Do not drop nor apply excessive force. It may cause malfunction or damage.. Tighten switch by applying the wrench on the fitting part. Turning it by applying a wrench on the main body may cause damage to the product. 4. Mounting is possible in either horizontal or vertical orientation. Pressure Source. Do not absorb water, etc. when using as an adsorption confirmation switch. It may result in a malfunction or damage. 2. Operating fluids are either air or inert gas exclusively. It cannot be used with corrosive fluids. Warning Supply pressure Setting pressure Setting pressure Atmospheric pressure Max. number of rotations are 8. Caution Warning High vacuum High vacuum Pressure Setting. Setting of vacuum pressure Set the possible minimum pressure for adsorption when used for adsorption confirmation. If setting the pressure lower than that, switch becomes ON in case when adsorption is not complete. If setting the pressure higher than that, switch does not become ON though it is absorbing workpieces properly. Number of rotations 5 5 L Applicable setting range 27 to 8 kpa Hysteresis Steady adsorption Unsteady adsorption Non adsorption Atmospheric pressure 2. Hysteresis Hysteresis is the pressure difference between the ON pressure and the OFF pressure of the output signal. The set pressure is the pressure selected to switch from OFF to ON condition. ON OFF. Number of rotations of pressure adjusting screw H 8 2 Non-adjustable range. How to Set Vacuum Pressure The pressure setting trimmer is used to set the on-pressure. Clockwise rotation increases the on-pressure setting. Switch assembly Indicator light Operating Environment Pressure adjusting screw. Not able to use it under the influence of a magnetic field. Affected by the magnetic field, and result in a malfunction. 2. Do not use in such an environment where water or oil is splashed. Since it is the open type construction, if water or oil make an ingress into the internal parts, the electric circuit will be corroded and may result in malfunction or damage.. Never use switch in an environment where flammable fluid or gas is used. It may result in an explosive disaster, since it is not explosionproof construction. SE ISE PSE I SE PS I SE 2 SP ISA2 IS SM PF2 IF Data 6--

166 A COM B COM DC2V GND F.G. R.S. HOLD COM BANK BANK2 COUNT PRE FUNC. AC~24VCOM OUTOUT2OUTOUT4OUT5S.STOP UP LEFT DOWN RD SD RIGHT SG RS-22C Digital Flow Switch Series PF2A/PF2W For Air For Water For Air For Water Remote Type Series PF2A Integrated Type Series PF2W Application examples Flow control of N2 gas to prevent detection camera shimmering and lead frame oxidation Make possible the monitoring of air flow from the main line to each branch line. Flow rate setting and monitoring are possible with the digital display. Two types for different applications 2 Integrated and remote type displays Three types of output: Switch, accumulated pulse, and analog outputs. Switching from real-time flow rate to accumulated flow is possible Two independent flow rate settings are possible. Water resistant construction conforming to IP65 Flow rate measurement range (l /min) For Air to 5 to 5 to 2 to 2 5 to 5 5 to to 6 6 to 2 Flow control of cooling water for wafer temperature regulation and high frequency electric power supply Main line flow control l/pulse For Water.5 to 4 2 to 6 5 to 4 to M/C M/C M/C Flow control for each branch line For High Temperature Fluid (Water 9 C).5 to 4 2 to 6 5 to 4 Flow control of pressurized cooling water for welding gun The accumulated pulse output function ( l/pulse) enables remote monitoring of accumulated flow. MULTI COUNTER:CEU5 MODE SEL. Pulse counter SE ISE PSE I SE PS I SE 2 SP ISA2 IS SM PF2 IF Data 6--5

167 2 For Air P l/min l/min 5 l/min 2 l/min l/min 2 l/min 6 l/min l/min For Water Integrated display type PF2A H 76H 72H For High Temperature Fluid (Water 9 C) Remote type Display unit Sensor unit PF2A5 PF2A l/min 4 l/min Integrated display type PF2W Integrated display type PF2W74T 72T 74T Flow rate measurement range l/min to 5 to 5 to 2 to 2 5 to 5 5 to to 6 6 to 2 Remote type Display unit Sensor unit PF2W54 PF2W Output specifications Port size (Rc, NPT, G) Accumulated Switch output Analog output pulse output /8 /4 /8 /2 /2 2 : Output from integrated display type and remote display unit type : Output from remote sensor unit type 4 l/min Flow rate measurement range l/min Output specifications Accumulated Switch output Analog output pulse output l/min Port size (Rc, NPT, G) /8 /2 /4 P to 4 2 to 6 5 to 4 to : Output from integrated display type and remote display unit type : Output from remote sensor unit type P Remote type Flow rate Output specifications Port size (Rc, NPT, G) measurement Accumulated Display unit Sensor unit range l/min Switch output Analog output pulse output /8 /2 /4 PF2W54T PF2W 52T 54T.5 to 4 2 to 6 5 to 4 : Output from integrated display type and remote display unit type : Output from remote sensor unit type 6--6

168 Digital Flow Switch For Air Series PF2A For details about certified products conforming to international standards, visit us at Integrated display type PF2A7 27 Flow rate range to l/min 5 to 5 l/min to l/min 2 to 2 l/min 5 to 5 l/min Symbol 2 4 Specifications Port size /8 /4 /8 /2 5 Model Measured fluid Flow rate measurement range Set flow rate range Flow rate measuring range Minimum set unit Accumulated pulse flow rate exchange value (Pulse width: 5 ms) Note, 2) Display unit Real-time flow rate Accumulated flow Operating fluid temperature Linearity Repeatability Temperature characteristics Current consumption (No load) Weight Note ) Port size (Rc, NPT, G) Detection type Display Operating pressure range Proof pressure Accumulated flow range Resistance Output Note 4) specifications Switch output Accumulated pulse output Indicator light Response time Hysteresis Power supply voltage Enclosure Operating temperature range Withstand voltage Insulation resistance Vibration resistance Impact resistance Noise resistance Thread type Nil Rc N NPT F G Port size Flow rate (l/min) Applicable model 2 5 PF2A7, PF2A75 PF2A7, PF2A72 PF2A75 How to Order Wiring specifications Nil N m lead wire with connector Without lead wire Output specifications Output specifications NPN open collector 2 outputs PNP open collector 2 outputs Unit specifications Nil M With unit switching function Fixed SI unit Note) Note) Fixed unit: Real-time flow rate: l/min Accumulated flow: l Applicable model PF2A7, PF2A75 PF2A7, PF2A72, PF2A75 PF2A7, PF2A75 PF2A7, PF2A72/PF2A75 PF2A7 PF2A75 PF2A7 PF2A72 PF2A75 Air, Nitrogen.5 to.5 l/min.5 to.5l /min to l/min. l/min. l/pulse 2.5 to 52.5 l/min 2.5 to 52.5 l/min 5 to 5 l/min.5 l/min.5 l/pulse 5 to 5 l/min 5 to 5 l/min to l/min l/min l/pulse to 2 l/min to 2 l/min 2 to 2 l/min 2 l/min 2 l/pulse 25 to 525 l/min 25 to 525 l/min 5 to 5 l/min 5 l/min 5 l/pulse l/min, CFM x 2 l/min, CFM x l, ft x to 5 C ±5% F.S. or less ±% F.S. or less ±2% F.S. or less ±% F.S. or less (5 to 5 C, based on 25 C), ±5% F.S. or less ( to 5 C, based on 25 C) 5 ma or less 6 ma or less 7 ma or less 25 g 29 g /8, /4 /8 /2 Heater type -digit, 7-segment LED 5 kpa to.5 MPa 5 kpa to.75 MPa. MPa to l Maximum load current: 8 ma; Internal voltage drop: V or less (With load current of 8 ma) NPN open collector Maximum applied voltage: V; Two outputs NPN open collector Symbol Maximum load current: 8 ma Internal voltage drop:.5 V or less (With load current of 8 ma); Two outputs NPN or PNP open collector (same as switch output) Lights up when output is ON OUT: Green; OUT2: Red sec. or less Hysteresis mode: Variable (can be set from ), Window comparator mode: -digit fixed Note 5) 2 to 24 VDC (Ripple ±% or less) IP65 Operating: to 5 C, Stored: 25 to 85 C (No condensation or freezing) VAC for min. between external terminal and case 5 MΩ (5 VDC) between external terminal and case to 5 Hz at whichever is smaller:.5 mm amplitude or 98 m/s 2 acceleration, in X, Y, directions for 2 hrs. each (De-energized) 49 m/s 2 in X, Y, directions times each Vp-p, Pulse width µs, Rise time ns Note ) For digital flow switch with unit switching function. (Fixed SI unit [(l/min, or l, m or m x )] will be set for switch type without the unit switching function.) Note 2) Flow rate display can be switched between the basic condition of C,. kpa and the standard condition (ANR) of 2 C,. kpa, and 65% RH. Note ) Without lead wire. Note 4) Switch output and accumulated pulse output can be selected during initial setting. Note 5) Window comparator mode Since hysteresis will reach digits, keep P_ and P_2 or n_ and n_2 apart by 7 digits or more. (In case of output OUT2, n_, 2 to be n_, 4 and P_, 2 to be P_, 4.) Note 6) The flow switch is comformed to CE mark SE ISE PSE I SE PS I SE 2 SP ISA2 IS SM PF2 IF Data

169 Series PF2A 4 How to Order Remote type Display unit PF2A5 Flow rate range Specifications Measured fluid Detection type Flow rate measuring range Operating pressure range Proof pressure Operating fluid temperature Linearity Note ) Repeatability Note ) Temperature characteristics Output for display unit Output Note 2) specifications Power supply voltage Current consumption (No load) Resistance Model Analog output Enclosure Operating temperature range Withstand voltage Insulation resistance Vibration resistance Impact resistance Noise resistance Weight Note ) Port size (Rc, NPT, G) to l/min 5 to 5 l/min to l/min 2 to 2 l/min 5 to 5 l/min Thread type Nil N F Rc NPT G Nil N Port size Symbol 2 4 Output specifications Nil Output for display unit Output for display unit + analog output ( to 5 V) 2 Output for display unit + analog output (4 to 2 ma) Wiring specifications Port size /8 /4 /8 /2 m lead wire with connector Without lead wire Flow rate (l/min) 2 5 PF2A5 PF2A55 PF2A5 PF2A52 PF2A55 Air, Nitrogen Heater type to l/min 5 to 5 l/min to l/min 2 to 2 l/min 5 to 5 l/min 5 Applicable model PF2A5/55 PF2A5/52 PF2A55 5 kpa to.5 MPa 5 kpa to.75 MPa. MPa to 5 C ±5% F.S. or less ±% F.S. or less ±2% F.S. or less (5 to 5 C, based on 25 C) ±% F.S. or less ( to 5 C, based on 25 C) Analog voltage output (Non-linear) output impedance kω output for display unit PF2A Voltage output to 5 V within the flow rate range Linearity: ±5% F.S. or less; allowable load resistance: kω or more. Current output 4 to 2 ma within the flow rate range Linearity: ±5% F.S. or less; allowable load resistance: Ω or less with 2 VDC, 6 Ω or less with 24 VDC 2 to 24 VDC (Ripple ±% or less) ma or less IP65 Operating: to 5 C, Stored: 25 to 85 C (No condensation or freezing) VAC for min. between external terminal and case 5 MΩ (5 VDC) between external terminal and case to 5 Hz at whichever is smaller:.5 mm amplitude or 98 m/s 2 acceleration 49 m/s 2 in X, Y, directions times each Vp-p, Pulse width µs, Rise time ns 2 g 24 g /8, /4 /8 /2 Note ) The system accuracy when combined with PF2A. Note 2) Output system can be selected during initial setting. Note ) Without lead wire. (Add 2 g for the types of analog output whether voltage or current output selected.) Note 4) Flow rate unit measured under the following conditions: C and. kpa. Note 5) The sensor unitis comformed to CE mark. ma or less 6--8

170 Digital Flow Switch For Air Series PF2A 5 How to Order Remote type Display unit PF2A A Unit specifications Flow rate range Symbol Flow rate range Type for sensor unit to l/min PF2A5 5 to 5 l/min PF2A55 to l/min 2 to 2 l/min 5 to 5 l/min PF2A5 PF2A52 PF2A55 Mounting Output specifications Symbol A Panel mounting Output specifications NPN open collector 2 outputs PNP open collector 2 outputs Nil M Applicable model PF2A/ PF2A/ With unit switching function Fixed SI unit Note) Note) Fixed unit: Real-time flow rate: l/min SE ISE PSE I SE Specifications Model Flow rate measurement range Note ) Set flow rate range Note ) Minimum set unit Note ) Accumulated pulse flow rate exchange value (Pluse width: 5 ms) Note ) Accumulated flow range Linearity Note 4) Repeatability Note 4) Current consumption Weight Switch output Real-time flow rate Accumulated flow Accumulated pulse output Display Indicator light Power supply voltage Response time Hysteresis Enclosure Operating temperature range Withstand voltage Insulation resistance Vibration resistance Impact resistance Noise resistance Resistance Note 2, ) Display unit Temperature characteristics Output Note 5) specifications.5 to.5 l/min.5 to.5 l/min. l/min. l/pulse PF2A/ l/min, CFM x 2 5 ma or less 2.5 to 52.5 l/min 2.5 to 52.5 l/min.5 l/min.5 l/pulse NPN open collector (PF2A, PF2A) PNP open collector (PF2A, PF2A) 5 to 5 l/min 5 to 5 l/min l/min l/pulse l, ft x to l ±5% F.S. or less ±% F.S. or less ±% F.S. or less (5 to 5 C based on 25 C) ±2% F.S. or less ( to 5 C based on 25 C) 45 g NPN or PNP open collector (same as switch output) -digit, 7-segment LED Lights up when output is ON OUT: Green; OUT2: Red 2 to 24 VDC (Ripple ±% or less) sec. or less Hysteresis mode: Variable (can be set from ), Window comparator mode: Fixed ( digits) Note 6) IP4 Operating: to 5 C, Stored: 25 to 85 C (No condensation or freezing) VAC for min. between external terminal and case 5 MΩ (5 VDC) between external terminal and case to 5 Hz at whichever is smaller:.5mm amplitude or 98 m/s 2 acceleration, in X, Y, directions for 2 hrs. each 49 m/s 2 in X, Y, directions times each Vp-p, Pulse width µs, Rise time ns PF2A/ to 2 l/min to 2 l/min 2 l/min 2 l/pulse l/min, CFM x 6 ma or less 25 to 525 l/min 25 to 525 l/min 5 l/min 5 l/pulse Maximum load current: 8 ma Internal voltage drop: V or less (With load current of 8 ma) Maximum applied voltage: V 2 outputs Maximum load current: 8 ma Internal voltage drop:.5 V or less (With load current of 8 ma) 2 outputs Note ) The flow rate measurement range can be modified depending on the setting. Note 2) For digital flow switch with unit switching function. (Fixed SI unit [l/min or l] will be set for switch types without the unit switching function.) Note ) Flow rate display can be switched between the basic condition of C,. kpa and the standard condition (ANR) of 2 C,. kpa, and 65% RH. Note 4) The system accuracy when combined with PF2A5. Note 5) Switch output and accumulated pulse output can be selected during initial setting. Note 6) Window comparator mode Since hysteresis will reach digits, keep P_ and P_2 or n_ and n_2 apart by 7 digits or more. (In case of output OUT2, n_, 2 to be n_, 4 and P_, 2 to be P_, 4.) Note 7) The display unit is comformed to CE mark. PS I SE 2 SP ISA2 IS SM PF2 IF Data 6--9

171 Series PF2A 6 Flow Characteristics (Pressure loss) PF2A7/5 PF2A75/55 PF2A7/5.. Pressure loss (kpa) Pressure loss (kpa) Pressure loss (kpa) Flow rate (l/min) Flow rate (l/min) Flow rate (l/min) PF2A72/52 Pressure loss (kpa) Flow rate (l/min) Sensor Unit Construction PF2A7/75 PF2A5/55 PF2A7/72/75 PF2A5/52/55 Operating Unit Descriptions RE Buttons Press the and buttons simultaneously to activate the RE function. This clears the unit when an abnormality occurs and resets the accumulated flow display to. Output (OUT) Indicator: Green Lights up when OUT is ON. Blinks when an overcurrent error occurs on OUT. Output (OUT2) Indicator: Red Lights up when OUT2 is ON. Blinks when an overcurrent error occurs on OUT2. OUT OUT2 PF2A75/55 Pressure loss (kpa) Flow direction Flow direction U P DOWN Flow rate (l/min) LED Display Displays the real-time flow rate, accumulated flow, and set value. The mark blinks when the accumulated flow is being measured. UP Button ( Button) Use this button to increase a set value. Button ( Button) Use this button to change a set value or any of the modes. DOWN Button ( Button) Use this button to decrease a set value. Component Parts No. q w e r t Component Parts No. q w e r t y Description Attachment Seal Mesh Body Sensor Description Attachment Seal Spacer Mesh Body Sensor Connectors Connectors shown below are applicable (female contact). Contact each manufacturer for details. Connector size M2 Number of pins 4 Material ADC NBR Stainless steel PBT PBT Material ADC NBR PBT Stainless steel PBT PBT Manufacturer Correns Corporation OMRON Corporation Yamatake Corporation Applicable series VA-4D XS2 PA5-4I Hirose Electric Co., Ltd. HR24 DDK Ltd. CM-8DP4S 6--

172 Digital Flow Switch For Air Series PF2A 7 Dimensions: Integrated Display Type for Air PF2A7/75 Internal circuit and wiring example ø4.5 PF2A7/72/ ø.4 4 ø4.5 FLOW SWITCH OUT FOR AIR OUT Flow direction FLOW SWITCH OUT OUT2 FOR AIR 6 88 Flow direction UP DOWN U P DOWN (4.5) 4 2-Port size 4 2-Port size 5 (4.5) to Main circuit Main circuit are terminal numbers. Brown Load OUT 4 Black Load OUT2 2 White + 2 to 24 VDC Blue PF2A (-M) Brown OUT 4 Black Load White 2 OUT2 + 2 Load to 24 VDC Blue PF2A (-M) Connector pin numbers 4 Pin no Pin description DC (+) OUT2 DC ( ) OUT SE ISE PSE I SE PS I SE 2 SP ISA2 IS SM PF2 IF Data 6--

173 Series PF2A 8 Dimensions: Remote Type Sensor Unit for Air PF2A5/ B 2.6 Internal circuit and wiring example to Sensor unit are terminal numbers. Brown Display unit (PF2A / ) Main circuit NC 2 4 White 4 Black Blue Main circuit PF2A5 - Switch output + 2 to 24 VDC (4.5) A 4 4-ø4.5 2-ø.4 PF2A5/52/ (4.5) A 4-ø Flow direction Flow direction 2-Port size 24 (mm) Output specifications A B Pulse output only Pulse output + Analog output B Port size Output specifications A Pulse output only 48 Pulse output + Analog output 58.6 Display unit Sensor unit (PF2A / ) Brown 2 6 Analog output 2 Load 4 8 White 4 Black 7 5 Blue Main circuit PF2A5 - - Display unit Sensor unit (PF2A / ) Brown 2 6 Analog output 2 Load 4 8 White 4 Black 7 5 Blue Main circuit (mm) B PF2A Wiring Main circuit 2 4 Switch output Switch output Connector pin numbers Pin no. 2 4 Main circuit Main circuit Pin description DC (+) NC/Analog output DC ( ) OUT + + Brown () DC (+) Black (4) OUT 2 to 24 VDC 2 to 24 VDC White (2) NC/Analog output Blue () DC ( ) Use this sensor by connecting to SMC remote type display unit Series PF2A. 6--2

174 Digital Flow Switch For Air Series PF2A 9 Dimensions: Remote Type Display Unit for Air PF2A -A Panel mounting type Analog output to 5 VDC Analog output [V] 5 Min. measured flow rate value Part no. PF2A5- - PF2A55- - PF2A5- - PF2A52- - PF2A55- - SMC FLOW SWITCH RE UNIT x 7.2(= 2.6) View A M Max. measured flow rate value Panel fitting dimensions The applicable panel thickness is to.2 mm. Real-time flow rate [l/min] Basic condition Standard condition Minimum measured Maximum measured Minimum measured Maximum measured flow rate value [l/min] flow rate value [l/min] flow rate value [l/min] flow rate value [l/min] A 4 to 2 madc Analog output [ma] 2 4 Internal circuit and wiring example Sensor Black Brown Blue Series PF2A5 Sensor Black Brown Blue Series PF2A5 Min. measured flow rate value Part no. PF2A5- -2 PF2A PF2A5- -2 PF2A PF2A to are terminal numbers NC 4 2 NC 4 2 Main circuit Main circuit Terminal block number PF2A -A PF2A -A Max. measured flow rate value Basic condition Minimum measured Maximum measured flow rate value [l/min] flow rate value [l/min] OUT2 Load OUT Load + 2 to 24 VDC OUT2 Load OUT Load + 2 to 24 VDC Do not connect the white wire of the sensor to. Real-time flow rate [l/min] Standard condition Minimum measured flow rate value [l/min] Maximum measured flow rate value [l/min] SE ISE PSE I SE PS I SE 2 SP ISA2 IS SM PF2 IF Data 6--

175 Digital Flow Switch, Large Flow Type For Air Series PF2A For details about certified products conforming to international standards, visit us at How to Order Integrated display type Flow rate range to l/min to 6 l/min 6 to 2 l/min PF2A7 Symbol 4 2 Specifications H High flow type Port specifications Port size /2 2 Model Measured fluid Detection type Flow rate measuring range Note ) Minimum setting unit Note ) Note 2) Display unit Operating pressure range Proof pressure Pressure loss Accumulated flow range Linearity Note ) Repeatability Pressure characteristics Temperature characteristics Output specifications Real-time flow rate Accumulated flow Nil N F Flow rate (l/min) 6 2 Rc NPT G Port size Applicable model PF2A7H PF2A76H PF2A72H Note) Fixed unit: Real-time flow rate: l/min Output specifications Accumulated flow: l, m, m x NPN open collector output + Analog output ( to 5 V) NPN open collector output + Analog output (4 to 2 ma) PNP open collector output + Analog output ( to 5 V) PNP open collector output + Analog output (4 to 2 ma) Wiring specifications Nil N m lead wire with connector Without lead wire Unit specifications Switching of switch output and accumulated pulse output is possible with NPN or PNP open collector outputs. Nil M With unit switching function Fixed SI unit Note) Response time Hysteresis Power supply voltage Current consumption sec. or less Hysteresis mode: Variable (can be set from ); Window comparator mode: (can be set from to % F.S.) 24 VDC (Ripple ±% or less) 5 ma or less Enclosure IP65 Operating temperature range to 5 C (No condensation) Withstand voltage VAC for min. between external terminal and case Insulation resistance 5 MΩ (5 VDC) between external terminal and case Vibration resistance to 5 Hz at whichever is smaller:.5 mm amplitude or 98 m/s 2 acceleration, in X, Y, directions for 2 hrs. each Impact resistance 49 m/s 2 in X, Y, directions times each Noise resistance Vp-p, Pulse width µs, Rise time ns Weight Port size (Rc, NPT, G). kg (Without lead wire). kg (Without lead wire) /2 2. kg (Without lead wire) 2 Note ) Flow rate display can be switched between the basic condition of C,. kpa and the standard condition (ANR) of 2 C,. kpa, and 65% RH. Note 2) For digital flow switch with unit switching function. (Fixed SI unit [(l/min, or l, m or m x )] will be set for switch type without the unit switching function.) Note ) The high flow rate type is CE marked; however, the linearity with applied noise is ±5% F.S. or less. Note 4) Switch output and accumulated pulse output selections are made using the button controls. Note 5) The analog output operates only for real-time flow rate, and does not operate for accumulated flow. Resistance Switch output Note 4) Accumulated Note 4) pulse output Analog output Note 5) PF2A7H 5 to l/min 5 l/min PF2A76H Dry air Heater type to 6 l/min l/min PF2A72H 6 to 2 l/min l/min, CFM l, m, m x, ft, ft x, ft x 6. to.5 MPa 2.25 MPa 2 kpa (at maximum flow rate) to 9,999,999,999 l ±.5% F.S. or less (.7 MPa, at 2 C) ±.% F.S. or less (.7 MPa, at 2 C), ±.% of F.S. or less in case of analog output ±.5% F.S. or less (. to.5 MPa, based on.7 MPa) ±2.% F.S. or less ( to 5 C, based on 25 C) NPN open collector Max. load current: 8 ma; Max. applied voltage: V; Internal voltage drop: V or less (With load current of 8 ma) PNP open collector Max. load current: 8 ma; Internal voltage drop:.5 V or less (With load current of 8 ma) NPN or PNP open collector Flow rate per pulse: l/pulse,. ft /pulse Pulse width: 5 msec Output voltage: to 5 V; Load impedance: kω or more Output current: 4 to 2 ma; Load impedance: 25 Ω or less 6--4

176 Digital Flow Switch, High Flow Type For Air Series PF2A Flow Characteristics (Pressure loss) PF2A7H 2 PF2A76H 2 PF2A72H 2 Pressure loss (kpa) Pressure loss (kpa) Pressure loss (kpa) SE ISE PSE I SE Flow rate (l/min) Flow rate (l/min) Flow rate (l/min) PS Construction Connectors Connectors shown below are applicable (female contact). Contact each manufacturer for details. Connector size M2 Flow direction Operating Unit Descriptions RE buttons Press the UP and DOWN buttons simultaneously to activate the RE function. This clears the unit when an abnormality occurs and resets the accumulated flow display to. Unit display Displays the selected unit. Fixed SI unit (l/min, or l, m or m x ) will be set for switches without the unit switching function. Output (OUT) indicator Lights up when OUT is ON. Blinks when an overcurrent error occurs on OUT. UP button ( button) Use this button to increase a set value. button ( button) Use this button to select a function. Number of pins 4 Manufacturer Correns Corporation OMRON Corporation Yamatake Corporation Hirose Electric Co., Ltd. DDK Ltd. Applicable series VA-4D XS2 PA5-4I HR24 CM-8DP4S Component Parts No. q w e r t y Description Attachment Seal Mesh Body Sensor Spacer Material Aluminum alloy HNBR Stainless steel Aluminum alloy PPS PBT Flow rate display Displays the real-time flow rate, accumulated flow, and set value. Flow rate confirmation indicator The blinking intervals change depending on the flow rate value. DOWN button ( button) Use this button to decrease a set value. MODE button ( button) Use this button to change a function. Note Anodized Anodized 6--5 I SE 2 SP ISA2 IS SM PF2 IF Data

177 Series PF2D 2 Dimensions PF2A7H/76H/72H Internal circuit and wiring example A B U P MODE DOWN 6 C 2-G D E F to Main circuit are terminal numbers. Brown Load OUT 4 Black Analog output 2 White Load Blue PF2A7 H (-M) Accumulated pulse output ON OFF 5 msec + 24 VDC H Model PF2A7H PF2A76H PF2A72H A Analog output to 5 VDC Analog output [V] 5 B Min. measured flow rate value Part no. PF2A7H- -28 PF2A7H- -68 PF2A76H- -28 PF2A76H- -68 PF2A72H- -28 PF2A72H- -68 C D E (4.5) 4-I thread with depth J F Max. measured flow rate value Minimum measured flow rate value [l/min] Connector pin numbers 4 Pin no. 2 4 G Rc, NPT, G Rc /2, NPT /2, G /2 Rc 2, NPT 2, G 2 Real-time flow rate [l/min] Maximum measured flow rate value [l/min] 2 Pin description DC (+) Analog output DC ( ) OUT H Analog output [ma] I M5 x.8 M6 x M6 x J to 2 madc 2 4 Min. measured flow rate value Part no. PF2A7H- -29 PF2A7H- -69 PF2A76H- -29 PF2A76H- -69 PF2A72H- -29 PF2A72H- -69 Main circuit Brown 4 OUT Black Load Analog output 2 White Load Blue PF2A7 H (-M) Accumulated pulse output wiring examples OUT Black Load Blue Max. V 8 ma or less V 5 msec PF2A7 H (-M) Brown Max. measured flow rate value Minimum measured flow rate value [l/min] 5 6 OUT 8 ma Black Load V 5 msec PF2A7 H (-M) Real-time flow rate [l/min] Maximum measured flow rate value [l/min] 6 2 Accumulated pulse output ON OFF 5 msec + 24 VDC 6--6

178 Digital Flow Switch For Water Series PF2W For details about certified products conforming to international standards, visit us at Integrated display type Flow rate range How to Order PF2W to 4 l/min 2 to 6 l/min 5 to 4 l/min to l/min Symbol 4 6 Specifications Port size /8 /2 /4 4 Thread type 6 Nil N F Rc NPT G Flow rate (l/min) 4 Model Measured fluid Flow rate measurement range Set flow rate range Flow rate measuring range Minimum set unit Accumulated pulse flow rate exchange value (Pulse width: 5 ms) Linearity Repeatability Temperature characteristics Note ) Current consumption (No load) Weight Note 2) Port size (Rc, NPT, G) Detection type Display Note ) Real-time flow rate Display unit Accumulated flow Operating pressure range Proof pressure Accumulated flow range Ambient temperature range Note 4) Output specifications Switch output Accumulated pulse output Indicator light Response time Hysteresis Power supply voltage Enclosure Operating temperature range Withstand voltage Insulation resistance Vibration resistance Impact resistance Noise resistance Resistance Port size Applicable model PF2W74, PF2W72 PF2W72, PF2W74 PF2W74, PF2W7 PF2W7 PF2W74.5 to 4.5 l/min.5 to 4.5 l/min.5 to 4 l/min.5 l/min.5 l/pulse Unit specifications Nil With unit switching function M Fixed SI unit Note) Note) Fixed unit: Real-time flow rate: l/min Accumulated flow: l Wiring specifications Nil N m lead wire with connector Without lead wire Output specifications NPN open collector 2 outputs PNP open collector 2 outputs PF2W72 PF2W74 Water.7 to 7. l/min.5 to 45 l/min.7 to 7. l/min.5 to 45 l/min 2 to 6 l/min 5 to 4 l/min. l/min.5 l/min. l/pulse.5 l/pulse ±5% F.S. or less ±% F.S. or less ±5% F.S. or less ( to 5 C, based on 25 C) 7 ma or less PF2W7 7 to l/min 7 to l/min to l/min l/min l/pulse ±% F.S. or less ±2% F.S. or less 8 ma or less 46 g 52 g 7 g 5 g /8 /8, /2 /2, /4 /4, Karman vortex -digit, 7-segment LED l/min, gal (US)/min l, gal (US) to MPa.5 MPa to l Operating: to 5 C, Stored: 25 to 85 C (No condensation or freezing) Maximum load current: 8 ma; Internal voltage drop: V or less (With load current of 8 ma) NPN open collector Maximum applied voltage: V; 2 outputs Maximum load current: 8 ma PNP open collector Internal voltage drop:.5 V or less (With load current of 8 ma); 2 outputs NPN or PNP open collector (same as switch output) Lights up when output is ON, OUT: Green; OUT2: Red sec. or less Hysteresis mode: Variable (can be set from ), Window comparator mode: -digit fixed Note 5) 2 to 24 VDC (Ripple ±% or less) IP65 to 5 C VAC for min. between external terminal and case 5 MΩ (5 VDC) between external terminal and case to 5 Hz at whichever is smaller:.5 mm amplitude or 98 m/s 2 acceleration in X, Y, directions for 2 hrs. each 49 m/s 2 in X, Y, directions times each Vp-p, Pulse width µs, Rise time ns Note ) In the case of PF2W7, ±% of F.S. or less (5 C to 5 C, based on 25 C). Note 2) Without lead wire. Note ) For digital flow switch with unit switching function. (Fixed SI unit [l/min or l] will be set for switch type without the unit switching function.) Note 4) Switch output and accumulated pulse output can be selected during initial setting. Note 5) Window comparator mode Since hysteresis will reach digits, keep P_ and P_2 or n_ and n_2 apart by 7 digits or more. The minimum setting unit is digit. (Refer to the table above.) (In case of output OUT2, n_, 2 to be n_, 4 and P_, 2 to be P_, 4.) Note 6) The flow switch is comformed to CE mark SE ISE PSE I SE PS I SE 2 SP ISA2 IS SM PF2 IF Data

179 Series PF2W 4 How to Order Remote type Sensor unit PF2W5 2 Specifications Measured fluid Detection type Flow rate measuring range Operating pressure range Withstand pressure Operating fluid temperature Linearity Note ) Repeatability Note ) Temperature characteristics Output Note 2) specifications Flow rate range to 4 l/min 2 to 6 l/min 5 to 4 l/min to l/min Nil N F Thread type Rc NPT G Port size Symbol 4 6 Port size /8 /2 /4 Output specifications Nil 2 Wiring specifications Nil N Flow rate (l/min) Output for display unit (sensor output) only Output for display unit + Analog output ( to 5V) Output for display unit + Analog output (4 to 2 ma) Lead wire with connector m Without lead wire Applicable model PF2W54, PF2W52 PF2W52, PF2W54 PF2W54, PF2W5 PF2W5 Power supply voltage 2 to 24 VDC (Ripple ±% or less) Current consumption (No load) 2 ma or less Enclosure IP65 Operating temperature range Operating: to 5 C, Stored: 25 to 85 C (No condensation or freezing) Withstand voltage VAC for min. between external terminal and case Insulation resistance 5 MΩ (5 VDC) between external terminal and case Vibration resistance to 5 Hz at whichever is smaller:.5 mm amplitude or 98 m/s 2 acceleration in X, Y, directions for 2 hrs. each Impact resistance 49 m/s 2 in X, Y, directions times each Noise resistance Vp-p, Pulse width µs, Rise time ns Resistance Weight Note ) Model Output for display unit Analog output Port size (Rc, NPT, G) PF2W54 PF2W52 PF2W54 PF2W5 Water Karman vortex.5 to 4 l/min 2 to 6 l/min 5 to 4 l/min to l/min to MPa.5 MPa to 5 C to 5 C ±5% F.S. or less ±% F.S. or less ±2% F.S. or less ±% F.S. or less ±2% F.S. or less (5 to 5 C based on 25 C), ±% F.S. or less ( to 5 C based on 25 C) Pulse output, N channel, open drain, output for display unit PF2W. (Specifications: Maximum load current of ma; Maximum applied voltage of V) Voltage output to 5V within the flow rate range Linearity: ±5% F.S. or less; allowable load resistance: kω or more. Current output 4 to 2 ma within the flow rate range Linearity: ±5% F.S. or less; allowable load resistance: Ω or less with 2 VDC, 6 Ω or less with 24 VDC Note ) The system accuracy when combined with PF2W. Note 2) Output system can be selected during initial setting. Note ) Without lead wire. (Add 2 g for the types of analog output whether voltage or current output selected.) Note 4) The sensor unitis comformed to CE mark. 4.9 m/s 2 4 g 47 g 65 g, g /8 /8, /2 /2, /4 /4, 6--8

180 How to Order Digital Flow Switch For Water Series PF2W 5 Remote type Display unit PF2W A Symbol Flow rate range Type for sensor unit.5 to 4 l/min 2 to 6 l/min 5 to 4 l/min to l/mim Flow rate range PF2W54 PF2W52 PF2W54 PF2W5 Output specifications NPN open collector 2 outputs PNP open collector 2 outputs Mounting A Panel mounting Panel mount adapter part no. Description Part no. Panel adapter B S-22-2 Unit specifications Nil M With unit switching function Fixed SI unit Note) Note) Fixed unit: Real-time flow rate: l/min Accumulated flow: l SE ISE PSE I SE PS Specifications Flow rate measurement range Note ) Set flow rate range Note ) Minimum setting unit Note ) Accumulated pulse flow rate exchange value (Pulse width: 5 ms) Note ) Display unit Accumulated flow range Linearity Note ) Repeatability Note ) Temperature characteristics Current consumption (No load) Weight Resistance Output Note 4) specifications Note 2) Model Accumulated pulse output Display Indicator light Power supply voltage Response time Hysteresis Real-time flow rate Accumulated flow Switch output Enclosure Operating temperature range Withstand voltage Insulation resistance Vibration resistance Impact resistance Noise resistance.5 to 4.5 l/min.5 to 4.5 l/min.5 l/min.5 l/pulse PF2W/.7 to 7. l/min.7 to 7. l/min. l/min. l/pulse ±5% F.S. or less ±% F.S. or less l/min, gal (US)/min l, gal (US) to l.5 to 45 l/min.5 to 45 l/min.5 l/min.5 l/pulse PF2W/ 7 to l/min 7 to l/min l/min l/pulse ±% F.S. or less ±% F.S. or less ±2% F.S. or less ( to 5 C, based on 25 C), ±% F.S. or less (5 to 5 C, based on 25 C) 5 ma or less 6 ma or less 45 g Maximum load current: 8 ma Internal voltage drop: V or less (With load current of 8 ma) NPN open collector (PF2W, PF2W) Maximum applied voltage: V 2 outputs Maximum load current: 8 ma PNP open collector (PF2W, PF2W) Internal voltage drop:.5 V or less (With load current of 8 ma) 2 outputs NPN or PNP open collector (Same as switch output) IP4 Operating: to 5 C, Stored: 25 to 85 C (No condensation or freezing) VAC for min. between external terminal and case 5 MΩ (5 VDC) between external terminal and case to 5 Hz at whichever is smaller:.5 mm amplitude or 98 m/s 2 acceleration in X, Y, directions for 2 hrs. each 49 m/s 2 in X, Y, directions times each Vp-p, Pulse width µs, Rise time ns -digit, 7-segment LED Lights up when output is ON, OUT: Green; OUT2: Red 2 to 24 VDC (Ripple ±% or less) sec. or less Hysteresis mode: Variable (can be set from ) Window comparator mode: -digit fixed Note 5) Note ) Values vary depending on each set flow rate range. Note 2) For digital flow switch with unit switching function. (Fixed SI unit [l/min or l] will be set for switch types without the unit switching function.) Note ) The system accuracy when combined with PF2W5. Note 4) Switch output and accumulated pulse output can be selected during initial setting. Note 5) Window comparator mode Since hysteresis (H) will reach digits, keep P_ and P_2 or n_ and n_2 apart by 7 digits or more. (In case of output OUT2, n_, 2 to be n_, 4 and P_, 2 to be P_, 4.) Note 6) The display unit is comformed to CE mark. I SE 2 SP ISA2 IS SM PF2 IF Data 6--9

181 Series PF2W 6 Flow Characteristics (Pressure loss) PF2W74, PF2W54 PF2W72, PF2W52 PF2W74, PF2W54 Pressure loss (MPa) Pressure loss (MPa) Pressure loss (MPa) Pressure loss (MPa) Flow rate (l/min) PF2W7, PF2W Flow rate (l/min) Sensor Unit Construction Flow direction Flow rate (l/min) Component Parts Connectors and operating unit descriptions are the same as Series PF2A for air. Refer to page 6--. No. q w e r Description Attachment Seal Body Sensor Flow rate (l/min) Material Stainless steel NBR PPS PPS 6--2

182 Digital Flow Switch For Water Series PF2W 7 Dimensions: Integrated Display Type for Water PF2W74, PF2W72 7 PF2W ø4.5 2-ø.4 Model PF2W74 PF2W72 4-ø4.5 FLOW SWITCH OUT OUT2 FOR WATER 4 Flow direction L dimension 6 FLOW SWITCH OUT OUT2 FOR WATER L Flow direction UP DOWN U P S E T DOWN (4.5) (4.5) Port size 2-Port size Internal circuit and wiring example to are terminal numbers. Brown Load OUT 4 Black Load OUT2 2 + White Blue 2 to 24 VDC PF2W (-M) Main circuit Brown OUT 4 Black Load White 2 OUT2 + Load Blue 2 to 24 VDC PF2W (-M) Main circuit Connector pin numbers Pin no Pin description DC (+) OUT2 DC ( ) OUT SE ISE PSE I SE PS I SE 2 SP ISA2 IS SM PF2 IF Data 6--2

183 Series PF2W 8 Dimensions: Integrated Display Type for Water PF2W FLOW SWITCH U P OUT OUT2 DOWN 4-ø Port size Flow direction (4.5) 6--22

184 Digital Flow Switch For Water Series PF2W 9 Dimensions: Remote Type Sensor Unit for Water PF2W54/52- (N)- L B 2.6 Internal circuit and wiring example to Sensor unit are terminal numbers. Display unit (PF2W / ) Brown to 24 VDC Main circuit NC 2 4 White Black Blue 4 Main circuit Switch output + SE ISE PSE (4.5) A 4 4-ø4.5 PF2W54- (N)- 6 5 (4.5) A ø.4 4 Flow direction Model L dimension PF2W54 PF2W ø Flow direction Port size Output specifications Pulse output only Pulse output + Analog output 2-Port size B A Output specifications Pulse output only Pulse output + Analog output 6 6 B A Sensor unit Main circuit Main circuit Main circuit B Analog output 2 White 4 Sensor unit Analog output 2 White 4 Wiring Display unit (PF2W / ) Brown 2 6 Black Blue Display unit (PF2W / ) Brown 2 6 Black Blue Connector pin numbers Pin no. 2 4 PF2W5 - Load Main circuit PF2W5 - - Load Main circuit PF2W Brown () DC (+) Black (4) OUT 4 Pin description DC (+) NC/Analog output DC ( ) OUT Switch output Switch output 2 to 24 VDC + 2 to 24 VDC + White (2) NC/Analog output Blue () DC ( ) Use this sensor by connecting to SMC remote type display unit Series PF2W I SE PS I SE 2 SP ISA2 IS SM PF2 IF Data 6--2

185 Series PF2W 2 Dimensions: Remote Type Sensor Unit for Water PF2W5- (N) B ø Port size 45 2 (4.5) A Analog output to 5 VDC Analog output [V] 5 Min. measured flow rate value Part no. PF2W54- - PF2W52- - PF2W54- - PF2W5- - Flow direction Max. measured flow rate value Minimum measured flow rate value [l/min] Real-time flow rate [l/min] Maximum measured flow rate value [l/min] Output specifications Pulse output only Pulse output + Analog output 4 to 2 madc Analog output [ma] 2 4 Min. measured flow rate value Part no. PF2W PF2W PF2W PF2W5- -2 A 6 7 B Max. measured flow rate value Minimum measured flow rate value [l/min] Real-time flow rate [l/min] Maximum measured flow rate value [l/min]

186 Digital Flow Switch For Water Series PF2W 2 Dimensions: Remote Type Display Unit for Water PF2W -A Panel mounting type Internal circuit and wiring example to are terminal numbers SMC FLOW SWITCH UNIT RE A Sensor Black Brown Blue Series PF2W5 NC 4 2 Main circuit PF2W -A OUT2 Load OUT Load + 2 to 24 VDC SE ISE PSE I SE PS x 7.2 (= 2.6) View A 8-M Panel fitting dimension Sensor Series PF2W5 PF2W -A The applicable panel thickness is to.2 mm. Do not connect the white wire of the sensor to. Black Brown Blue NC 4 2 Main circuit Terminal block number OUT2 Load OUT Load + 2 to 24 VDC I SE 2 SP ISA2 IS SM PF2 IF Data 6--25

187 For details about certified products conforming to international standards, visit us at Digital Flow Switch, High Temperature Fluid Type For Water Series PF2W 22 How to Order Integrated display type PF2W7 2 T 27 Flow rate range Temperature range to 4 l/min 2 to 6 l/min 5 to 4 l/min Thread type Nil N F Rc NPT G Specifications Note 4) Output specifications Switch output Symbol 4 6 Accumulated pulse output T Port size /8 /2 /4 Indicator light Response time Hysteresis Power supply voltage Enclosure Operating temperature range Withstand voltage Insulation resistance Vibration resistance Impact resistance Noise resistance to 9 C Flow rate (l/min) Model Measured fluid Flow rate measurement range Set flow rate range Flow rate measuring range Minimum setting unit Accumulated pulse flow rate exchange value (Pulse width: 5 ms) Operating fluid temperature Linearity Repeatability Temperature characteristics Note ) Current consumption (No load) Weight Note 2) Port size (Rc, NPT, G) Detection type Display Note ) Real-time flow rate Display unit Operating pressure range Withstand pressure Accumulated flow range Resistance Accumulated flow Port size Applicable model PF2W74T, PF2W72T PF2W72T, PF2W74T PF2W74T Output specifications Wiring specifications Nil N m lead wire with connector Without lead wire PNP open collector 2 outputs NPN open collector 2 outputs Unit specifications Nil M With unit switching function Fixed SI unit Note) Note) Fixed unit: Real-time flow rate: l/min Accumulated flow: l PF2W74T PF2W72T PF2W74T Water, Mixture of water (5%) and ethylene glycol (5%).5 to 4.5 l/min.7 to 7. l/min.5 to 45 l/min.5 to 4.5 l/min.7 to 7. l/min.5 to 45 l/min.5 to 4 l/min 2 to 6 l/min 5 to 4 l/min.5 l/min. l/min.5 l/min.5 l/pulse. l/pulse.5 l/pulse to 9 C (With no cavitation) ±5% F.S. or less ±% F.S. or less ±5% F.S. or less ( to 9 C, based on 25 C) 7 ma or less 7 g /8 /8, /2 /2, /4 Karman vortex -digit, 7-segment LED l/min, gal (US)/min l, gal (US) to MPa.5 MPa to l Maximum load current: 8 ma; Internal voltage drop: NPN open collector V or less (With load current of 8 ma) Maximum applied voltage: V; 2 outputs PNP open collector Maximum load current: 8 ma; Internal voltage drop:.5 V or less (With load current of 8 ma); 2 outputs NPN or PNP open collector (Same as switch output) Lights up when output is ON OUT: Green; OUT2: Red sec. or less Hysteresis mode: Variable (can be set from ); Window comparator mode: -digit fixed 2 to 24 VDC (Ripple ±% or less) IP65 Operating: to 5 C, Stored: 25 to 85 C (No condensation or freezing) VAC for min. between external terminal and case 5 MΩ (5 VDC) between external terminal and case to 5 Hz at whichever is smaller:.5 mm amplitude or 98 m/s 2 acceleration in X, Y, directions for 2 hrs. each 49 m/s 2 in X, Y, directions times each Vp-p, Pulse width µs, Rise time ns Note ) ±5% F.S. or less ( to 5 C, based on 25 C), ±% F.S. or less (5 to 5 C, based on 25 C) Note 2) Without lead wire. Note ) For digital flow switch with unit switching function. (Fixed SI unit [l/min or l] will be set for switch type without the unit switching function.) Note 4) Switch output and accumulated pulse output can be selected during initial setting. Note 5) Window comparator mode Since hysteresis will reach digits, keep P_ and P_2 or n_ and n_2 apart by 7 digits or more. (In case of output OUT2, n_, 2 to be n_, 4 and P_, 2 to be P_, 4.) Note 6) The flow switch is comformed to CE mark

188 Digital Flow Switch, High Temperature Fluid Type For Water Series PF2W 2 How to Order Remote type Display unit PF2W5 2 T Specifications Model Measured fluid Detection type Flow rate measuring range Operating pressure range Withstand pressure Operating fluid temperature Linearity Note ) Repeatability Note ) Temperature characteristics Output Note 2) specifications Resistance Output for display unit Analog output Enclosure Operating temperature range Withstand voltage Insulation resistance Vibration resistance Impact resistance Noise resistance Flow rate range Power supply voltage Current consumption (No load) Weight Note ) T.5 to 4 l/min 2 to 6 l/min 5 to 4 l/min Temperature range to 9 C Nil N F PF2W54T Thread type Rc NPT G PF2W52T Water, Mixture of water (5%) and ethylene glycol (5%) Karman vortex.5 to 4 l/min 2 to 6 l/min Output specifications Nil 2 Wiring specifications Nil N Output for display unit Output for display unit + Analog output ( to 5 V) Output for display unit + Analog output (4 to 2 ma) m lead wire with connector Without lead wire Port size Symbol Port Flow rate (l/min) size Applicable model /8 PF2W54T/52T 4 6 /2 /4 PF2W52T/54T PF2W54T to MPa.5 MPa to 9 C (With no cavitation) ±5% F.S. or less ±2% F.S. or less PF2W54T 5 to 4 l/min ±2% F.S. or less (5 to 5 C based on 25 C), ±% F.S. or less ( to 5 C based on 25 C) Pulse output, N channel, open drain, output for display unit PF2W. (Specifications: Maximum load current of ma; Maximum applied voltage of V) Voltage output to 5 V within the flow rate range Linearity: ±5% F.S. or less; allowable load resistance: kω or more. Current output 4 to 2 ma within the flow rate range Linearity: ±5% F.S. or less; allowable load resistance: Ω or less with 2 VDC, 6 Ω or less with 24 VDC 2 to 24 VDC (Ripple ±% or less) 2 ma or less IP65 Operating: to 5 C, Stored: 25 to 85 C (No condensation or freezing) VAC for min. between external terminal and case 5 MΩ (5 VDC) between external terminal and case to 5 Hz at whichever is smaller:.5 mm amplitude or 98 m/s 2 acceleration in X, Y, directions for 2 hrs. each 49 m/s 2 in X, Y, directions times each Vp-p, Pulse width µs, Rise time ns 66 g Port size (Rc, NPT, G) /8 /8, /2 Note ) The system accuracy when combined with PF2W. Note 2) Output system can be selected during initial setting. Note ) Without lead wire. (Add 2 g for the types of analog output whether voltage or current output selected.) Note 4) The sensor unitis comformed to CE mark. /2, /4 Display units are the same as those of remote type digital flow switch for water (series PF2W ). Refer to page 6--9 for details. SE ISE PSE I SE PS I SE 2 SP ISA2 IS SM PF2 IF Data 6--27

189 Series PF2W 24 Flow Characteristics (Pressure loss) PF2W74T/54T PF2W72T/52T PF2W74T/54T Pressure loss (MPa) Pressure loss (MPa) Pressure loss (MPa) Flow rate (l/min) Flow rate (l/min) Flow rate (l/min) 5 4 Sensor Unit Construction Flow direction Component Parts Connectors and operating unit descriptions are the same as Series PF2A for air. Refer to page 6--. No. q w e r Description Attachment Seal Body Sensor Material Stainless steel FKM PPS PPS 6--28

190 Digital Flow Switch, High Temperature Fluid Type For Water Series PF2W 25 Dimensions: Integrated Display Type for Water FLOW SWITCH OUT OUT2 FOR WATER U P DOWN Internal circuit and wiring example to are terminal numbers. Brown Load OUT 4 Black Load OUT White to 24 VDC Blue PF2W7 T- -27 (-M) Main circuit SE ISE PSE 77 4-ø Flow direction (4.5) 4 2-Port size 4 Main circuit Brown OUT 4 Black Load White 2 OUT2 + 2 Load to 24 VDC Blue PF2W7 T- -67 (-M) Connector pin numbers Pin no Pin description DC (+) OUT2 DC ( ) OUT I SE PS I SE 2 SP ISA2 IS SM PF2 IF Data 6--29

191 Series PF2W 26 Dimensions: Remote Type Sensor Unit for Water PF2W54T/52T/54T- (N) 2 6 B 2.6 Internal circuit and wiring example to are terminal numbers. Sensor unit Display unit (PF2W / ) Brown 2 to 24 VDC Main circuit NC 2 White 4 8 Switch + Black output 4 7 Blue 5 Main circuit (4.5) A 4-ø4.5 Analog output to 5 VDC Analog output [V] 5 Min. measured flow rate value Part no. PF2W54T- - PF2W52T- - PF2W54T Flow direction Max. measured flow rate value Analog output [ma] Real-time flow rate [l/min] Minimum measured Maximum measured flow rate value [l/min] flow rate value [l/min] to 2 madc Port size 4 Output specifications Pulse output only Pulse output + Analog output Min. measured flow rate value Part no. PF2W54T- -2 PF2W52T- -2 PF2W54T- -2 Max. measured flow rate value A B Main circuit PF2W5 T- Display unit Sensor unit (PF2W / ) Brown to 24 VDC Analog output 2 White Load 4 8 Switch + 4 output 7 Black 5 Blue Sensor unit Main circuit Real-time flow rate [l/min] Minimum measured Maximum measured flow rate value [l/min] flow rate value [l/min] Refer to PF2W on page for dimensions of remote type display unit. Analog output 2 Load White 4 Black Blue Wiring Main Circuit Main circuit PF2W5 T- - Display unit (PF2W / ) Brown 2 to 24 VDC Main circuit PF2W5 T Brown () DC (+) Black (4) OUT Switch output + White (2) NC/Analog output Blue () DC ( ) Use this sensor by connecting to SMC remote type display unit Series PF2W. Connector pin numbers 4 Pin no Pin description DC (+) NC/Analog output DC ( ) OUT 6--

192 Digital Flow Switch Series PF2A/PF2W 27 Functions: PF2A, PF2W Refer to the operation manual how to set and to operate. Flow rate measurement selection Real-time flow rate and accumulated flow rate can be selected. Up to of flow rate value can be accumulated. Output types Real-time switch output, accumulated switch output, or accumulated pulse output can be selected as an output type. Unit switching For Air Display CFM = ft /min Real-time flow rate l/min CFM x 2, CFM x Accumulated flow l ft x High Flow Rate Type (For Air) Display Real-time flow rate l/min CFM Accumulated flow l, m, m x ft, ft x, ft x 6 High Temperature Fluid Type (For Water) Display Real-time flow rate Accumulated flow l/min l GPM gal (US) GPM = gal (US)/min Note) Fixed SI unit [l/min or l] will be set for the type without the unit switching function. Flow rate conversion Basic state: C,. kpa Standard state: 2 C,. kpa, 65%RH (ANR) Switchable between these states. Flow rate measuring unit confirmation This function allows to confirm the accumulated flow rate when real-time flow rate is selected and to confirm the real-time flow rate when accumulated flow rate is selected. Error correction LED display Contents Solution Note ) Note 2) Note ) Note 2) Note ) Note ) Note 2) A current of more than 8mA is flowing to OUT A current of more than Check the load and wiring 8mA is flowing to OUT2. for OUT2. The setting data has changed for whatever reasons. The flow rate is over the flow rate measurement range (for air only). Check the load and wiring for OUT. Perform the RE operation, and reset all data again. Reduce the flow rate until it is within the flow rate measurement range, using an adjustment valve. Note ) Applicable for all integrated display types other than series PF2A7 H and remote type sensor display units. Note 2) Only for series PF2A7 H. Key lock This function prevents incorrect operations such as changing the set value accidentally. Accumulation clearance This is to clear the accumulated value. Initialization of setting (Only for series PF2A7 H) This is to restore the setting to the initial state when dispatched from the factory. Real-time switch output ( ) OUT OUT2 is the same. P Output mode n YES NO YES NO Accumulated switch output ( ) OUT P Output mode n Note ) ON OFF ON OFF P- High flow rate n- High flow rate Accumulated pulse output ( ) OUT Note ) Output mode is set to inverted output at the factory before shipment. P Output mode ON OFF ON Note ) OFF n 5 msec Hysteresis mode ON OFF P-2 P- High flow rate Window comparator mode H: Hysteresis H H ON OFF Hysteresis mode ON OFF P- P-2 High flow rate n-2 n- High flow rate Window comparator mode H: Hysteresis ON OFF H H n- n-2 High flow rate Note ) Output mode is set to inverted output at the factory before shipment. Note ) For digital flow switch with unit switching function. (Fixed SI unit [l/min, or l, m or m x ] will be set for switch types without unit switching function.) Refer to the specifications of display unit for the flow rate value per pulse. SE ISE PSE I SE PS I SE 2 SP ISA2 IS SM PF2 IF Data 6--

193 Series PF2A/PF2W Specific Product Precautions Be sure to read before handling. 28 Warning Design and Selection. Operate the switch only within the specified voltage. Use of the switch outside the range of the specified voltage can cause not only malfunction and damage of the switch but also electrocution and fire. 2. Do not exceed the maximum allowable load specification. A load exceeding the maximum load specification can cause damage to the switch.. Do not use a load that generates surge voltage. Although surge protection is installed in the circuit at the output side of the switch, damage may still occur if a surge is applied repeatedly. When a surge generating a load such as a relay or solenoid is directly driven, use a type of switch with a built-in surge absorbing element. 4. Since the type of fluid varies depending on the product, be sure to verify the specifications. The switches do not have an explosion proof rating. To prevent a possible fire hazard, do not use with flammable gases or fluids. 5. Monitor the internal voltage drop of the switch. When operating below a specified voltage, it is possible that the load may be ineffective even though the pressure switch function is normal. Therefore, the formula below should be satisfied after confirming the minimum operating voltage of the load. Supply voltage Internal voltage drop of switch > Minimum operating voltage of load [For air] 6. Use the switch within the specified flow rate measurement and operating pressure. Operating beyond the specified flow rate and operating pressure can damage the switch. [For water] 7. Use the switch within the specified flow rate measurement and operating pressure. Operating beyond the specified flow rate and operating pressure can damage the switch. Avoid especially the application of pressure above specifications through a water hammer. <Examples of pressure reduction measures> a) Use a device such as a water hammer relief valve to slow the valve s closing speed. b) Absorb impact pressure by using an accumulator or elastic piping material such as a rubber hose. c) Keep the piping length as short as possible. 8. Design the system so that the fluid always fills the detection passage. Especially for vertical mounting, introduce the fluid from the bottom to the top. 9. Operate at a flow rate within the flow rate measurement range. If operated outside of the flow rate measurement range, the Karman vortex will not be generated and normal measurement will not be possible. Design and Selection [Series PF2A7 H]. Sudden increase of flow rate may destroy the flow sensor. Ensure to open/close the flow control valve not to exceed the maximum flow rate measurement values. Caution. Data of the flow switch will be stored even after the power is turned off. Input data will be stored in EEPROM so that the data will not be lost after the flow switch is turned off. (Data can be rewritten for up to one million times, and data will be stored for up to 2 years.) Warning Thread Rc /8 Rc /4 Rc /8 Rc /2 Tightening torque N m 7 to 9 2 to 4 22 to to Mounting. Mount switches using the proper tightening torque. When a switch is tightened beyond the specified tightening torque, the switch may be damaged. On the other hand, tightening below the specified tightening torque may cause the installation screws to come loose during operation. Thread Rc /4 Rc Rc /2 Rc 2 Tightening torque N m 28 to 6 to 8 48 to 5 48 to 5 2. Apply wrench only to the metal part of the pipings when installing the flow switch onto the system piping. Do not apply wrench to anything other than the piping attachment as this may damage the switch.. Monitor the flow direction of the fluid. Install and connect piping so that fluid flows in the direction of the arrow indicated on the body. 4. Remove dirt and dust from inside the piping using an air blower before connecting piping to the switch. 5. Do not drop or bump. Do not drop, bump, or apply excessive impacts (49 m/s 2 ) while handling. Although the external body of the switch (switch case) may not be damaged, the inside of the switch could be damaged and cause a malfunction. 6. Hold the body of the switch when handling. The tensile strength of the cord is 49N. Applying a greater pulling force on it can cause a malfunction. When handling, hold the body of the switch do not dangle it from the cord. 7. Do not use until you can verify that equipment can operate properly. Following mounting, repair, or retrofit, verify correct mounting by conducting suitable function and leakage tests after piping and power connections have been made. 8. Avoid the mounting orientation with the bottom of the body facing up. The switch can be mounted in any way such as vertically or horizontally, however, avoid the mounting orientation with the bracket on the bottom of the body facing upward. 6--2

194 Series PF2A/PF2W Specific Product Precautions 2 Be sure to read before handling. 29 Warning Warning Mounting [For air] 9. Never mount a switch in a place that will be used as a scaffold during piping. Damage may occur if an excessive load is applied to the switch.. Be sure to allow straight pipe length that is minimum 8 times the port size upstream and downstream of the switch piping. When abruptly reducing the size of piping or when there is a restriction such as a valve on the upstream side, the pressure distribution in the piping changes and makes accurate measurement impossible. Therefore, flow restriction measures such as these should be implemented on the downstream side of the switch. [For water]. Never mount a switch in a place that will be used as a scaffold during piping. Damage may occur if an excessive load is applied to the switch. Especially when the switch supports the piping, do not apply a load of 5 N m or more to the metal part of the switch. 2. Be sure to allow straight pipe length that is minimum 8 times the port size upstream and downstream of the switch piping. When abruptly reducing the size of piping or when there is a restriction such as a valve on the upstream side, the pressure distribution in the piping changes and makes accurate measurement impossible. Therefore, flow restriction measures such as these should be implemented on the downstream side of the switch. When used with the downstream side open, be careful of the cavitation that is prone to occur. Wiring. Verify the color and terminal number when wiring. Incorrect wiring can cause the switch to be damaged and malfunction. Verify the color and the terminal number in the instruction manual when wiring. 2. Avoid repeatedly bending or stretching the lead wire. Repeatedly applying bending stress or stretching force to the lead wire will cause it to break.. Confirm proper insulation of wiring. Make sure that there is no faulty wiring insulation (contact with other circuits, ground fault, improper insulation between terminals, etc.). Damage may occur due to excess current flow into a switch. 4. Do not wire in conjunction with power lines or high voltage lines. Wire separately from power lines and high voltage lines, avoiding wiring in the same conduit with these lines. Control circuits including switches may malfunction due to noise from these other lines. 5. Do not allow loads to short circuit. Although switches indicate excess current error if loads are short circuited, all incorrect wiring connections cannot be protected. Take precautions to avoid incorrect wiring. Warning. When using a switch for high temperature fluid, the switch itself also becomes hot due to the high temperature fluid. Avoid touching the switch directly as this may cause a burn. Warning Usage Operating Environment. Never use in the presence of explosive gases. The switches do not have an explosion proof rating. Never use in the presence of an explosive gas as this may cause a serious explosion. 2. Mount switches in locations where there is no vibration greater than 98 m/s 2, or impact greater than 49 m/s 2.. Do not use in an area where surges are generated. When there are units that generate a large amount of surge in the area around pressure switches, (e.g., solenoid type lifters, high frequency induction furnaces, motors, etc.) this may cause deterioration or damage to the switches' internal circuitry. Avoid sources of surge generation and crossed lines. 4. Switches are not equipped with surge protection against lightning. Flow switches are CE compliant; however, they are not equipped with surge protection against lightning. Lightning surge protection measures should be applied directly to system components as necessary. 5. Avoid using switches in an environment where the likelihood of splashing or spraying of liquids exists. Switches are dustproof and splashproof; however, avoid using in an environment where the likelihood of heavy splashing or spraying of liquids exists. Since the display unit of the remote type switches featured here is not dust or splash proof, the use in an environment where liquid splashing or spraying exists must be avoided. [For air] 6. Use the switch within the specified fluid and ambient temperature range. Fluid and ambient temperatures are to 5 C. Take measures to prevent freezing fluid when below 5 C, since this may cause damage to the switch and lead to a malfunction. The installation of an air dryer is recommended for eliminating condensate and moisture. Never use the switch in an environment where there are drastic temperature changes even when these temperatures are operated within the specified temperature range. [For water] 7. Use the switch within the specified fluid and ambient temperature range. The fluid and ambient temperatures range for the switches is to 5 C (and to 9 C for high temperature fluid). Take measures to prevent freezing fluid when below 5 C, since this may cause damage to the switch and lead to a malfunction. Never use the switch in an environment where there are drastic temperature changes even when these temperatures fall within the specified temperature range. 6-- SE ISE PSE I SE PS I SE 2 SP ISA2 IS SM PF2 IF Data

195 Series PF2A/PF2W Specific Product Precautions Be sure to read before handling. Warning. Perform periodical inspections to ensure proper operation of the switch. Unexpected malfunctions may cause possible danger. 2. Take precautions when using the switch for an interlock circuit. When a pressure switch is used for an interlock circuit, devise a multiple interlock system to prevent trouble or malfunctioning, verify the operation of the switch and interlock function on a regular basis.. Do not disassemble or perform any conversion work on flow switches. Measured Fluid Warning. Check regulators and flow adjustment valves before introducing the fluid. If pressure or flow rate beyond the specified range are applied to the switch, the sensor unit may be damaged. [For air] 2. The fluids that the switch can measure accurately are nitrogen and dry air. However, only dry air can be measured with the high flow rate type. Please note that accuracy cannot be guaranteed when other fluids are used.. Never use flammable fluids. The flow velocity sensor heats up to approximately 5 C. 4. Install a filter or mist separator on the upstream side when there is a possibility of condensate and foreign matter being mixed in with the fluid. The rectifying device built into the switch will be clogged up and accurate measurement will no longer be possible. [For water] 5. The fluid that the switch can measure accurately is water. Please note that accuracy cannot be guaranteed when other fluids are used. Detection principle of digital flow switch for air A heated thermistor is installed in the passage, and fluid absorbs heat from the thermistor as it is introduced to the passage. The thermistor's resistance value increases as it loses heat. Since the resistance value increase ratio has a uniform relationship to the fluid velocity, the fluid velocity can be detected by measuring the resistance value. To further compensate the fluid and ambient temperature, the temperature sensor is also built into the switch to allow stable measurement within the operating temperature range. Temperature compensation element Fluid velocity detection element 6--4 Maintenance This flow switch uses l/min as the flow rate indicator unit. The mass flow is converted and displayed under the conditions of C and. kpa. The conversion conditions can be switched to 2 C and. kpa with high flow type switches. Warning 6. Never use flammable fluids. 7. Install a filter on the inlet side when there is a possibility of condensate and foreign matter being mixed in with the fluid. If foreign matter adheres to the switch s vortex generator or vortex detector, accurate measurement will no longer be possible. Warning Others. Since switch output remains OFF while a message is displayed after the power is turned on, start measurement after a value is displayed. 2. Perform settings after stopping control systems. When the switch s initial setting and flow rate setting are performed, output maintains the condition prior to the settings. With the, 2, and 5 l/min type switches for air, output turns OFF when the switch s initial setting and flow rate setting are preformed.. Do not apply excessive rotational force to the display unit. The integrated type display unit can rotate 6. Rotation is controlled by the stopper; however, the stopper may be damaged if the display unit is turned with excessive force. [For air] 4. Be certain to turn on the power when the flow rate is at zero. Allow an interval of minutes after turning on the power, as there are some changes in the display. 5. Flow rate unit Switch measures at mass flow rates without being influenced by temperature and pressure. The switches use l/min as the flow rate indicator unit, in which the volumetric flow is substituted for mass flow at C and. kpa. The volumetric flow rate at 2 C,. kpa, and 65% RH (ANR) can be displayed with the high flow rate type switches for air. Detection principle of digital flow switch for water When an elongated object (vortex generator) is placed in the flow, reciprocal vortexes are generated on the downstream side. These vortexes are stable under certain conditions, and their frequency is proportional to the flow velocity, resulting the following formula. f = k x v f: Frequency of vortex v: Flow velocity k: Proportional constant (determined by the vortex generator's dimensions and shape). Therefore, the flow rate can be measured by detecting this frequency. Fluid Vortex generator Measured Fluid Vortex detector Top view

196 Series PF2A/PF2W Specific Product Precautions 4 Be sure to read before handling. Caution <For Air: PF2A> Sensor PF2A5 PF2A55 PF2A5 PF2A52 PF2A55 <For Water: PF2W> Sensor PF2W54 PF2W54T PF2W52 PF2W52T PF2W54 PF2W54T PF2W5 Flow rate range l/min 5 l/min l/min 2 l/min 5 l/min l/min 2 l/min 5 l/min l/min l/min.5 l/min 5 l/min 2.5 l/min l/min 5 l/min.5 l/min 4 l/min.5 l/min 2 l/min.7 l/min Set Flow Rate Range and Rated Flow Rate Range Set the flow rate within the rated flow rate range. The regulating flow rate range is the range of flow rate that can be set on the controller. The rated flow rate range is the range of flow rate that satisfies the specifications (accuracy, linearity, etc.) of the sensor. Although it is possible to set a value outside the rated flow rate range, the specifications will not be guaranteed even if the value stays within the regulating flow rate range. 5 l/min.5 l/min.5 l/min 4.5 l/min 5 l/min 52.5 l/min Flow rate range 6 l/min 7l/min l/min 5 l/min 2 l/min 2 l/min l/min 2 l/min 25 l/min 5 l/min 5 l/min 525 l/min.5 l/min 2 l/min 5 l/min l/min 2 l/min 4 l/min l/min 4 l/min 45 l/min l/min l/min 7 l/min l/min Rated flow rate range of sensor Set flow rate range of sensor SE ISE PSE I SE PS I SE 2 SP ISA2 IS SM PF2 IF Data 6--5

197 Digital Flow Switch For Deionized Water and Chemicals Series PF2D SE ISE Dust generation of particles/cc or less (Average number) Karman vortex eliminates moving parts and allows low dust generation. Particle Characteristics (Reference) Particle ratio [number/cc] Duration of flow [min] 2 or particles/cc The data was obtained by performing an actual minutes supersonic cleaning using an average 6 MΩ cm of deionized water at class clean room ( l/min flow rate). The diameter of the measured particles ranges from. to.5 µm. The flow rate used during measuring is cc/min. Processing chart for Series PF2D Remote type sensor unit Assembly Common environment Supersonic cleaning Double-packing Drying Clean room class Swept Flow Characteristics (Reference) Body and sensor New PFA Tube Super PFA Three types of flow range.4 to 4 l/ min (PF2D54).8 to 2 l /min (PF2D52) 4. to 4 l /min (PF2D54) Swept flow characteristics Tapered side seal minimizes dead volume to reduce accumulation of liquid pool. Ratio of resistance [kω m] Duration of flow [min] Body Sensor Fill the flow path with sulfuric acid and leave it for minutes. After disposing the sulfuric acid, flush the flow path out with deionized water and measure the resistance rate of the fluid that is discharged from the downstream side. A quick recovery time indicates little liquid pool. Tube Vibration reducing seals Malfunctions (output errors) that would otherwise be caused by vibration are prevented. 4 types of outputs available With button operation, 4 types of output specification combinations are available. Output 2 4 Switch output Switch output Accumulated pulse output Accumulated pulse output PSE I SE PS I SE 2 SP ISA2 IS SM PF2 IF Data Shipment Output 2 Switch output Accumulated pulse output Switch output Accumulated pulse output 6--7

198 2 Digital Flow Switch For Deionized Water and Chemicals Series PF2D How to Order Remote type Sensor unit PF2D5 2 Flow rate range to 4 l/min.8 to 2 l/min 4 to 4 l/min Specifications for Sensor Unit Model Measured fluid Detection style Flow rate measuring range Operating pressure range Note 2) Proof pressure Note ) Operating fluid temperature Linearity Note 4) Repeatability Temperature characteristics Output specifications Power supply voltage Current consumption Environmental resistance Enclosure Weight Port size Wetted material Pulse output Analog output Operating temperature range Voltage resistance Insulation resistance Vibration resistance Impact resistance Noise resistance 9 Port size (inch) /8 /2 /4 PF2D54 PF2D52 PF2D54 Output specifications 2 Output for display unit Note ) + analog output ( to 5 V) Output for display unit Note ) + analog output (4 to 2 ma) Note ) Output for the display units of PF2D / PF2D54 PF2D52 PF2D54 Liquid not to corrode nor erode deionized water and/or Teflon. Viscosity: mpa s ( cp) or less Karman vortex.4 to 4 l/min.8 to 2 l /min Note ) 4 to 4 l/min to MPa to.6 MPa.5 MPa.9 MPa to 9 C ±2.5%F.S. or less (at 25 C water) ±%F.S. or less (at 25 C water) ±5%F.S. or less ( to 5 C) Pulse output, N channel, open drain, output for display unit PF2D/ (Specifications: Maximum load current of ma; Maximum applied voltage of V) Voltage output Note 5) to 5 V within the flow rate range Linearity: ±2% F.S. or less, Allowable load resistance: kω or more Current output Note 6) 4 to 2 ma within the flow rate range Linearity: ±2% F.S. or less, Allowable load resistance: Ω or less with 2 VDC, 6 Ω or less with 24 VDC 2 to 24 VDC (Ripple ±% or less) 2 ma or less (Without load) IP65 Operating: to 5 C, Stored: 25 to 85 C in stock (No freezing or condensation) VAC for min between external terminals and case 5 MΩ or more (5 VDC) between external terminals and case 4.9 m/s 2 49 m/s 2 to X, Y, directions times for each Vp-p, Pulse width: µs, Standing: ns 4 g (Without lead wire) 225 g (Without lead wire) /8 inch tube /2 inch tube /4 inch tube Body: New PFA, Sensor: New PFA, Tube: Super PFA Note ).6 to 2 l/min (. MPa) with viscosity of mpa s ( cp) or less Note 2) The operating pressure range drops according to the fluid temperature. See attached graph. Note ).5 times of the maximum operating pressure and varying with fluid temperature. Note 4) The system accuracy when combined with PF2D. Note 5) When the voltage output is selected. Note 6) When the current output is selected. Note 7) The sensor unit is conformed to CE mark. Operating pressure [MPa]..5 PF254 PF254/ Fluid temperature [ C] 6--8

199 Digital Flow Switch For Deionized Water and Chemicals How to Order Series PF2D Remote type Display unit PF2D A M Specifications for Display Unit Model Flow rate measurement range Note ) Set flow rate range Note ) Minimum setting unit Note ) Accumulated pulse flow rate exchange value (Pulse width: 5 ms) Note ) Note 2) Real-time flow rate Display units Accumulated flow Accumulated flow range Linearity Note ) Repeatability Temperature characteristics Current consumption Weight Note 4) Output specifications Environmental resistance Switch output Accumulated pulse output Enclosure Operating temperature range Voltage resistance Insulation resistance Vibration resistance Impact resistance Noise resistance Display Indicator light Power supply voltage Response time Hysteresis Output specifications NPN open collector 2 outputs PNP open collector 2 outputs Panel mounting Unit specifications Nil With unit switching function M Fixed SI unit Note ) Note ) Fixed unit: Real-time flow rate: l/min Accumulated flow: l PF2D/.25 to 4.5 l/min. to 2. l/min 2.5 to 45 l/min.25 to 4.5 l/min. to 2. l/min 2.5 to 45 l/min.5 l/min. l/min.5 l/min.5 l/pulse. l/pulse.5 l/pulse NPN open collector (PF2D, PF2W, PF2W) PNP open collector (PF2D, PF2W, PF2W) l/min, gal (US)/min l, gal (US) to l ±2.5% F.S. or less ±.5% F.S. or less ±% F.S. or less (5 to 5 C) ±2% F.S. or less ( to 5 C) 6 ma or less 45 g Maximum load current: 8 ma Internal voltage drop:.5 V or less (With load current of 8 ma) Maximum applied voltage: V 2 outputs Maximum load current: 8 ma Internal voltage drop:.5 V or less (With load current of 8 ma) 2 outputs NPN open collector or PNP open collector (Same as switch output) IP4 Operating: to 5 C, Stored: 25 to 85 C (No freezing or condensation) VAC for min between external terminals and case 5 MΩ or more (5 VDC Mega) between external terminals and case to 5 Hz at whichever is smaller:.5 mm amplitude or 98 m/s 2 acceleration in X, Y, directions for 2 hrs each 49 m/s 2 to X, Y, directions times for each Vp-p, Pulse width: µs, Standing: ns -digits 7-segment LED ON: when light is on, OUT: Green; OUT2: Red 2 to 24 VDC (Ripple ±% or less) sec. or less Hysteresis mode: Adjustable (can be set from ) Window comparator mode Note 5) : Fixed ( digits) Note ) The value varies depending on set flow range Note 2) For digital flow switch with unit switching function. (Fixed SI unit [l/min or l] will be set for switch types without unit switching function.) Note ) The system accuracy when combined with PF2D5. Note 4) Switch output and accumulated pulse output can be selected using the control button operation during initial setting. Output Output Switch output Switch output Switch output Accumulated pulse output Accumulated pulse output Switch output Accumulated pulse output Accumulated pulse output Note 5) Window comparator mode: Since hysteresis (H) will reach digits, keep P_ and P_2 or n_ and n_2 apart by 7 digits more. (In case of output OUT2, n_, 2 to be n_, 4 and P_, 2 to be P_, 4.) Note 6) The display unit is conformed to CE mark SE ISE PSE I SE PS I SE 2 SP ISA2 IS SM PF2 IF Data

200 Series PF2D 4 Flow Characteristics (Pressure characteristics) PF2D54 PF2D52 PF2D Pressure loss [MPa] Pressure loss [MPa] Pressure loss [MPa] Construction PF2D54/52 PF2D Flow rate (l/min) o! q t i o! u!!2 y w! u!!2ywr e! q t i r! e Flow rate (l/min) 8 2 Component Parts No. q w e r t y u i o!!! Flow rate (l/min) Description Body Sensor Tube Housing A Housing B Housing C Bushing Cap Gasket O-ring Thread Lead wire Material New PFA New PFA Super PFA PPS PPS PPS POM PPS FKM FKM Stainless steel 4 PVC 6--4

201 Digital Flow Switch For Deionized Water and Chemicals Series PF2D 5 Dimensions: Separate Type Sensor Unit PF2D54-/52- Internal circuit and wiring example øa z to, are terminal numbers. Main circuit Sensor Analog output White Brown Load Black Blue Display (PF2D / ) 2 4 Main circuit Switch output or Pulse output + 2 to 24 VDC SE ISE PSE PF2D54-9 Analog Output Current [ma] ø ø4.5 Voltage [V].4 4 (in case of PF2D54).8 2 (in case of PF2D52) 4 4 (in case of PF2D54) Flow rate [l/min] Flow direction 4-ø4.5 Model PF2D52 PF2D54 A Main circuit Sensor Analog output White Main circuit PF2D5 - - Brown Load Black Blue Display (PF2D / ) 2 4 Main circuit PF2D Wiring Switch output or Pulse output + Brown () DC (+) Black (4) OUT 2 to 24 VDC White (2) Analog output Blue () DC ( ) Use this sensor by connecting to SMC remote type display unit Series I SE PS I SE 2 SP ISA2 IS SM PF2 IF Data 6--4

202 Series PF2D 6 Dimensions: Separate Type Display Unit PF2D -A Panel mounting type SMC FLOW SWITCH RE UNIT A Internal circuit and wiring example z to, are terminal numbers. Sensor Black Brown Blue Series PF2D5 NC 4 2 Main circuit PF2D-A(-M) OUT2 Load OUT Load + 2 to 24 VDC x 7.2 (= 2.6) View A 8-M Panel fitting dimension The applicable panel thickness is to.2 mm. Sensor Black Brown Blue Series PF2D5 NC Main circuit PF2D-A(-M) OUT2 Load OUT Load + 2 to 24 VDC Do not connect the white wire of the sensor to c of the display unit. Terminal block number 6--42

203 Digital Flow Switch For Deionized Water and Chemicals Series PF2D 7 Functions/PF2D Refer to the operation manual how to set and to operate. Flow rate measurement selection Real-time flow rate and accumulated flow rate can be selected. Up to of flow rate value can be accumulated. Output types Real-time switch output, accumulated switch output, or accumulated pulse output can be selected as an output type. Unit switching Display Real-time flow rate l/min GPM GPM = gal (US)/min Accumulated flow l gal (US) Note) Fixed SI unit (l/min, l, m or m x ) will be set for the type without the unit switching function. Flow rate measuring unit confirmation This function allows to confirm the accumulated flow rate when real-time flow rate is selected and to confirm the real-time flow rate when accumulated flow rate is selected. Error correction LED display Contents Solution Key lock A current of more than 8 ma is flowing to OUT The setting data has changed for whatever reasons. The flow rate is over the flow rate measurement range. Check the load and wiring for OUT Perform the RE operation, and reset all data again. Reduce the flow rate until it is within the flow rate range, using an adjustment valve. This function prevents incorrect operations such as changing the set value accidentally. Accumulation clearance This is to clear the accumulated value. Real-time switch output ( ) OUT For OUT2 is the same. P Output mode Note ) n Note ) Output mode is set to inverted output at the factory before shipment. Note ) Output mode is set to inverted output at the factory before shipment. Note ) Refer to the specifications of display unit for the flow rate value per pulse. YES NO YES NO Accumulated switch output ( ) OUT P Output mode n Note ) ON Hysteresis mode ON OFF P-2 P- Real-time flow rate Window comparator mode H: Hysteresis H H ON OFF P- P-2 Real-time flow rate Hysteresis mode ON OFF n-2 n- Real-time flow rate Window comparator mode H: Hysteresis ON OFF OFF P- Accumulated flow rate ON OFF n- Accumulated flow rate Accumulated pulse output ( ) OUT P Output mode ON OFF ON Note ) OFF n 5 msec H H n- n-2 Real-time flow rate SE ISE PSE I SE PS I SE 2 SP ISA2 IS SM PF2 IF Data 6--4

204 8 Applicable Fluid Compatibility check list: Materials of digital flow switch for deionized water and chemicals and fluid Chemical Compatibility Acetone Ammonium hydroxide Isobutyl alcohol Isopropyl alcohol X Hydrochloric acid Ozone Hydrogen peroxide Ethyl acetate Butyl acetate Nitric acid (Except fuming nitric acid) Deionized water Sodium hydroxide Ultra deionized water Toluene Hydrofluoric acid Sulfuric acid (Except fuming sulfuric acid) Phosphoric acid Concentration 5% or less 5 C or less Concentration % or less Concentration 5% or less Concentration 2% or less Concentration % or less Note ) The material and fluid compatibility check list provides reference values as a guide only. Note 2) Please consult with SMC for made to order specifications such as: Teflon coated threads to prevent rust/corrosion when in contact with strong acid or alkali. Compatibility is indicated for fluid temperatures at C or less. Please consult with SMC regarding fluids other than the above. Please consult with SMC regarding operating conditions. The product is not explosion proof. Please be sure to take measures to guard it from explosive gas when using explosive fluid. X X Table symbols : Can be used : Can be used under certain conditions X : Cannot be used 6--44

205 Series PF2D Specific Product Precautions Be sure to read before handling. 9 Warning Design and Selection. Operate the switch only within the specified voltage. Use of the switch outside the range of the specified voltage can cause not only malfunction and damage of the switch but also electrocution and fire. 2. Do not exceed the maximum allowable load specification. A load exceeding the maximum load specification can cause damage to the switch.. Do not use a load that generates surge voltage. Although surge protection is installed in the circuit at the output side of the switch, damage may still occur if a surge is applied repeatedly. When a surge generating a load such as a relay or solenoid is directly driven, use a type of switch with a built-in surge absorbing element. 4. Be sure to verify the applicable fluid. The switch does not have an explosion proof rating. To prevent possible fire hazard, do not use with flammable gases or fluids. 5. Monitor the internal voltage drop of the switch. When operating below a specified voltage, it is possible that the load may be ineffective even though the pressure switch function is normal. Therefore, the formula below should be satisfied after confirming the minimum operating voltage of the load. Supply voltage Internal voltage drop of switch > Minimum operating voltage of load 6. Use the switch within the specified flow rate measurement and operating pressure. Operating beyond the specified flow rate and operating pressure can damage the switch. Avoid especially the application of pressure above specifications through a water hammer. <Examples of pressure reduction measures> a) Use a device such as a water hammer relief valve to slow the valve s closing speed. b) Absorb impact pressure by using an accumulator or elastic piping material such as a rubber hose. c) Keep the piping length as short as possible. 7. Design the system so that the fluid always fills the detection passage. Especially for vertical mounting, introduce the fluid from the bottom to the top. 8. Operate at a flow rate within the flow rate measurement range. If operated outside of the flow rate measurement range, the Karman vortex will not be generated and normal measurement will not be possible. 9. Never use flammable fluids and/or penetrable fluids. These can cause fire, explosion or corrosion. Refer to MSDA (material safety data sheet) when using chemicals. Design and Selection Caution. Data of the flow switch will be stored even after the power is turned off. Input data will be stored in EEPROM so that the data will not be lost after the flow switch is turned off. (Data can be rewritten for up to one million times, and data will be stored for up to 2 years.) Warning Mounting. Monitor the flow direction of the fluid. Install and connect piping so that fluid flows in the direction of the arrow indicated on the body. 2. Remove dirt and dust from inside the piping using an air blower before connecting piping to the switch.. Do not drop or bump. Do not drop, bump, or apply excessive impacts (49 m/s 2 ) while handling. Although the external body of the switch (switch case) may not be damaged, the inside of the switch could be damaged and cause a malfunction. 4. Hold the body of the switch when handling. The tensile strength of the cord is 49 N. Applying a greater pulling force on it can cause a malfunction. When handling, hold the body of the switch do not dangle it from the cord. 5. Do not use until you can verify that equipment can operate properly. Following mounting, repair, or retrofit, verify correct mounting by conducting suitable function and leakage tests after piping and power connections have been made. 6. Never mount a switch in a place that will be used as a scaffold during piping. 7. Be sure to allow straight pipe length that is minimum 8 times the port size upstream and downstream of the switch piping. When abruptly reducing the size of piping or when there is a restriction such as a valve on the inlet side, the pressure distribution in the piping changes and makes accurate measurement impossible. Therefore, flow restriction measures such as these should be implemented on the outlet side of the switch. When used with the outlet side open, be careful of the cavitation that is prone to occur. SE ISE PSE I SE PS I SE 2 SP ISA2 IS SM PF2 IF Data 6--45

206 Series PF2D Specific Product Precautions 2 Be sure to read before handling. Warning Wiring. Verify the color and terminal number when wiring. Incorrect wiring can cause the switch to be damaged and malfunction. Verify the color and the terminal number in the instruction manual when wiring. 2. Avoid repeatedly bending or stretching the lead wire. Repeatedly applying bending stress or stretching force to the lead wire will cause it to break.. Confirm proper insulation of wiring. Make sure that there is no faulty wiring insulation (contact with other circuits, ground fault, improper insulation between terminals, etc.). Damage may occur due to excess current flow into a switch. 4. Do not wire in conjunction with power lines or high voltage lines. Wire separately from power lines and high voltage lines, avoiding wiring in the same conduit with these lines. Control circuits including switches may malfunction due to noise from these other lines. 5. Do not allow loads to short circuit. Although switches indicate excess current error if loads are short circuited, all incorrect wiring connections such as power supply polarity cannot be protected. Take precautions to avoid incorrect wiring. Usage Warning. When using a switch for high temperature fluid, the switch itself also becomes hot due to the high temperature fluid. Avoid touching the switch directly as this may cause a burn. Operating Environment Warning. Never use in the presence of explosive gases. The switches do not have an explosion proof rating. Never use in the presence of an explosive gas as this may cause a serious explosion. 2. Mount switches in locations where there is no vibration greater than 98 m/s 2, or no impact greater than 49 m/s 2.. Do not use in an area where surges are generated. When there are units that generate a large amount of surge in the area around pressure switches, (e.g., solenoid type lifters, high frequency induction furnaces, motors, etc.) this may cause deterioration or damage to the switches internal circuitry. Avoid sources of surge generation and crossed lines. 4. Switches are not equipped with surge protection against lightning. Flow switches are CE compliant; however, they are not equipped with surge protection against lightening. Lightening surge protection measures should be applied directly to system components as necessary. 5. Avoid using switches in an environment where the likelihood of splashing or spraying of liquids exists. Switches are dustproof and splashproof; however, avoid using in an environment where the likelihood of heavy splashing or spraying of water and/or oil exist. Since the display unit of the remote type switches featured here is not dust or splash proof, the use in an environment where water and/or oil splashing or spraying exists must be avoided. Warning Maintenance. Perform periodical inspections to ensure proper operation of the switch. Unexpected malfunctions may cause possible danger. 2. Take precautions when using the switch for an interlock circuit. When a pressure switch is used for an interlock circuit, devise a multiple interlock system to prevent trouble or malfunctioning. Verify the operation of the switch and interlock function on a regular basis.. Do not disassemble or perform any conversion work on flow switches. 4. Check the following during regular maintenance to avoid damage and loss because of chemicals. a) Do not touch the remaining chemicals in piping and/or digital flow switch. b) Verify the names and characteristics of using chemicals and treat them accordingly

207 Series PF2D Specific Product Precautions Be sure to read before handling. Measured Fluid Warning. Check regulators and flow adjustment valves before introducing the fluid. If pressure or flow rate beyond the specified range are applied to the switch, the sensor unit may be damaged. 2. Be sure to take preventive measures not to expose the switch to inflammable and/or explosive gases when using inflammable fluid.. Place the filter on the upstream side when extraneous material can be infected. Accurate measurement cannot be fulfilled when extraneous material is adherent to the vortex generator and the vortex detector of the switch. Caution Set Flow Rate Range and Rated Flow Rate Range Set the flow rate within the rated flow rate measuring range. The set flow rate range is the range of flow rate that is possible in setting at the controller side. The flow rate measuring range is the range that satisfies the specifications (accuracy, linearity etc.) on the sensor. Although it is possible to set a value outside the flow rate measuring range, the specifications will not be guaranteed. Sensor PF2D54 PF2D52 PF2D54 Others Warning. Since switch output remains OFF while a message is displayed after the power is turned on, start measurement after a value is displayed. 2. Perform settings after stopping control systems. When the switch s initial setting and flow rate setting are performed, output maintains the condition prior to the settings. Output turns OFF when the switch s initial setting and flow rate setting are preformed..4 l/min.8 l/min 4 l/min l/min 2 l/min 4 l/min.4 l/min.25 l/min.8 l/min. l/min 2.5 l/min 4 l/min 4 l/min 4.5 l/min Flow range 2 l/min 2 l/min 4 l/min 45 l/min Rated flow rate range of sensor Set flow rate range of sensor SE ISE PSE I SE PS I SE 2 SP ISA2 IS SM PF2 IF Data 6--47

208 For details about certified products conforming to international standards, visit us at Diaphragm Style Flow Switch Series IFW5 The flow switch, series IFW is used for detection and confirmation of the flow as a relaying device for the general water applications in some various equipment such as cooling water fixture in the industrial machinery. Low flow setting possible ( l/min) Simple flow setting Without removing the cover, you can set with a screwdriver from the outside. PAT. PEND Specifications Fluid Operating pressure Water resistance Operating temperature range Operation Insulation resistance Withstand voltage Contact Port size Body material in contact with fluid material About the use of, please confirm SMC. How to Order IFW5 N Diaphragm style flow switch Flow range to l/min 2 to 2 l/min 5 2 to 5 l/min Thread type Nil Rc N NPT F G Port size 4 6 /8 /2 /4 Body Rod Diaphragm Light None With neon light ( VAC, Red) 2 With neon light ( VAC, Green) With neon light (22 VAC, Red) 4 With neon light (22 VAC, Green) Note) 5 With LED light (24 VDC, Red) Note) 6 With LED light (24 VDC, Green) Note) LED light is available for 5, 6, 7, 8 (with terminal box for 24 VDC). Terminal box Without terminal box (Contact: ab) With terminal box (Contact: ab) 2 With terminal box (Contact: b) Note) 5 With terminal box (24 VDC, + COM, Contact: b) Note) 6 With terminal box (24 VDC, + COM, Contact: a) Note) 7 With terminal box (24 VDC, COM, Contact: b) Note) 8 With terminal box (24 VDC, COM, Contact: a) Note) Terminal box for 24 VDC is available for 5, 6 (LED light). Water/Non-corrosive liquid. to.6 MPa.2 MPa 5 to 6 C (No freezing) Diaphragm style MΩ (5 DC by megameter) 5 VAC for one min. Without terminal box: ab With terminal box: a or b /8, /2, /4 BC6 C64B NBR SE ISE PSE I SE PS I SE 2 SP ISA2 IS SM PF2 IF Data 6-2-

209 Series IFW5 2 Micro Switch Ratings Model Voltage 25 VAC 25 VAC 8 VDC 4 VDC VDC 25 VDC 25 VDC Non inductive load (A) Inductive load (A) Load resistance Light load Inductive load Motor load N.C. N.O. N.C. N.O. N.C. N.O. N.C. N.O Model Flow range (l/min) Max. flow (l/min) Note) Hysteresis (l/min) IFW5 to 2 or less IFW52 to or less IFW55 2 to 5 6 or less Note) Hysteresis is the flow rate that is necessary for moving the microswitch from the operation position (ON signal) to the return position (OFF signal). Construction/Working Principle Adjusting gear Working Principle Liquid flow creates a pressure differential nearby the orifice of the port of the body q. One set of diaphragms monitors the pressure differential and operates the micro switch through the rod w and operating lever r. The rod w moves downward with increased flow, and upward with decreased flow. Moving the gear t upward or downward by the adjusting gear e manually offers an electric signal at various flow rates. Component Parts No. q w e Gear Flow setting indication lever Body Rod Description Body Rod Gear Material BC6 C64B POM No. r t Micro switch Description Operating lever Adjusting gear Operating lever Protection diaphragm Material SPCC POM Flow Characteristics IFW5 Pressure drop (MPa) IFW52 Pressure drop (MPa) IFW55 Pressure drop (MPa) P =.6 MPa P =.5 MPa P =.4 MPa P =. MPa P =.2 MPa P =. MPa Flow rate (l/min) Flow rate (l/min) P =.6 MPa P =.5 MPa P =.4 MPa P =. MPa P =.2 MPa P =. MPa P =.6 MPa P =.5 MPa P =.4 MPa P =. MPa P =.2 MPa P =. MPa Flow rate (l/min) 6-2-2

210 Diaphragm Style Flow Switch Series IFW5 Dimensions IFW5 - - to 4 (Without terminal box) SE ISE PSE I SE With neon light Lead wire length 5 PS IFW5 - - to 24 (With terminal box) 2-/8, /2, /4 With neon light I SE 2 SP ISA2 IS SM PF2 IF Data 2-/8, /2, /4 6-2-

211 Series IFW5 4 IFW to 86 (With light, Terminal box for 24 VDC) 2-/8, /2, /4 n 6-2-4

212 Diaphragm Style Flow Switch Series IFW5 5 Internal Wiring Diagram IFW5 - -//2 Precautions C (COM) A (N.O.) B (N.C.) Symbol C A B Contact Common Normally Open Normally Closed Color of lead wire Black White Red Be sure to read before handling. Refer to pages 6-4- to for Safety Instructions and Common Precautions on the products mentioned in this catalog, and refer to pages 6-- to 6-- for Precautions on every series. IFW5 - - to 4/ to 4/2 to 24 C (COM) IFW /56 24 VDC N.O. IFW /66 24 VDC N.C. IFW /76 24 VDC N.O. IFW /86 24 VDC N.C. q q q q w w w w N.C. N.O. N.C. N.O. A (N.O.) B (N.C.) e e e e Symbol C A B Symbol q w e Symbol q w e Symbol q w e Symbol q w e Contact Common Normally Open Normally Closed Contact Power supply (Common) Terminal (Relay terminal) Power supply (Light terminal) Contact Power supply (Common) Terminal (Relay terminal) Power supply (Light terminal) Contact Power supply (Common) Terminal (Relay terminal) Power supply (Light terminal) Contact Power supply (Common) Terminal (Relay terminal) Power supply (Light terminal) Color of lead wire Black White Red Color of lead wire Black Red Blue Color of lead wire Black White Blue Color of lead wire Black Red Gray Color of lead wire Black White Gray Caution Mounting & Wiring. Mount a switch, so that the liquid flow is in the same direction as that of the arrow on the body. 2. The flow switch can be installed either horizontally or vertically.. Provide a straight pipe portion that corresponds to approximately 5 times the bore of the pipe before and after the area of the pipe on which the product is installed, thus keeping the product as far away as possible from the elements that disturb the flow, such as elbows or valves. 4. For wiring, refer to the internal wiring diagram. 5. If a terminal box is not available, wire by selecting the contact at a or b. At that time, insulate the lead wires that will not be used. 6. Because this is an open style, it cannot be used where water or oil splashes. 7. It cannot be used if a water hammer or pulsation pressure is applied to the fluid. 8. In order to prevent a malfunction or diaphragm damage caused by debris or cutting chips in the fluid, install a filter with approximately mesh on the inlet side of a flow switch. Caution Adjusting. To adjust flow, remove grommet of the upper cover and rotate flow adjusting gear using a flat head screwdriver. Turning clockwise can increase the set flow and turning counterclock can decrease the set flow. 2. Align the indicator needle to the graduation on the left side of the window name plate if the IN side pressure is. MPa, and to the graduation on the right side if the pressure is.2 MPa. (Refer to Fig. ().). The flow rate setting point is set at the ON flow rate. Therefore, in the case of the a contact, the ON signal is output if fluid with a higher flow rate than the set flow rate has occurred. In the case of the b contact, the OFF signal is output when the flow rate has decreased from the set flow rate for the amount that corresponds to the hysteresis. 4. If the IN side pressure exceeds.2 MPa, the setting cannot be made with the graduation on the window name plate. Therefore, perform the setting by installing a flow rate gauge on the outlet side of the flow switch. 5. To prevent the chattering that is associated with the fluctuation of the operating flow rate, set the difference between the set flow rate and the operating flow rate so that it is as large as possible. 6. Use at or below the maximum operating pressure and maximum flow rate. Graduations for IN pressure. MPa Graduations for adjusting on flow rate Graduations for IN pressure.2 MPa SE ISE PSE I SE PS I SE 2 SP ISA2 IS SM PF2 IF Data Fig. () Viewing faceplate 6-2-5

213 For details about certified products conforming to international standards, visit us at Paddle Style Flow Switch Series IF How to Order IF series flow switches detect and confirm liquid flow, generally used in fields such as air conditioning, water supply equipment, etc. Piping sizes ranges from /4B to 6B. Wide range of applicable fluids. Wetted metal part materials: Copper alloy, Stainless steel Various enclosures (No water protected). Open type, Dripproof/Rainproof, Splashproof /Low jetproof type Paddle style flow switch Enclosure IF N Open type Dripproof/Rainproof type (Equivalent to IP42) Splashproof/Low jetproof type 2 (Equivalent to IP44) ON-flow range 4 to 6 l/min 2 to 5 l/min 6 to 26 l/min Specifications Fluid Max. pressure Water resistance Insulation resistance Withstand voltage Contact Port size Copper alloy Stainless steel 4 Micro Switch Ratings Voltage 25 VAC 25 VAC 8 VDC 4 VDC VDC 25 VDC 25 VDC N.C Thread type Nil Rc N NPT Non inductive load (A) Load resistance Seal material of wetted parts NBR FPM Metal material for wetted parts Brass, Phosphor bronze Stainless steel 4 Port size 6 /4 Note ) IF is available for 6. Note 2) IF and IF are available for. Water/Non corrosive liquid Liquid, which do not corrode stainless steel 4. MPa.75 MPa MΩ (5 DC by megameter) 5 VAC for one min. ab /4, Light load Inductive load Inductive load (A) N.O. N.C. N.O. N.C. N.O. N.C. N.O Motor load